SJ-20120615152640-007-ZXA10 PON Optical Access Convergence Equipment NetNumen Help (NetNumenU31R20V12.12.40)

ZXA10 PON
Optical Access Convergence Equipment
NetNumen Help
Version: NetNumenU31R20V12.12.40
ZTE CORPORATION
NO. 55, Hi-tech Road South, ShenZhen, P.R.China
Postcode: 518057
Tel: +86-755-26771900
Fax: +86-755-26770801
URL: http://ensupport.zte.com.cn
E-mail: support@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright 2013 ZTE CORPORATION.
The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written
consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited.
Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by
contractual confidentiality obligations.

All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.
This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions
are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose,
title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the
use of or reliance on the information contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications
covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE
CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter
herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.
Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
R1.0
2012-11-30
First Edition
Publishing Date: 2012-11-30 (R1.0)
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ZTE Proprietary and Confidential
Contents
Chapter 1 System Management ................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Viewing and Configuring the System Information .................................................. 1-1
1.2 Hardware Management ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 Adding or Deleting a Card......................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 Resetting or Swapping a Card................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Managing Cards................................................................................................. 1-5
1.4 Time Management ............................................................................................. 1-8
1.4.1 Configuring the NE Time........................................................................... 1-8
1.4.2 Configuring NTP Service Management ...................................................... 1-9
1.5 Configuring the Trap Server .............................................................................. 1-12
1.6 NE File Management........................................................................................ 1-14
1.6.1 Managing the Software ........................................................................... 1-14
1.6.2 Backing Up and Restoring the Configuration File...................................... 1-17
1.6.3 Backing Up an NE File............................................................................ 1-19
1.6.4 ONU Software Management ................................................................... 1-20
1.7 CLI User and Log Management......................................................................... 1-25
1.7.1 Configuring CLI Users ............................................................................ 1-25
1.7.2 Managing NE Logs................................................................................. 1-27
1.7.3 Configuring the Syslog Server ................................................................. 1-28
1.8 Configuring UAPS Protection ............................................................................ 1-30
1.9 Configuring MAC Address Binding or Filtering .................................................... 1-31
1.10 System Parameter Configuration ..................................................................... 1-33
1.10.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring ...................................................... 1-33
1.10.2 Configuring Overheat Protection............................................................ 1-34
1.10.3 Configuring LMI and Packet Rate Limiting.............................................. 1-35
1.10.4 Configuring MAC Table Statistics........................................................... 1-36
Chapter 2 Protocol and Service Configuration........................................ 2-1

2.1 Configuring a Service Port .................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 VLAN Configuration............................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.1 Configuring a Static VLAN ........................................................................ 2-4
2.2.2 Configuring the Port VLAN ........................................................................ 2-5
2.2.3 Configuring the SmartGroup Port VLAN..................................................... 2-8
2.2.4 Configuring Global VLAN TPID ............................................................... 2-10
I
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.2.5 Configuring the 1:1 VLAN ....................................................................... 2-10

2.2.6 Configuring the Interworking VLAN.......................................................... 2-12
2.2.7 Viewing the Port VLAN Performance ....................................................... 2-13
2.2.8 Configuring ONU VLAN Translation......................................................... 2-14
2.2.9 Configuring VLAN Global Translation....................................................... 2-15
2.2.10 Configuring Smart QinQ Global Parameters ........................................... 2-16
2.2.11 Enabling Smart QinQ ............................................................................ 2-17
2.2.12 Configuring Smart QinQ........................................................................ 2-19
2.2.13 Configuring Smart QinQ Based on Smartgroup ...................................... 2-21
2.2.14 Configuring Port VLAN Rate Limiting ..................................................... 2-22
2.2.15 Configuring VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting ....................................... 2-23
2.3 Multicast Management...................................................................................... 2-24
2.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................... 2-24
2.3.2 Configuring the IGMP Parameters ........................................................... 2-25
2.3.3 Configuring the User Interface Parameters............................................... 2-28
2.3.4 Configuring the Multicast VLAN............................................................... 2-29
2.4 QoS Management ............................................................................................ 2-32
2.4.1 Configuring the Ethernet Queue Mapping ................................................ 2-32
2.4.2 Profiles .................................................................................................. 2-33
2.4.3 Port Configuration .................................................................................. 2-47
2.5 DHCP Configuration ......................................................................................... 2-52
2.5.1 Configuring DHCP Snooping................................................................... 2-52
2.5.2 Viewing the DHCP Snooping Online Users .............................................. 2-54
2.6 Port Location ................................................................................................... 2-54
2.6.1 Configuring PPPoE Plus ......................................................................... 2-54
2.6.2 Configuring DHCP Option 82 .................................................................. 2-59
2.6.3 Configuring DHCPv6 Option 18............................................................... 2-64
2.7 L2 Protocol Management .................................................................................. 2-68
2.7.1 ACL....................................................................................................... 2-68
2.7.2 STP....................................................................................................... 2-80
2.7.3 LACP .................................................................................................... 2-88
2.8 L3 Protocol Management .................................................................................. 2-92
2.8.1 Configuring a Layer 3 Interface ............................................................... 2-92
2.8.2 DHCP.................................................................................................... 2-95
2.9 Configuring OSPF ...........................................................................................2-104
2.10 NE Security Configuration ..............................................................................2-105
2.10.1 Configuring the ARP MFF Gateway ......................................................2-105
II
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.10.2 Configuring Anti-DoS Management.......................................................2-107

2.10.3 Configuring MAC Anti-Spoofing ............................................................2-108
2.10.4 Configuring the CLI Login Users ........................................................... 2-110
2.10.5 Configuring Port IP Source Guard ........................................................ 2-111
Chapter 3 Device Configuration and Management ................................. 3-1

3.1 Port Management............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Configuring the Uplink Port ....................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Configuring the EPON Port ......................................................................3-11
3.1.3 Configuring the GPON Port..................................................................... 3-15
3.2 PON Global Configuration Management ............................................................ 3-19
3.2.1 Profile Configuration ............................................................................... 3-19
3.2.2 Configuring the OLT IP Address Pool....................................................... 3-67
3.2.3 Configuring the PON Authentication Mode ............................................... 3-69
3.2.4 Configuring PON Encryption ................................................................... 3-70
3.2.5 Configuring PON Port Protection ............................................................. 3-71
3.2.6 Duplicating Configuration Data of a PON Port .......................................... 3-74
3.2.7 Managing Unauthenticated ONUs ........................................................... 3-75
3.2.8 Viewing the ONU Topology Graph ........................................................... 3-78
3.3 ONU Management ........................................................................................... 3-79
3.3.1 Managing an ONU.................................................................................. 3-80
3.3.2 Viewing Detailed Information of an ONU .................................................. 3-82
3.3.3 Restoring ONU Factory Settings.............................................................. 3-83
3.3.4 Managing Unauthenticated ONUs ........................................................... 3-84
3.3.5 Synchronizing the MDUs to the Main Topology......................................... 3-84
3.3.6 Configuring an EPON UNI Port ............................................................... 3-85
3.3.7 Configuring a GPON UNI Port ................................................................. 3-88
3.3.8 Configuring the Maintenance and Diagnosis Management ........................ 3-92
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Configuration and Management............................ 4-1

4.1 Diagnosing a PON Optical Module ...................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Configuring the Rogue ONU Detecting Function................................................... 4-3
4.3 Querying a MAC Address ................................................................................... 4-4
4.4 Performing the Service Simulation Test................................................................ 4-5
Chapter 5 OLT Commissioning Configuration ........................................ 5-1

Chapter 6 FTTB ONU Configuration ......................................................... 6-1
6.1 EPON FTTB Configuration.................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 Adding an EPON ONU ............................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Authenticating an EPON ONU................................................................... 6-2
III
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
6.1.3 NE Creation ............................................................................................. 6-4

6.1.4 Global Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6-8
6.1.5 Configuring an ADSL Offline Line Profile.................................................. 6-15
6.1.6 Service Configuration ............................................................................. 6-16
6.2 ZXA10 F822 Configuration................................................................................ 6-33
6.2.1 Adding a GPON ONU ............................................................................. 6-33
6.2.2 Authenticating a GPON ONU .................................................................. 6-34
6.2.3 NE Creation ........................................................................................... 6-37
6.2.4 Global Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 6-37
6.2.5 Service Configuration ............................................................................. 6-37
Chapter 7 ONU Pre-deployment................................................................ 7-1

Chapter 8 FTTB ONU Service Provisioning ............................................. 8-1
8.1 9806H Service Provisioning ................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Provisioning the 9806H Broadband Service ............................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Provisioning the 9806H Multicast Service................................................... 8-4
8.1.3 Provisioning the 9806H VoIP Service......................................................... 8-6
8.2 F822 Service Provisioning .................................................................................. 8-8
8.2.1 Provisioning the F822 Broadband Service.................................................. 8-8
8.2.2 Provisioning the F822 Multicast Service................................................... 8-10
8.2.3 Provisioning the F822 VoIP Service ......................................................... 8-13
Chapter 9 FTTH ONU Service Provisioning ............................................. 9-1

9.1 EPON ONU Service Provisioning ........................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1 Adding an EPON ONU ............................................................................. 9-1
9.1.2 Authenticating an EPON ONU................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Provisioning the Broadband Service .......................................................... 9-5
9.1.4 Provisioning the Multicast Service ........................................................... 9-10
9.1.5 Provisioning the VoIP Service ................................................................. 9-18
9.2 GPON ONU Service Provisioning ...................................................................... 9-25
9.2.1 Adding a GPON ONU ............................................................................. 9-25
9.2.2 Authenticating a GPON ONU .................................................................. 9-27
9.2.3 Provisioning the Broadband Service ........................................................ 9-29
9.2.4 Provisioning the Multicast Service ........................................................... 9-35
9.2.5 Provisioning the VoIP Service ................................................................. 9-43
Chapter 10 Alarm and Fault Handling .................................................... 10-1

10.1 Alarm and Fault Handling Flow........................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Querying and Locating ONU In the Whole Network........................................... 10-3
10.3 Handling an ONU Alarm.................................................................................. 10-7
IV
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
10.4 Handling an ONU Fault................................................................................... 10-8

10.5 Port Fault Handling........................................................................................ 10-11
10.5.1 Handling FTTB ONU Broadband Port Fault ...........................................10-12
10.5.2 Handling FTTB ONU VoIP Port Faults...................................................10-17
10.5.3 Handling FTTH ONU VoIP Port Faults ..................................................10-21
Chapter 11 Routine Maintenance ............................................................ 11-1

11.1 Managing ONUs Centrally................................................................................11-1
11.2 Collecting Resource Statistics ..........................................................................11-6
11.3 Collecting Alarm Statistics ................................................................................11-9
11.4 Upgrading the ZXA10 C300 Version................................................................ 11-10
11.5 Checking the Policy Execution........................................................................ 11-11
11.6 Managing Logs.............................................................................................. 11-14
Chapter 12 Other System Operations..................................................... 12-1

12.1 NetNumen U31 Configuration Center............................................................... 12-1
12.1.1 Starting the Configuration Center........................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Configuring the Backup Parameters of the NMS Server Database ........... 12-2
12.1.3 Configuring Server Process Instances ................................................... 12-3
12.1.4 Configuring the FTP Service ................................................................. 12-5
12.1.5 Configuring the Trap Filter Mode ........................................................... 12-7
12.1.6 Configuring the MOC Type.................................................................... 12-9
12.1.7 Configuring the MOC Name Rule .........................................................12-10
12.1.8 Configuring the Database Connection................................................... 12-11
12.1.9 Configuring the OS NTP Parameters ....................................................12-14
12.1.10 Configuring the System Backup FTP Parameters ................................12-15
12.2 Deleting Temporary Files ...............................................................................12-16
12.3 Backing Up and Restoring the NetNumen U31 Databases ...............................12-18
12.4 Exporting Diagnosis Logs ..............................................................................12-27
Glossary .......................................................................................................... I
V
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
VI
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 1
System Management
Table of Contents
Viewing and Configuring the System Information........................................................1-1
Hardware Management ..............................................................................................1-2
Managing Cards.........................................................................................................1-5
Time Management .....................................................................................................1-8
Configuring the Trap Server .....................................................................................1-12
NE File Management................................................................................................1-14
CLI User and Log Management................................................................................1-25
Configuring UAPS Protection ...................................................................................1-30
Configuring MAC Address Binding or Filtering ..........................................................1-31
System Parameter Configuration..............................................................................1-33
1.1 Viewing and Configuring the System Information

This procedure describes how to view and configure the system information.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window of NetNumen U31 Unified Management
System, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE and select Open Rack Diagram. The Rack
window is displayed.
2. In the Rack window, right-click the main control card and select System Management
> System Information. The System Information window is displayed, see Figure
1-1.
1-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ZXA10 PON NetNumen Help
Figure 1-1 System Information Dialog Box
3. View and configure the system parameters.

System Name identifies different NEs in command line mode.
When you log in to the NE in command line mode, System Name is displayed in front
of the prompt (#), see Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 System Name
4. Click Set.
End of Steps
1.2 Hardware Management

This section includes the following:
l
l
Adding or deleting a card

Resetting or swapping a card
1.2.1 Adding or Deleting a Card

This procedure describes how to add or delete a service card.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE and select
Open Rack Diagram. The Rack window is displayed.
1-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 1 System Management
Figure 1-3 shows the Rack window of ZXA10 C300.

Figure 1-3 Rack Window of ZXA10 C300

1-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2. Add or delete a card.

ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
l
Add a card.
i.
Right-click a blank slot and select Add Card. The Add Card dialog box is
displayed.
ii.
Select a card, and then click OK.
Delete a card.
i.
Right-click a card and select Delete Card.

displayed.
ii.
Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is
End of Steps
1.2.2 Resetting or Swapping a Card

This procedure describes how to reset or swap a card.
Steps
System Management > Reset/Swap Card. The Reset/Swap Card window is
displayed, see Figure 1-6.
1-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-6 Reset/Swap Card Window
2. Click
next to Card. The Select Card dialog box is displayed.
l Select a service card, and then click OK. In the Reset/Swap Card window, click
Reset to reset the card.
l Select the active main control card, and then click OK. In the Reset/Swap Card
window, click Swap to switch the active main control card to the standby one.
End of Steps
1.3 Managing Cards

This procedure describes how to manage all the cards of the ZXA10 C300, including
viewing the card status, viewing the current alarms, managing ports, configuring cards,
configuring devices, and managing the software.
Steps
Card Manager. The Card Manager window is displayed.
Figure 1-7 shows the Card Manager window of ZXA10 C300.
1-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-7 Card Manager Window of ZXA10 C300

1-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2. View the status information on all the configured cards of the NE, including the card
type, status, software, and operation information.
In the Card Manager window, you can perform the following operations:
l
View and handle the current active alarms.

i.
Right-click a card and select Active Alarms. The Active Alarms dialog box
is displayed. You can view and handle the active alarms. For a description of
the parameters, refer to Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Operations on Active Alarms
Button
Description
Severity
To view the active alarms by severity.
ACK State
To view the active alarms by acknowledgement state.
Visibility
To view the active alarms by visibility.

To export the active alarm list to the local disk.
You can choose to export all columns or visible columns
of alarms.
To print the active alarm list.
To stop or continue refresh, whether to update the alarm
list in real time.
To customize the alarm parameters displayed in the
Active Alarms dialog box.
1-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
l
Right-click an alarm and select an option from the shortcut menu to handle
the alarm.
View and configure the card information.

i.
Right-click a card and select Details. The Card Information window is

displayed.
ii.
View the card information.
iii. Configure the card information. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Card Information Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
CPU Load(%)
When the Central Processing Unit (CPU) usage exceeds

this threshold, an alarm is reported.
Memory Usage(%)
When the memory usage exceeds this threshold, an

alarm is reported.
Lock Status
Enabled: The subscriber services on the card are

interrupted.
Disabled: The subscriber services on the card are

normal.
iv. Click Reset.

l
l
l
Right-click a card and select Reset to reset the card.

Right-click the main control card and select Swap to switch the services to the
secondary main control card.
Right-click a card and select Port Management. In the displayed Port Manager
window, configure the port parameters. For detailed operations, refer to 3.1 Port
Management.
Click Device Configuration. In the displayed Device Configuration window,
configure the NE rack, shelf, and service cards. For detailed operations, refer to
1.6.1 Managing the Software.
End of Steps
1.4 Time Management

1.4.1 Configuring the NE Time
This procedure describes how to configure the NE time.
Prerequisite
The Rack window is open.
1-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
> NE Time. The NE Time window is displayed, see Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 NE Time Window
2. Set the NE time. For a description of the NE time parameters, refer to Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 NE Time Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
NE Time
Using NE Time: Set the NE current time.
Using NMS Time: The NE time is consistent with the NMS

server time.
3. Click Set.
Note:
If Apply to NEs in Batches is selected, the time is set for multiple NEs in batches.
End of Steps
1.4.2 Configuring NTP Service Management

This procedure describes how to configure the Network Time Protocol (NTP) service
parameters. After the NTP service is configured, the NE automatically synchronizes time
with the server periodically to ensure the correct NE time.
Prerequisite
1-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
> NTP Service. The NTP Service Management window is displayed, see Figure 1-11.
Figure 1-11 NTP Service Management Window
2. Configure the NTP service parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 1-4.
Table 1-4 NTP Service Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
NTP Status
Enable: The NE synchronizes time with the NTP server.
Disable: The NE uses the local time.
NTP Server IP
NTP server IP address

When the NMS server is the NTP server, this address is the NMS
server IP address and the NTP service on the NMS server needs
to be enabled.
NTP Client IP
Source IP address of the request packet that the NTP client sends
to the NTP server. By default, it is the NMS server IP address.
NTP Protocol Version
This parameter should be consistent with the NTP server

configuration. It can be 1, 2, or 3.
1-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Synchronization Interval (s)
Time interval that the NE synchronizes time with the NTP server.
Default: 300 s
Current Clock Offset (s)
When the time offset between the NE and the NTP server exceeds
this threshold, an alarm is reported.
Default: 7 s
3. Click Set.
Note:
If Apply to NEs in Batches is selected, the NTP service parameters are set for
multiple NEs in batches.
4. To use the NMS server as the NTP server, perform the following operations to enable
the NTP service on the NMS server:
a. Start the NetNumen Config Center.
The methods for starting NetNumen Config Center are different in Solaris and
Windows, refer to Table 1-5.
Table 1-5 Startup Methods of NetNumen Config Center
Operating
Startup Method
System
Solaris
Go to the NMS installation path /netnumen/ems/bin, and then run

configcenter.sh. For example,
bash-3.00# cd export/home/netnumen/ems/bin
bash-3.00# ./configcenter.sh
Windows
You can start NetNumen Config Center in Windows in the following

ways:
l
Go to the NMS installation path \netnumen\ems\bin,

double-click configcenter.bat.
Double-click the shortcut icon
b. From the left pane of the NetNumen (TM) Unified Management System window,
select Configuration Center > OS NTP Configuration > OS NTP Configuration,
see Figure 1-12.
1-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-12 OS NTP Configuration Window
c. Configure the NTP service for the Operating System (OS). For a description of the
NTP service parameters, refer to Table 1-6.
Table 1-6 OS NTP Service Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Enable external clock
The OS time of the NMS server is synchronized with that of the
source
external NTP server.

When the external clock source is enabled, the main clock
server IP address needs be configured and the standby clock
server IP address is optional.
Enable the local clock
The NMS server uses the local clock.
source
NTP service
Start or stop the OS NTP service.
d. Click Apply.
End of Steps
1.5 Configuring the Trap Server

This procedure describes how to configure the trap server to receive the alarm information
from the NEs and thus monitor the NEs.
Prerequisite
1-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
> SNMP Trap Server. The Trap Server Configuration window is displayed, see
Figure 1-13.
Figure 1-13 Trap Server Configuration Window
2. Create a trap server.

a. Click New. The Trap Server Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the trap server parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer
to Table 1-7.
Table 1-7 Trap Server Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
ID
Trap server ID.

Up to eight trap servers can be configured.
Trap Enabling
IP Address
Enabled: To enable the alarm reporting function.
Disabled: To disable the alarm reporting function.
IP address of the trap server, which is usually set to be the IP

address of the NMS server host.
SNMP Version
The NE reports alarms to the trap server through Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP).
This parameter should be consistent with the SNMP version of
the NE.
1-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
SNMP Community
This parameter should be consistent with the SNMP community

of the NE.
Event Format
It is recommended to keep the default value Snmp Trap.
Received Event Level
Lowest severity of the alarms that need to be reported.
Receive Port
Trap server port used to receive the NE alarm information.
c. Click OK.
Note:
If Apply to NEs in Batches is selected, the trap server is set for multiple NEs in
batches.
3. To modify a trap server, select it and click Modify.

4. To delete a trap server, select it and click Delete.
End of Steps
1.6 NE File Management

NE file management includes the following:
l
l
l
l
Managing the software

Backing up and restoring the configuration file
Backing up the NE file
ONU software management
1.6.1 Managing the Software

This procedure describes how to upload, download, synchronize, and swap the NE
software, upload or download the patches, and show the running software and patches.
Steps
System Management > Software Management. The Software Management
window is displayed, see Figure 1-14.
1-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-14 Software Management Window
2. In the Software Management window, perform the following operations.

l Manage the NE software.
Click the Software Archive tab. Perform operations on the NE software. For a
description of the operations, refer to Table 1-8.
Table 1-8 Software Management Operations
Purpose
Operation
To refresh the software list.
Click Refresh.
To upload the software file from
Click Upload. In the displayed dialog box, upload the
the NE to the specified directory
software file.
of the NMS.
To download the software file from
Click Download. In the displayed dialog box,
the NMS directory to the NE.
download the software file.
To download the software file from
Click Schedule Download. In the displayed dialog
the NMS directory to the NE at a
box, download the software file at a specified time.
specified time.
To update the boot file on the
Click Copy Software to Card. In the displayed dialog
online cards.
box, copy the software to the card.
To synchronize the software
Click Synchronize. In the displayed dialog box,
versions between the active and
synchronize the software versions.
standby main control cards.
1-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Purpose
Operation
To swap between the active and
From the software list, select a record, and then click
standby main control cards.
Swap Software. In the displayed Confirm dialog box,

click OK.
To delete the software.
From the software list, select a record, and then click

Delete. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK.
View the running software.

Click the Running Software tab to view the current software version.
Manage the patches.

Click the Patch Archive tab. Perform operations on the NE patches. For a
description of the operations, refer to Table 1-9.
Table 1-9 Patch Management Operations
Purpose
Operation
To upload a patch file from the
Click Upload To NMS. In the displayed dialog box,
NE to the specified directory of
upload the patch file.
the NMS.
To download a patch file from
Click Download To NE. In the displayed dialog box,
the NMS directory to the NE.
download the patch file.
View the running patches.

Click the Running Patch tab to view the running patches.
End of Steps
Example
To upload the software file from the NE to the specified directory of the NMS, perform the
following procedure:
1. On the Software Archive tab, click Upload. The Upload Software dialog box is
displayed.
1-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
In the Upload Software dialog box, the following parameters need to be configured
in NetNumen Config Center.
l
l
l
l
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
Server
Server
Server
Server
IP Address
User Name
Password
Root Directory
2. Select the software that needs to be uploaded, and then click Start.
3. On the Upload Status column, verify that the software is uploaded successfully.
4. Click Close.
1.6.2 Backing Up and Restoring the Configuration File

This procedure describes how to back up and restore the configuration file.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. In the Rack window, right-click the main control card and select NE File Management
> Backup/Restore NE Configuration Data. The Backup/Restore Configuration
File window is displayed, see Figure 1-15.
1-17
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-15 Backup/Restore Configuration File Window
Note:
In the Backup/Restore Configuration File window, the following parameters need to
be configured in NetNumen Config Center.
l
l
l
l
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
Server
Server
Server
Server
IP Address
User Name
Password
Root Directory
2. Back up or restore the NE configuration file

l Back up the NE configuration file to the specified directory of the NMS.
i.
Click the Upload to NMS tab, set the file backup directory. Select the files
that need to be backed up, and then click Start.
Note:
If Remote Upload is selected, the configuration file is backed up to the remote
FTP server.
1-18
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
On the Upload Status column, verify that the configuration file is uploaded
successfully.
Note:
You can click Batch Upload to upload the configuration files of multiple NEs.
Download the NMS backup data to the NE and restore the NE configuration data.
i.
Click the Download to NE tab, select the NMS directory where the file to be
restored is located, and then click Start.
ii.
On the Download Status column, verify that the configuration file is

downloaded successfully.
Note:
You can click Load Default Configuration to restore the NE configuration
data to the factory default settings.
End of Steps
1.6.3 Backing Up an NE File

This procedure describes how to back up an NE file.
Prerequisite
The NE file server is configured.
Steps
System Management > NE File Backup. The NE File Backup window is displayed,
see Figure 1-16.
1-19
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-16 NE File Backup Window
2. In the NE File Backup window, set automatic backup or manual backup for an NE file.
l Set automatic backup for a specified NE file.
i.
Select an NE file, and then click Modify. The Modify Backup Configuration
dialog box is displayed.
ii.
From the Automatic Backup Enabling list, select Enable. For a description
of the NE file backup parameters, refer to Table 1-10 .
Table 1-10 NE File Backup Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Starting Time
Starting time of automatic backup
Interval
Backup interval
Hold Off Time
Backup starting time after the latest modification
Maximum Hold Off Time
Backup starting time after the earliest modification
iii. Click OK.

l
Back up an NE file manually.

i.
Select an NE file, and then click Manual Backup. The Manual Backup dialog
box is displayed.
ii.
Click OK.
3. (Optional) click View Result. The View Backup Result window is displayed.
End of Steps
1.6.4 ONU Software Management

ONU software management includes the following:
l
l
Managing the ONU software updating tasks

Updating the ONU software immediately
1-20
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Viewing the ONU software updating logs
1.6.4.1 Managing ONU Software Updating Tasks

This procedure describes how to manage the Optical Network Unit (ONU) software
updating tasks.
Prerequisite
l
l
The ONUs and their software can be updated.

The ONU update files are downloaded to the ZXA10 C300.
Context
The ZXA10 C300 supports 31 simultaneous ONU updating tasks. The automatic updating
task can update the software of offline ONUs.
The ZXA10 C300 supports task conflict detection. Conflicting tasks cannot be configured
at the same time.
If the service types, vendor IDs, and equipment types of two tasks are the same, the
specified updating scopes cannot overlap. Otherwise, they will conflict.
Steps
System Management > ONU Software Scheduled Updating. The ONU Software
Scheduled Updating window is displayed, see Figure 1-17.
Figure 1-17 ONU Software Scheduled Updating Window
2. Create an ONU software updating task.

1-21
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. Click Create Task. The Create Task dialog box is displayed.

b. On the Task Information tab, set the software updating task parameters. For a
description of the parameters, refer to Table 1-11.
Table 1-11 Parameter Descriptions for the Software Updating Task
Parameter
Description
Task Mode
For All ONU
For Online ONU Only
For Offline ONU Only
Software File Name
ONU software file to be updated
Update Action
Actions for software updating, including:

l
Update and Reboot ONU to Run New Version
Update but Run New Version at Back-online
Reboot ONU only
Maximum Parallel Upgrade
Maximum number of ONUs that can be updated
ONUs
simultaneously
Update Granularity
ONU updating scope, including:
Starting Time/Ending Time
NE: Updates the ONUs for the specified NE.
Card: Updates the ONUs for the specified card.
Port: Updates the ONUs for the specified port.
Time period when the ONU software updating task is to

be performed
Service Type
Service type for software updating
Vendor ID
Vendor ID of the ONUs whose software needs to be

updated
Equipment Type
Equipment type of the ONUs that need to be updated
ONU Version
Original version range of the ONUs that need to be updated
c. Click the NE List tab. Set the ONU updating scope.

d. Click OK.
3. (Optional) Perform the following operations as required:
l To delete an ONU software updating task, select it and click Delete Task.
l To start an ONU software updating task, select it and click Start.
l To view the detailed information on an ONU software updating task, select it and
click Details.
l To query specified tasks, set query conditions in the Query area, and then click
.
End of Steps
1-22
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
1.6.4.2 Updating the ONU Software Immediately

This procedure describes how to manually update the software of a single ONU or a small
batch of ONUs.
Prerequisite
l
l
The ONUs and their software can be updated.

The ONU update file is downloaded to the ZXA10 C300.
Context
l
l
Only online ONUs can be updated manually.

If an ONU does not respond to the manual updating operation, you need to verify that
the ONU is online.
Steps
System Management > ONU Software Immediate Updating. The ONU Software
Immediate Updating window is displayed, see Figure 1-18.
Figure 1-18 ONU Software Immediate Updating Window
2. Select the ONU that needs to be updated.

a. Click Add ONU. The ONU Search window is displayed.
b. Set the searching mode and condition, and then click
c. From the ONU list, select the ONU that needs to be updated, and then click Import.
3. Update the ONU software.
a. Select the name of the update software file and the software updating operation.
1-23
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Click Start Update.

4. (Optional) To delete an ONU that does not need to be updated immediately, select it
from the ONU list, and then click Delete ONU.
5. (Optional) To export the updating result, click Export.
End of Steps
1.6.4.3 Viewing the ONU Software Updating Logs

This procedure describes how to view the ONU software updating logs, including the ONU
location, updating status, and version.
Prerequisite
The ONU software is updated.
Steps
System Management > ONU Software Updating Record. The Software Updating
Log window is displayed, see Figure 1-19.
Figure 1-19 Software Updating Log Window
2. Set the searching location, task name, and updating time. Click
3. (Optional) To export the updating result, click Export.

End of Steps
1-24
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
1.7 CLI User and Log Management

CLI user and log management include the following:
l
l
l
Configuring CLI users

Managing NE logs
Configuring the Syslog server
1.7.1 Configuring CLI Users

This procedure describes how to configure the Command Line Interface (CLI) users,
including the user name, password, user rights, and encryption mode. The configured CLI
users can log in to the ZXA10 C300 NE in CLI mode and configure the NE information.
Steps
System Management > CLI User Configuration. The CLI User Configuration
Figure 1-20 CLI User Configuration Window
2. Add CLI users.

a. Click Add. The Add CLI User dialog box is displayed.
(Optional) Click Batch Add to add CLI users for multiple NEs in batches.
b. Configure the CLI user parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 1-12.
1-25
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 1-12 CLI User Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
User Name
User name, consisting of 116 characters without space.

The user name must be unique and case sensitive.
Password
If password encryption mode is not enabled, the

password consists of 316 characters. The password is
case sensitive.
If password encryption mode is enabled, the password

consists of 24 characters. The encryption algorithm is
MD5.
User Access Level
Common User: The common user enters user mode

after login. The common user can only query data,
which is used to locate faults. After entering the enabling
password, the common user can become a super user
that has all permissions.
Configuration User: The configuration user enters

privilege mode after login. The configuration user can
configure data and provision services, but cannot add
or delete users. After entering the enabling password,
the configuration user can become a super user that
has all permissions.
Administrator: The administrator enters privilege mode

after login. The administrator can manage all the
common users and configuration users, and can perform
all the configurations. After entering the enabling
password, the administrator can become a super user
that has all permissions.
Super User: The super user enters privilege mode after

login. The super user can manage all the common
users, configuration users, and administrators, and can
perform all the configurations.
Enable Encryption Mode
Whether to enable encryption mode.
Password Encryption Mode
No Encryption: The password uses plaintext.
Encryption: The password uses encryption.
Maximum Logon Sessions
Maximum number of users that can log in to the device.
c. Click OK.
l To delete a CLI user, select it and click Delete.
l To modify a CLI user, select it and click Modify.
l To view the detailed information on a CLI user, select it and click View.
1-26
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
To delete a CLI user from multiple NEs in batches, select the user and click Batch
Delete.
To modify a CLI user of multiple NEs in batches, select the user and click Batch
Modify.
End of Steps
1.7.2 Managing NE Logs

This procedure describes how to manage the NE logs, including enabling NE logs and
querying logs.
Prerequisite
The NE log management function is enabled on the NMS server.
Context
By default, the NE log management function is disabled on the NMS server. The process
for enabling this function is as follows:
1. Go to the NMS server installation path: ums-server\procs\ppus\an.ppu\an-c
ommonsh.pmu\an-commonsh-nelog-emf.par.
2. Delete the suffix .bak from the file zxnm01-nelog-service.xml.bak.
3. Restart the NMS server.
Steps
1. Configure the Syslog server. For detailed operations, refer to 1.7.3 Configuring the
Syslog Server.
2. Enable the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) log function.
a. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE and select
System Management > More > NE Log Enabling. The NE Log Configuration
b. From the SNMP Logging Enable list, select Enabled. Click Apply.
3. View the NE logs.
a. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, right-click the
ZXA10 C300 NE and select System Management > More > NE Log Query.
The NE Operation Log Management window is displayed, see Figure 1-21.
1-27
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-21 NE Operation Log Management Window
b. From the Log navigation tree, select a log type.

l To set the log query conditions, click
.
l To set the log query conditions and export the logs, click
l To set the log query conditions and print the logs, click
.
.
End of Steps
1.7.3 Configuring the Syslog Server

This procedure describes how to configure the Syslog server so that the NE can report the
command logs, SNMP operation logs, debugging information, and alarm logs through the
Syslog protocol.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE and
select System Management > More > Syslog Configuration. The SYSLOG
Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-22.
1-28
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-22 SYSLOG Configuration Window
2. Create a Syslog server item.

a. Click New. The Add SYSLOG Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the Syslog server parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer
to Table 1-13.
Table 1-13 Syslog Configuration Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Server Port
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number used by the Syslog

protocol
The protocol specifies the port number to be 514.
SYSLOG Type
Type of the message reported by the NE.

l
Commands: CLI operation records
SNMP: SNMP operation records
Debug: log messages reported through the Syslog

interface, generally, the printed information that indicating
the system status or service status
SNMP Operation Type
Alarm: alarm messages
All: Sends the SNMP getting and setting operation logs

to the Syslog server.
Get: Sends the SNMP getting operation logs to the Syslog

server.
Set: Sends the SNMP setting operation logs to the Syslog

server.
Minimum Alarm Level
Lowest severity level of the alarms reported by the NE

The NE reports only the alarms whose severity levels are higher
than this level.
1-29
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Click OK.
3. (Optional) To delete a Syslog server item, select it and click Delete.
4. (Optional) To modify a Syslog server item, select it and click Modify.
End of Steps
1.8 Configuring UAPS Protection

This procedure describes how to configure Uplink Automatic Protection Switching (UAPS)
protection.
Context
The ZXA10 C300 supports UAPS of the Ethernet port. The system periodically checks
the working status of the uplink port. When the system detects that the working port is
disconnected or the link quality is deteriorated to a useless degree, it switches the services
to the standby port automatically and without interrupting the services.
Steps
System Management > More > Port UAPS Protection. The UAPS Configuration
Figure 1-23 UAPS Configuration Window
2. Create a UAPS group.

a. Click New. The Add UAPS Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Set the UAPS group ID, and then click OK.
3. Configure the primary and secondary ports of the UAPS group.
a. In the UAPS Configuration window, click Port Configuration. The UAPS Port
Configuration dialog box is displayed.
1-30
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. In the Primary Port List area, select the UAPS primary port from the Port list,
and then click .
c. In the Secondary Port List area, select the UAPS secondary port from the Port
list, and then click .
d. Click OK.
4. Configure the attributes of the UAPS protection group.
a. In the UAPS Configuration window, click Modify.
b. Configure the UAPS protection group parameters.
parameters, refer to Table 1-14.
The Modify UAPS
For a description of the
Table 1-14 UAPS Configuration Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
Switch Type
The ZXA10 C300 supports two types of port attributes:
Automatic Recovery Enabling
Common: physical port switch mode
Trunk: trunk group switch mode
When the fault of the primary port is removed, the system

automatically switches the services to the primary port.
Protection Time
When the UAPS group implements a switchover operation,

it does not implement the switchover again during the
protection time.
c. Click OK.
5. (Optional) To delete a UAPS group, select it and click Delete.
6. (Optional) To switch over the primary port to the secondary port of a UAPS group,
select it and click Swap.
End of Steps
1.9 Configuring MAC Address Binding or Filtering

This procedure describes how to configure binding or filtering between the MAC address
and ONU bridge port.
Steps
System Management > MAC Bind and Filter. The MAC Configuration window is
1-31
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-24 MAC Configuration Window
2. Select the card, PON port, and ONU.

3. Bind a MAC address with the ONU bridge port or filter a MAC address on the ONU
bridge port.
l Bind the MAC address with the ONU bridge port.
i.
On the MAC Binding tab, click Create. The Create MAC Binding dialog box
is displayed.
ii.
Select the bridge port that needs to be bound with a MAC address.
iii. In the MAC Address text box, enter the MAC address.
iv. Click OK.
l
Filter a MAC address on the ONU bridge port.

i.
On the MAC Filter tab, click Create. The Create MAC Filter dialog box is
displayed.
ii.
Select the bridge port that needs to filter a MAC address.
iii. In the MAC Address text box, enter the MAC address.
iv. Click OK.
4. (Optional) To delete a MAC binding item, select it on the MAC Binding tab, and then
click Delete.
5. (Optional) To delete a MAC filtering item, select it on the MAC Filter tab, and then click
Delete.
End of Steps
1-32
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
1.10 System Parameter Configuration

System parameter configuration includes the following:
l
l
l
l
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
environment monitoring
overheat protection
LMI and packet rate limiting
MAC table statistics
1.10.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring

This procedure describes how to configure the environment temperature parameters to
ensure that the device runs in the proper temperature.
Steps
System Management > More > Environment Configuration. The Environment
Figure 1-25 Environment Configuration Window
2. Configure the environment management global parameters.

a. In the Global Configuration area, configure the environment management global
parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to Table 1-15.
1-33
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 1-15 Global Parameter Descriptions for Environment Management

Parameter
Description
Control Card Temperature
When the environment temperature exceeds this threshold,
Alarm Threshold
an alarm is reported.
Fan Speed
Ratios of different fan speeds to the highest fan speed.
Fan Speed Control Mode
Fixed Speed: The fan operates at the fixed speed. You

can view the fan speed on the Fan Management tab.
Auto-Control Based Temperature: Set the temperature for

different fan speeds. The fan speed is adjusted according
to the temperature.
b. Click Set Global.

3. (Optional) Configure the fan management parameters.
a. Click the Fan Management tab, and then view the fan operation status.
b. Select a fan, and then click Modify Fan.
c. In the displayed Modify Fan Management dialog box, configure the fan speed
level and administrative status.
Note:
The fan speed level can be configured only when Fan Speed Control Mode is Fixed
Speed.
4. (Optional) To view the power supply status, click the Power tab.
5. (Optional) To view the card temperature, click the Temperature tab.
End of Steps
1.10.2 Configuring Overheat Protection

This procedure describes how to configure overheat protection. When the temperature
is too high due to fan fault, the NE enters the energy-saving and low-consumption mode
according to the customized policy. The NE lowers the temperature by reducing the
consumption.
Steps
System Management > Overheat Protection Configuration. The Overheat
Protection Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-26.
1-34
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-26 Overheat Protection Configuration Window
2. Configure the overheat protection parameters. For a description of the parameters,

refer to Table 1-16.
Table 1-16 Overheat Protection Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Overheat Protection
Enabled: Enables overheat protection.
Enabling
Disabled: Disables overheat protection.
Overheat Temperature
When the NE temperature exceeds this threshold, overheat
Threshold
protection is enabled.
Automatic Recovery Time
Time for service automatic recovery after overheat protection is

enabled.
3. Click Modify.
Note:
You can select Apply to NEs in Batches to set overheat protection for multiple NEs
in batches.
End of Steps
1.10.3 Configuring LMI and Packet Rate Limiting

This procedure describes how to enable or disable Local Management Interface (LMI) and
set a limit to the forwarding rate of packets.
Steps
System Management > More > LMI Enabling and Rate Limiting. The LMI Enabling
and Rate Limiting window is displayed, see Figure 1-27.
1-35
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-27 LMI Enabling and Rate Limiting Window
2. From the Craft Terminal Interface list, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable
the Command Line Interface (CLI) operations on the NE serial port or out-of-band NMS
interface.
3. Select the check boxes in front of different packet types to set the maximum rates to
forward such types of packets received by the NE.
4. Click Apply.
End of Steps
1.10.4 Configuring MAC Table Statistics

This procedure describes how to view the statistics of the NE dynamic Media Access
Control (MAC) table, and then configure the monitoring parameters and MAC address
aging time.
Steps
System Management > MAC Table Statistics. The MAC Table Statistics window
is displayed, see Figure 1-28.
1-36
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 1-28 MAC Table Statistics Window
2. View the statistics parameters of the dynamic MAC address table.

3. Configure the monitoring parameters of the MAC address table, including the usage
alarm threshold and monitoring period.
4. Configure the MAC address aging time.
5. Click Set.
End of Steps
1-37
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
This page intentionally left blank.
1-38
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 2
Protocol and Service

Configuration
Table of Contents
Configuring a Service Port..........................................................................................2-1
VLAN Configuration....................................................................................................2-3
Multicast Management .............................................................................................2-24
QoS Management ....................................................................................................2-32
DHCP Configuration.................................................................................................2-52
Port Location ............................................................................................................2-54
L2 Protocol Management .........................................................................................2-68
L3 Protocol Management .........................................................................................2-92
Configuring OSPF ..................................................................................................2-104
NE Security Configuration ......................................................................................2-105
2.1 Configuring a Service Port

This procedure describes how to configure a service port. The system adds the CVLAN or
CVLAN + SVLAN to user-side packets according to different rules when forwarding them.
Prerequisite
l
l
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.

The ONU is created.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Service
Port. The service port parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-1.
2-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-1 NE Protocol Manager Window - Service Port Configuration
2. Configure the service port parameters.

a. Select the rack, shelf, card, port, and ONU.
b. Click New. The Add Service Port dialog box is displayed.
c. In the Service Port Modes navigation tree, select a service port mode.
d. In the right pane, configure the service port parameters. For a description of the
Table 2-1 Service Port Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Vport
Virtual port of the specified ONU.

By default, one virtual port corresponds to one GEM port.
Service Port
Service port of the specified ONU.

You can select different service ports to configure the
user-side broadband services, the TLS, VLAN QinQ and
VLAN translation.
Description
Description of the service mode.
User EtherType
Ethernet type of user-side untagged packets, including

PPPoE, IPoE, and UserDefined.
User Defined EtherType
User-side Ethernet type.
Filter Frames by EtherType
Filters the frames by Ethernet type.
User CoS
Priority of a user-side packet.
User VLAN
VLAN ID contained by user-side tagged packets.
2-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter
Description
Start VID
Specified starting VLAN ID contained by user-side tagged

packets.
End VID
Specified ending VLAN ID contained by user-side tagged

packets.
User S-VID
SVLAN ID contained by user-side tagged packets.
User DSCP
DSCP ID contained by the user-side VLAN tagged packets.
C-VID
Inner VLAN ID of the double-tagged VLAN.
S-VID
Outer VLAN ID of the double-tagged VLAN.
S-Tag CoS
Outer VLAN priority of the user packets.
TLS S-VID
TLS S-VID added to the user-side untagged packets when

being forwarded.
Ingress Traffic Profile
Controls the ingress traffic on the service port of the PON

ONU.
Egress Traffic Profile
Controls the egress traffic on the service port of the PON ONU.
VLAN Translation Mode
When the VLAN translation mode is set to 1:1, packets are

exchanged in accordance with VLAN IDs, rather than the
MAC + VLAN forwarding mechanism.
e. Click OK.
l To modify a service port configuration item, select it and click Modify.
l To delete a service port configuration item, select it and click Delete.
l To export a service port configuration item as a profile, select it and select Profile
> Export to profile.
l To import the service port configuration from a profile, select it and select Profile
> Import from profile.
End of Steps
2.2 VLAN Configuration

VLAN configuration includes the following:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Static VLAN
Port VLAN
SmartGroup port VLAN
Global VLAN TPID
1:1 VLAN
Interworking VLAN
Port VLAN performance viewing
ONU VLAN translation
2-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
VLAN global translation

Smart QinQ global parameters
Smart QinQ enabling
Smart QinQ
Smart QinQ based on Smartgroup
Port VLAN rate limiting
VLAN packet storm rate limiting
2.2.1 Configuring a Static VLAN

This procedure describes how to configure a static VLAN, which is used to logically divide
equipment ports into network segments to control communication between ports.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click VLAN >
Static VLAN. The static VLAN parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure
2-2.
Figure 2-2 NE Protocol Manager Window - Static VLAN Configuration
2. Create a static VLAN.

a. Click Add. The Add Static VLAN Properties dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the static VLAN property parameters.
2-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-2 Static VLAN Property Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
Transparent Enabling
If transparent transmission is enabled, the system forwards data

according to VLAN IDs rather than MAC addresses.
It is recommended to keep the default value Disabled.
c. Click OK.
l To modify a VLAN, select it and click Modify.
l To delete a VLAN, select it and click Delete.
l To view the ports that are bound with a VLAN, right-click the VLAN and select
Advanced > Port Binding Info. You can view all the ports that are added to the
VLAN in tagged or untagged mode.
l To modify a VLAN Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID), right-click the VLAN and select
Advanced > VLAN TPID.
End of Steps
2.2.2 Configuring the Port VLAN

This procedure describes how to add the uplink port and service port of an NE to a service
VLAN.
Prerequisite
Steps
Port VLAN. The port VLAN parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure
2-3.
2-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-3 NE Protocol Manager Window - Port VLAN Configuration
2. Configure the uplink port VLAN.

a. In the NE Protocol Manager window, select the rack, shelf, and slot number of
the uplink card.
b. Select a port, and then click Modify. The Modify Port VLAN Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
c. Configure the uplink port properties. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Parameter Descriptions for Uplink Port VLAN Properties
Parameter
Description
VLAN Mode
Hybrid: Both untagged and tagged packets can be

forwarded.
Port PVID
Trunk: Only tagged packets can be forwarded.
Access: Only untagged packets can be forwarded.
Default VLAN ID of the port.

When the VLAN mode is Access, the port is added to
the VLAN in untagged mode.
d. Select the port, and then click VLAN Binding. The VLAN Binding Configuration
e. Select the VLAN binding type, and then enter the VLAN ID. For a description of
the VLAN binding parameters, refer to Table 2-4.
2-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-4 VLAN Binding Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
VLAN Binding Type
Select Tagged VLAN for the uplink port. The upstream packets
carry the VLAN ID to the uplink device.
3. Configure the service port VLAN.

a. In the NE Protocol Manager window, select the rack, shelf, and slot number of
the subscriber card.
b. Select a port, and then click Modify. The Modify Port VLAN Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
c. Configure the service port properties. For a description of the parameters, refer
to Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 Parameter Descriptions for Service Port VLAN Properties
Parameter
Description
VLAN Mode
Hybrid: Both untagged and tagged packets can be

forwarded.
TLS Status
Trunk: Only tagged packets can be forwarded.
Access: Only untagged packets can be forwarded.
Define a user port to be a TLS port or a non-TLS port.

l
When a non-TLS port receives an untagged packet,

it uploads the packet after tagging the packet with a
corresponding PVID. When a non-TLS port receives a
tagged packet, it uploads the tagged packet if the tag
belongs to the VLAN of the port. Otherwise, the non-TLS
port discards it.
When a TLS port receives an untagged packet, it

uploads the packet after tagging the packet with a TLS
VLAN ID. When a TLS port receives a tagged packet, it
uploads the tagged packet if the tag belongs to the VLAN
of the port. Otherwise, it uploads the tagged packet after
tagging it with the corresponding TLS VLAN ID.
It is recommended to keep the default value Disabled.

When the VLAN mode is Access, TLS Status cannot be
configured.
TLS VLAN ID
It is effective only when TLS Status is Enabled.
Port PVID
Default outer VLAN ID of the port.

When the VLAN mode is Access, the port is added to the
VLAN in untagged mode.
Port CPVID
Default internal VLAN ID of the port.
2-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
d. (Optional) Select the port, and then click VLAN Binding. In the displayed VLAN
Binding Configuration dialog box, select the VLAN binding type, enter the VLAN
ID. Click Bind.
Note:
When the VLAN mode is Access, you do not need to configure the VLAN binding
parameters.
End of Steps
2.2.3 Configuring the SmartGroup Port VLAN

This procedure describes how to add a SmartGroup port to a service VLAN.
Prerequisite
l
l

A SmartGroup is created.
Context
A SmartGroup refers to the logical ports aggregated by the NE through links. The default
VLAN properties of a SmartGroup are the same as those of an Ethernet port.
Steps
SmartGroup Port VLAN. The port VLAN parameters of the SmartGroup are displayed
in the right pane, see Figure 2-4.
2-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-4 NE Protocol Manager Window - SmartGroup Port VLAN Configuration
2. Select a port, and then click Modify. The Modify Port VLAN Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
3. Configure the SmartGroup port properties, and then click OK. For a description of the
port VLAN parameters, refer to Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Port VLAN Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
VLAN Mode
Hybrid: Both the untagged and tagged packets can be

forwarded.
Port PVID
Trunk: Only the tagged packets can be forwarded.
Access: Only the untagged packets can be forwarded.

When the VLAN mode is Access, the port is added to the VLAN
in untagged mode.
4. Select the port again, and then click VLAN Binding.

The VLAN Binding
5. Select the VLAN binding type, and then enter the VLAN ID. For a description of the
VLAN binding parameters, refer to Table 2-7.
Parameter
Description
VLAN Binding Type
Select Tagged VLAN for the SmartGroup port. The upstream

packets carry the VLAN ID to the uplink device.
2-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
6. Click Bind, and then click Close.

End of Steps
2.2.4 Configuring Global VLAN TPID

This procedure describes how to configure the global VLAN TPID. The TPID of the static
VLAN should be contained in the global TPID range.
Prerequisite
Steps
More > Global TPID Configuration. The VLAN TPID parameters are displayed in
the right pane, see Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 NE Protocol Manager Window - Global VLAN TPID Configuration
2. Set the inner VLAN TPID and outer VLAN TPID. The outer VLAN TPID must contain
0X8100. Click Set.
End of Steps
2.2.5 Configuring the 1:1 VLAN

This procedure describes how to configure the 1:1 VLAN. 1:1 VLAN is a dedicated channel
for a service port and uplink port. After the 1:1 VLAN is configured, packets are exchanged
according to the VLAN ID, rather than MAC + VLAN forwarding mechanism.
2-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
l
l

The xPON data service is configured.
Steps
1. Configure the user service port.
a. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click
Service Port. The service port configuration parameters are displayed in the
right pane.
b. Select the rack, shelf, card, port, and ONU.
c. Click New. The Add Service Port dialog box is displayed.
d. In the Service Port Modes navigation tree, select Tagged.
e. In the right pane, set the user VLAN, C-VID, and S-VID. From the VLAN
Translation Mode list, select VLAN 1:1. From the VLAN Xconnect Enabling
list, select Enabled.
For a description of the service port configuration parameters, refer to 2.1
Configuring a Service Port.
2. Configure the uplink port VLAN.
Note:
The bounded VLAN ID should be consistent with the S-VID configured on the service
port.
For detailed operations, refer to step Configure the uplink port VLAN in 2.2.2
Configuring the Port VLAN.
3. Configure the 1:1 VLAN.
a. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click VLAN
> More > 1:1 VLAN. The 1:1 VLAN configuration parameters are displayed in the
right pane.
b. Click Add. The 1:1 VLAN Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 2-6.
2-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-6 1:1 VLAN Configuration Window
c. Configure the VLAN configuration parameters.

Table 2-8 1:1 VLAN Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
SVLAN
The packets are exchanged according to the SVLAN ID.
CVLAN
The packets are exchanged according to the CVLAN +

SVLAN double tags.
Note:
The SVLAN ID and CVLAN ID should be consistent with the C-VID and S-VID
configured on the service port.
d. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.2.6 Configuring the Interworking VLAN

This procedure describes how to configure VLAN interworking based on double VLANs
to implement service interworking between the private network users under different PON
ports.
In the global isolation situation, only the user ports that are added to an interworking VLAN
can interwork with each other.
Prerequisite
l
l

The VLANs are created.
2-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click VLAN
> More > Interwork VLAN. The interworking VLAN parameters are displayed in the
right pane, see Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 NE Protocol Manager Window - Interwork VLAN Configuration
2. Click Add. The Create Interwork VLAN dialog box is displayed.

3. Set the interworking SVLAN and interworking CVLAN. Click OK.
4. From the interworking VLAN list, select the created double VLANs.
Interwork VLAN list, select Enabled. Click Set.
From the
5. (Optional) Delete the interworking VLANs.

a. From the interworking VLAN list, select the double VLANs that need to be deleted.
From the Interwork VLAN list, select Disabled. Click Set.
b. Click Delete. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK.
End of Steps
2.2.7 Viewing the Port VLAN Performance

This procedure describes how to view the VLAN performance statistics of the Ethernet
port, including the numbers of sent packets, received packets, sent bytes, received bytes,
and discarded packets.
Prerequisite
l
l

2-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
The port VLAN is configured.

The port statistics function is enabled.
Steps
> More > Port VLAN Performance. The port VLAN performance parameters are
displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 NE Protocol Manager Window - Port VLAN Performance Configuration
2. Select the card and port. The statistics information on the port VLAN performance is
displayed.
End of Steps
2.2.8 Configuring ONU VLAN Translation

This procedure describes how to configure ONU VLAN translation.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The service port is configured.
Steps
> More > ONU VLAN Translation. The ONU VLAN translation parameters are
2-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-9 NE Protocol Manager Window - ONU VLAN Translation Configuration
2. Select the card, PON port, and ONU.

3. Click Add.
displayed.
The Port VLAN Translation Configuration Property dialog box is
4. Select a port and VLAN ID. Set the CVLAN ID and SVLAN ID. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.2.9 Configuring VLAN Global Translation

This procedure describes how to configure VLAN global translation. The VLAN tagged
packets of a specified port are translated to double-tagged packets according to the
translation rules.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
> More > VLAN Global Translation. The VLAN global translation parameters are
2-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-10 NE Protocol Manager Window - VLAN Global Translation Configuration
2. Click Add. The Add Global Translation dialog box is displayed.

3. Configure the VLAN global translation parameters.
Table 2-9 Parameter Descriptions for VLAN Global Translation

Parameter
Description
Session ID
Data flow ID for global VLAN translation
Slot
Card slot
Port
Card port number
VLAN
VLAN ID of the tagged data flow
CVLAN
Inner VLAN ID of the double-tagged VLAN
SVLAN
Outer VLAN ID of the double-tagged VLAN
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.2.10 Configuring Smart QinQ Global Parameters

This procedure describes how to configure the smart QinQ global parameters.
Prerequisite
2-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
> More > Smart QinQ Global Parameter Configuration. The smart QinQ global
parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 NE Protocol Manager Window - Smart QinQ Global Parameter
Configuration
2. Select Enable Global QinQ or Disable.
Note:
The configuration will be effective after the device is restarted.
3. Click Apply.
End of Steps
2.2.11 Enabling Smart QinQ

This procedure describes how to enable or disable smart QinQ for the Optical Line Terminal
(OLT) Passive Optical Network (PON) port, Optical Network Unit (ONU), Ethernet port, or
SmartGroup.
Prerequisite
l
l

Global QinQ is configured.
2-17
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
More > Smart QinQ Enabling. The smart QinQ parameters are displayed in the right
pane, see Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 NE Protocol Manager Window - Smart QinQ Enabling
2. Enable smart QinQ for the OLT PON port, ONU, Ethernet port, or SmartGroup.
l Enable smart QinQ for the OLT.
Note:
If smart QinQ for the OLT PON port is enabled, smart QinQ for all the ONUs under
this OLT will be disabled.
i.
On the OLT/ONU tab, select the rack, shelf, card, and port.
ii.
In the QinQ Enabling area, select Based on OLT.
iii. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

l
Enable smart QinQ for the ONU.
Note:
If smart QinQ for the ONU is enabled, smart QinQ for the OLT that the ONU
belongs to will be disabled.
2-18
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
i.
On the OLT/ONU tab, select the rack, shelf, card, and port.
ii.
In the QinQ Enabling area, select Based on ONU.
iii. From the ONU list, select an ONU, and then click Enable.
iv. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
l
Enable smart QinQ for the Ethernet port of the uplink card.
i.
Click the Ethernet tab. Select the rack, shelf, and card.
ii.
From the port list, select a port, and then click Enable.
iii. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.

l
Enable smart QinQ for the Smartgroup.

i.
Click the SmartGroup tab. Select a SmartGroup, and then click Enable.
ii.
In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
End of Steps
2.2.12 Configuring Smart QinQ

This procedure describes how to add different outer VLAN tags to different service data
flows to identify the services.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The QinQ function for the related port is enabled.
Context
When the OLT is connected with multiple ONUs, which works as the layer 2 switches,
and the ONUs are connected with Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer (DSLAM)
devices, the OLT implements the convergence and switching functions of the Metropolitan
Area Network (MAN). The OLT adds different outer VLAN tags to different service data
flows to identify the services.
Steps
More > Smart QinQ Configuration. The smart QinQ parameters are displayed in the
2-19
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-13 NE Protocol Manager Window - Smart QinQ Configuration
2. Select the rack, shelf, card, and port.

3. Click Add. The Add Smart QinQ Configuration dialog box is displayed.
4. Configure the smart QinQ parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 2-10.
Table 2-10 Smart QinQ Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Matched Rule Type
The ZXA10 C300 supports the following smart QinQ configuration

rules:
l
Based on the CoS priority
Based on CVLAN + CoS
Based on Tag + Ethernet
Based on the CVLAN range
Based on CVLAN transparent transmission
Based on the Ethernet type
Starting VID
Starting VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
Ending VID
Ending VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
EtherType
Ethernet type, which is effective only when the matched rule is

EtherType, including:
User CoS
ARP
IPoE
PPPoE Discovery Phase
PPPoE Session Phase
User Defined
Service priority, which is effective only when the matched rule is CoS
2-20
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
S-VID
Outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
S-Tag CoS
Service priority of the outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
5. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.2.13 Configuring Smart QinQ Based on Smartgroup

This procedure describes how to configure smart QinQ based on Smartgroup.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The QinQ function for the Smartgroup is enabled.
Steps
> More > Smart QinQ Configuration based on SmartGroup. The smart QinQ
parameters for the Smartgroup are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 NE Protocol Manager Window - Smart QinQ Configuration Based on
SmartGroup
2. Click Add. The Add Smart QinQ Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. Configure the smart QinQ parameters based on the Smartgroup. For a description of
2-21
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-11 SmartGroup-Based Smart QinQ Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
Port
ID of the Smartgroup that needs to be configured with smart QinQ
Matched Rule Type
The ZXA10 C300 supports the following smart QinQ configuration

rules:
l
Based on the CoS priority
Based on CVLAN + CoS
Based on Tag + Ethernet
Based on the CVLAN range
Based on CVLAN transparent transmission
Based on the Ethernet type
Starting VID
Starting VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
Ending VID
Ending VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
EtherType
Ethernet type, which is effective only when the matched rule is

EtherType, including:
l
ARP
IPoE
PPPoE Discovery Phase
PPPoE Session Phase
User Defined
User CoS
Service priority, which is effective only when the matched rule is CoS
S-VID
Outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
S-Tag CoS
Service priority of the outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.2.14 Configuring Port VLAN Rate Limiting

This procedure describes how to configure port VLAN rate limiting.
Prerequisite
l
l

The related VLAN is created.
Steps
More > Port VLAN Rate Limiting. The parameters for port VLAN rate limiting are
2-22
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-15 NE Protocol Manager Window - Port VLAN Rate Limiting Configuration
2. Select a card, and then click Add. The Port VLAN Rate Limiting dialog box is
displayed.
3. Set the port, VLAN, and direction parameters. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-12 Parameter Descriptions for Port VLAN Rate Limiting
Parameter
Description
Port
Port whose VLAN rate needs to be limited
VLAN
When the VLAN rate is specified, the rate of sending data to

the VLAN or receiving data from the VLAN will not exceed the
specified value.
Direction
Ingress: data flow ingress direction
Egress: data flow egress direction
4. Click Apply.
End of Steps
2.2.15 Configuring VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting

This procedure describes how to configure VLAN packet storm rate limiting.
Prerequisite
l
l

The related VLAN is created.
2-23
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
More > VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting. The parameters for VLAN packet storm
rate limiting are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16 NE Protocol Manager Window - VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting
Configuration
2. Click Add. The Add VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting dialog box is displayed.
3. Set VLAN ID, Broadcast Rate Limited, Multicast Rate Limited, and Unknown
Unicast Rate Limited.
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.3 Multicast Management

2.3.1 Overview
Service Description
With the development of multimedia services and stream media in the IP network, multicast
has become a new and popular service. Multicast is used in stream media, distance
learning, video conference, Internet Protocol Television (IPTV), online game, data copy,
and other point-to-multipoint data transmission services.
Service Features
The ZXA10 C300 provides controllable multicast services, which support Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) v1/v2/v3, IGMP snooping, IGMP proxy, and IGMP router.
2-24
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.3.2 Configuring the IGMP Parameters

This procedure describes how to enable IGMP and configure the IGMP global parameters.
Prerequisite
Context
To operate the IPTV service better, carriers need to know the Video On Demand (VOD)
actions, requirements, and preference of subscribers. The ZXA10 C300 records the VOD
events, and then sends the records to the Service Management System (SMS). The SMS
processes and collects statistics on these records to provide references for the carriers.
The information that needs to be recorded is determined by the carriers. The following
information can be recorded:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Index: Call Detailed Record (CDR). When the index reaches the maximum value, the
next index starts from 0.
Time_stamp: Absolute timestamp that the subscriber gets online.
PortNum: Number of the port that generates the CDR.
GIP: Multicast IP address. For example, the GIP value of 224.1.1.1 is 0xE0010101.
Validity: Whether the CDR is generated by legal operation or illegal operation.
Type: Record type, whether the record can be previewed or ordered.
Reason: Record reason.
Time_online: Relative timestamp that the subscriber gets online.
The ZXA10 C300 provides CDR buffer function to avoid CDR loss.
Note:
The CDR configuration takes effect only when Channel Access Control (CAC) is enabled.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Multicast
> Multicast > IGMP Parameters. The IGMP global parameters are displayed in the
2-25
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-17 NE Protocol Manager Window - IGMP Parameter Configuration
2. On the IGMP Parameters tab, configure the parameters. For a description of the
IGMP parameters, refer to Table 2-13.
Table 2-13 IGMP Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
IGMP Status
To enable or disable IGMP.
Aging Time (s)
Aging time of the IGMP group member, only effective in IGMP

snooping mode.
Preview Recognition Time
Shortest time to generate a preview record.
(s)
Channel Access Control
To enable or disable CAC.

If CAC is enabled, the IPTV service on the user port takes effect.
Only the subscribers who order the service package can view
the channels in the package. If CAC is disabled, the user port
permissions do not take effect. The subscribers (on the receiving
port of the MVLAN) can view the channels created in the MVLAN.
Preview Enable
To enable or disable the preview function.
Preview Reset Time
Time to reset the preview count.
(h:m:s)
Span-VLAN Status
To enable or disable the span-VLAN function.

When the user VLAN is different from the multicast VLAN, the
span-VLAN function does not need to be enabled.
2-26
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Group Bandwidth Limited
To enable or disable the bandwidth control function.

When this function is enabled, if the bandwidth of a multicast
group exceeds the current available bandwidth, you cannot add
subscribers to the multicast group.
Maximum Records
Maximum number of CDRs.
CDR Report Threshold
CDR report threshold, which cannot exceed the maximum number

of CDRs.
Generate CDR On
Robustness Variable
To generate CDRs in the following conditions:

l
Preview
Too Many Previews
Deny
To set the robustness variable when the multicast mode is IGMP

proxy.
The robustness variable is used to enhance the system security. If
a subnet is unstable and loses packets, the robustness variable
needs to be increased. It affects the member aging time and packet
retry times.
Query Interval (s)
To set the IGMP query interval when the multicast mode is IGMP
proxy.
Query Maximum
To set the maximum response time for IGMP global query when the
Response Time (0.1s)
multicast mode is IGMP proxy.

You can increase the maximum response time to reduce the
response interval of the packets.
Last Member Query
To set the query interval for the last IGMP member when the
Interval (0.1s)
Last Member Query Count
To set the query count for the last IGMP member when the multicast
mode is IGMP proxy.
If the system does not respond to the packet when the queries
reach the configured count and the maximum query response time
is exceeded, it indicates that the subscriber logs out.
Unsolicited Report Interval
To set the time interval for sending the report packet in delay when
(s)
the multicast mode is IGMP proxy.

In IGMP snooping mode, the active report function of multicast
programs becomes ineffective.
3. Click the Export CDR tab, select Export CDR, set the CDR generation time and server
file storage path, and then click Set.
The system will export the CDRs to a file at the specified time and sends the file to the
CDR receiving server. The file format is file name+date.csv.
End of Steps
2-27
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.3.3 Configuring the User Interface Parameters

This procedure describes how to enable the User Network Interface (UNI) IGMP and
configure the IGMP interface parameters.
Prerequisite
Steps
> Multicast > UNI Interface Parameters. The IGMP UNI parameters are displayed
Figure 2-18 NE Protocol Manager Window - UNI Interface Parameter Configuration
2. In the right pane, select the user port location.

l For a PON NE, select the card, PON port, and ONU where the user port is located.
l For an Access Gateway (AG) NE, select the rack, shelf, and slot where the user
port is located.
3. In the Port area, select a port number. The IGMP parameters of this port are displayed
in the right pane.
4. Click Modify. The Interface Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5. Configure the IGMP interface parameters, and then click Set. For a description of the
Table 2-14 IGMP Interface Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Groups Limit
Multicast groups that a user interface can be added to.

2-28
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Administrative Status
To enable or disable the port IGMP protocol.
Last Member Query Interval
To set the query interval for the last IGMP member when the
(0.1s)
Query Response Time (0.1s)
To set the maximum query response time when the multicast

mode is IGMP proxy.
Fast Leave
When this function is enabled and the subscriber reports the

leave packet, the port leaves the multicast group immediately.
Proxy IP
To set the source IP address of the downstream query packet

when the multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
IGMP Version
IGMPV2 is commonly used.
End of Steps
2.3.4 Configuring the Multicast VLAN

This procedure describes how to configure the IGMP Multicast Virtual Local Area Network
(MVLAN).
Prerequisite
Context
MVLAN is used to separate the multicast data and unicast data of the IPTV service flows.
When the NE needs to carry the IPTV service, at least one MVLAN needs to be configured.
If multiple carriers provide services, multiple MVLANs can be configured to separate the
IPTV services for different carriers.
After the MVLANs are configured, the system copies the IPTV program stream to the
subscribers in the MVLAN that the current program belongs to. The subscribers in the
MVLANs, which the current program does not belong to, cannot view the program. This
avoids unnecessary data copy.
The system supports span-VLAN multicast. It can copy the programs from an MVLAN to
a user VLAN.
IGMP MVLAN carries the IGMP multicast data, including the service VLAN, source port,
receiving port, and multicast group.
Steps
> Multicast > Multicast VLAN. The MVLAN parameters are displayed in the right
2-29
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-19 NE Protocol Manager Window - Multicast VLAN Configuration
2. Configure the MVLAN basic parameters.

a. In the middle pane, select New.
b. On the Basic tab, configure the MVLAN basic parameters. For a description of
Table 2-15 MVLAN Basic Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
VLAN
MVLAN ID.
Working Mode
MVLAN multicast working mode, supporting Snooping, Proxy,

and Router.
Host IP
Source IP address of the report/leave packet in IGMP Proxy

mode.
Default: 192.168.2.14
Maximum Groups
Maximum MVLAN groups.
(032768)
2-30
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Group Filter
To enable or disable the MVLAN group filter function:

l
Enable: The host needs to verify that the group address

is configured on the router when sending the IGMP join
packet to the router. The groups whose addresses are
configured are called administrative groups.
Disable: The host does not need to verify that the group
address is configured on the router when sending the
IGMP join packet to the router. The groups whose
addresses are known are called dynamic groups.
If span-VLAN is enabled, this function must be enabled.

To enable or disable MVLAN IGMP:

l
Enable: The system accepts the IGMP multicast packets

and processes them.
l
Packet Priority
Drop: The system drops the IGMP multicast packets.
When the IGMP mode is IGMP snooping, the IGMP packets

forwarded by the NE to the network side are processed
according to the priority of the IGMP service flow that the
subscriber belongs to.
When the IGMP mode is IGMP proxy, the IGMP packets
forwarded by the NE to the network side are processed
according to the priority of the IGMP packets in the MVLAN.
IGMP Version of Host
Version of the IGMP request packets sent by the uplink port.
c. Click Add.
3. Configure the multicast channels.
a. Select the new MVLAN. Click the Channel IP tab, and then click Add. The MVR
ConfigurationAdd Group dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the channel parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 2-16.
Table 2-16 Channel Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Source IP
Source IP address that the NE responds to the report packet

from the uplink devices in IGMP proxy mode.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Channel IP
MVLAN group address.
2-31
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Prejoin
When the prejoin function is enabled for an MVLAN group, the

group sends the join packets periodically. The multicast steam
arrives at the NE directly to reduce the VOD delay. The proxy
does not forward the IGMP reports to the prejoined multicast
groups.
Default: Disable.
Bandwidth Cost (kbps)
Multicast group bandwidth.
c. Click OK.
4. Configure the multicast resource port.
a. Click the Source Port tab.
b. Select the uplink card, and then select the uplink port. Click Bind.
Note:
The MVLAN source port can be the NE uplink port or the SmartGroup port.
5. On the Receive Port tab, configure the MVLAN receiving port.

l For a PON NE, select the card, PON port, and ONU where the user port is located,
and then select a service port. Click Bind.
l For an AG NE, select the rack, shelf, and slot where the user port is located, and
then select a service port. Click Bind.
End of Steps
2.4 QoS Management

2.4.1 Configuring the Ethernet Queue Mapping
This procedure describes how to configure the mapping relations between the Ethernet
uplink port queues and the 802.1p priorities. The NE can then allocate the packets of
different priorities on the uplink port to the specified queues according to the mapping
relations.
Prerequisite
2-32
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click QoS >
Ethernet Queue Mapping. The mapping parameters are displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20 NE Protocol Manager Window - Ethernet Queue Mapping Configuration
2. From the CoS Value column, select a priority. From the drop-down list on the Queue
ID column, select a queue ID. For a description of the mapping parameters, refer to
Table 2-17.
Table 2-17 Ethernet Queue Mapping Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
CoS Value
Class of Service, that is, service priority.
Queue ID
The ZXA10 C300 uplink port supports eight output queues,

queues 07, whose priorities are from low to high.
3. Click Apply.
End of Steps
2.4.2 Profiles
The ZXA10 C300 supports the following QoS profiles:
l
l
Traffic profile
ATM traffic profile
2-33
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
l
l
l
l
CoS remark profile

Queue parameter profile
Queue mapping profile
DSCP to DSCP profile
DSCP to CoS mapping profile
DSCP to drop priority mapping profile
2.4.2.1 Configuring the Traffic Profile

This procedure describes how to configure the traffic profile for the IP packets.
The traffic profile can be used on the following ports to limit the packet traffic.
l
l
l
l
Gigabit Passive Optical Network (GPON) Optical Line Termination (OLT) port
GPON Optical Network Unit ( ONU) virtual port
Digital Subscriber Line (xDSL) Permanent Virtual Channel (PVC) port
xDSL port
Prerequisite
Steps
Profiles > Traffic Profile. The profile parameters are displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-21 NE Protocol Manager Window - Traffic Profile Configuration
2-34
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2. From the middle pane, select New. In the Profile Name text box, enter the profile
name, and then set the traffic profile parameters. For a description of the parameters,
see Table 2-18.
Table 2-18 Traffic Profile Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
CIR (kbps)
Committed Information Rate
CIR CoS Priority Remark
CoS priority remark added for the subscriber services that

are within the CIR range
CBS (KB)
Committed Burst Size, which should be greater than the

maximum packet length
PIR (kbps)
Peak Information Rate, which should be greater than the

CIR value
PIR CoS Priority Remark
CoS priority remark added for the subscriber services that

are within the PIR range
PBS (KB)
Discard Mode
Peak Burst Size, which should be greater than the CBS value
Packet discard mode on network congestion:
l
No Distinction: The packets are discarded according to

the sequence that they are added to the queue.
Low Priority First: The packets are discarded according

to the CoS priorities.
3. Click Apply.
l To delete a profile, select the profile, and then click Delete.
l To apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches, perform the following procedure:
i.
Click Batch Apply. The Batch Apply Profiles dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Select a profile, click
, and then click Apply.
iii. In the displayed Batch OperationBatch Apply Profiles window, select then
NEs, and then click Start. The profile is applied to the NEs in batches.
l
To delete a profile from multiple NEs in batches, perform the following procedure:
i.
Click Batch Delete. The Batch Delete Profiles dialog box is displayed.
ii.
iii. In the displayed Batch OperationBatch Delete Profiles window, select the
NEs, and then click Start. The profile is deleted from the NEs in batches.
End of Steps
2.4.2.2 Configuring the CoS Remark Profile

This procedure describes how to configure the Class of Service (CoS) remark profile.
2-35
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
This profile can be used on the GPON ONU virtual port and xDSL PVC port. It is used to
modify the CoS priorities of the user packets.
Prerequisite
Context
_DEFAULT_COS_TO_COS_PROFILE is the system default CoS remark profile. It cannot
be modified or deleted. By default, the values of CoS 07 are 07.
Steps
Profiles > CoS to CoS Profile. The profile parameters are displayed in the right
Figure 2-22 NE Protocol Manager Window - CoS to CoS Profile Configuration
name. Select the CoS priorities from the CoS to CoS Priority column and select the
CoS values from the CoS to CoS Value column.
3. Click Apply.
i.
2-36
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
l
i.
ii.
End of Steps
2.4.2.3 Configuring the Queue Parameter Profile

This procedure describes how to configure the queue parameter profile.
This profile is used to configure the service queue count, queue scheduling mode, and
queue depth. It can be used on the following ports:
l
l
l
Ethernet port
GPON OLT port
xDSL port
Prerequisite
Context
_DEFAULT_QUEUE_BLOCK_PROFILE is the system default queue parameter profile. It
cannot be modified or deleted. By default, a port supports eight queues with the queue
weight of 0 and queue depth of 0.
The ZXA10 C300 supports three queue scheduling modes:
l
Strict Priority (SP), default mode

The NE strictly follows the high-to-low priorities to send the groups in the higher-priority
queues first. When the higher-priority queues are empty, the NE sends the groups in
the lower-priority queues.
Weighted Round Robin (WRR)

Each queue has a weight value. If there are eight queues, the weight values are 71
from high to low. The weight value indicates the ratio of obtaining resources. This
mode ensures that each queue can get certain service time.
SP+WRR
This mode is the combination of the previous two modes. Some queues use the SP
scheduling mode and some use the WRR scheduling mode. When the WRR value
2-37
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
is 0, the queue uses the SP scheduling mode. The queues using the SP scheduling
mode are higher-priority queues.
Steps
Profiles > Queue Parameter Profile. The profile parameters are displayed in the
Figure 2-23 NE Protocol Manager Window - Queue Parameter Profile Configuration
name, and then set the queue parameter profile parameters. For a description of the
Table 2-19 Parameter Descriptions for the Queue Parameter Profile
Parameter
Description
Queue Number
Value range: 2, 4, 8:
l
2: Queues 0 and 1 are available.
4: Queues 03 are available.
Default: 8
Queue Weight
Ratio that a queue obtains resources. Weight 0 indicates that the queue
uses the SP scheduling mode.
If the port uses the SP+WRR scheduling mode, the SP priority is higher
than the WRR priority. The weight of the higher-priority queue is set to 0.
2-38
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Queue Depth (2KB)
Queue buffer, used to handle burst traffic.

It is recommended to keep the default value 0.
3. Click Apply.
i.
ii.
l
i.
ii.
End of Steps
2.4.2.4 Configuring the Queue Mapping Profile

This procedure describes how to configure the queue mapping profile, including the queue
count and the packet enqueue mode. When the enqueue mode is Enqueue by CoS, you
need to configure the mapping relations between the port queues and 802.1p priorities.
The NE allocates the packets of different priorities to the specified queues according to
the mapping relations.
The queue mapping profile can be used on the GPON OLT port and xDSL port.
Prerequisite
Context
_DEFAULT_QUEUE_MAP_PROFILE is the system default queue mapping profile. It cannot
be modified or deleted. By default, a port supports eight queues with the enqueue mode of
Enqueue by CoS. The packets of priorities 07 are mapped to queues 07 respectively.
Steps
Profiles > Queue Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are displayed in the right
2-39
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-24 NE Protocol Manager Window - Queue Mapping Profile Configuration
name, and then set the queue mapping profile parameters. For a description of the
Table 2-20 Parameter Descriptions for the Queue Mapping Profile
Parameter
Description
Queue Number
Value range: 2, 4, 8:
l
2: Queues 0 and 1 are available.
Default: 8
Enqueue Mode
Mode that packets enters the port queues

l
Enqueue by CoS
You need to configure the mapping relations between the port
queues and 802.1p priorities.
Enqueue by Service Type
Enqueue by GEM Port
Enqueue by PVC
3. (Optional) Configure the mapping relations between the port queues and 802.1p
priorities.
When the enqueue mode is Enqueue by CoS, select different priorities from the CoS
column and select the corresponding queues from the drop-down lists on the Queue
Mapping column. For a description of the mapping relation parameters, refer to Table
2-21.
2-40
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-21 Parameter Descriptions for the Port and Queue Mapping Relation
Parameter
Description
CoS
Class of Service
Queue Mapping
Queue ID
l
When Queue Number is 2, the queue IDs are 0 and 1,

whose priorities are from low to high.
When Queue Number is 4, the queue ID ranges from 0 to

3, whose priorities are from low to high.
When Queue Number is 8, the queue ID ranges from 0 to

7, whose priorities are from low to high.
4. Click Apply.
i.
ii.
l
i.
ii.
End of Steps
2.4.2.5 Configuring the DSCP to DSCP Profile

This procedure describes how to configure the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
to DSCP profile.
This profile can be used on the Ethernet port to modify the DSCP value according to the
packet DSCP priority.
Prerequisite
Context
_DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DSCP_PROFILE is the system default DSCP to DSCP profile. It
cannot be modified or deleted. By default, the modification values of DSCP 063 are 063.
2-41
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
Profiles > DSCP to DSCP Profile. The profile parameters are displayed in the right
Figure 2-25 NE Protocol Manager Window - DSCP to DSCP Profile Configuration
name. Select different DSCP priorities from the DSCP Priority column and select the
modified DSCP values from the drop-down lists on the DSCP to DSCP Value column.
Note:
You can click Batch Modify to modify the DSCP priorities in batches.
3. Click Apply.
i.
ii.
2-42
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
i.
ii.
End of Steps
2.4.2.6 Configuring the DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile

This procedure describes how to configure the DSCP to CoS mapping profile to modify
the CoS value according to the packet DSCP priority.
This profile can be used on the following ports:
l
l
l
Ethernet port
GPON ONU virtual port
xDSL PVC port
Prerequisite
Context
_DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_COS_PROFILE is the system default DSCP to CoS mapping profile.
It cannot be modified or deleted. For the default mapping relations of this profile, refer to
Table 2-22.
Table 2-22 Default Values of the DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile
DSCP Priority
CoS Priority
07
815
1623
2431
3239
4047
4855
5663
Steps
Profiles > DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are displayed in
2-43
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-26 NE Protocol Manager Window - DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile

Configuration
name. Select different DSCP priorities from the DSCP Priority column and select the
modified CoS values from the drop-down lists on the CoS Priority column.
Note:
You can click Batch Modify to modify the CoS priorities in batches.
3. Click Apply.
i.
ii.
l
i.
ii.

2-44
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
End of Steps
2.4.2.7 Configuring the DSCP to Drop Priority Mapping Profile

This procedure describes how to configure the DSCP to drop priority mapping profile.
This profile can be used on the Ethernet port to modify the drop priority according to the
packet DSCP priority.
Prerequisite
Context
Drop priority is a reference parameter for dropping packets during queue scheduling. It
ranges from 0 to 2. When a network congestion occurs, the packets of higher priority
(meaning, packets of priority 2) are dropped first, and those of priority 0 are dropped finally.
_DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DROP_PROFILE is the system default DSCP to drop priority
mapping profile. It cannot be modified or deleted. By default, the drop priority of DSCP
063 is 0.
Steps
Profiles > DSCP to Drop Priority Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are
2-45
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-27 NE Protocol Manager Window - DSCP to Drop Priority Mapping Profile
Configuration
name. Select different DSCP priorities from the DSCP Priority column and select
the modified drop priority values from the drop-down lists on the Dropping Priority
column.
Note:
You can click Batch Modify to modify the drop priorities in batches.
3. Click Apply.
i.
ii.
l
i.
ii.
2-46
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
End of Steps
2.4.3 Port Configuration

Port configuration includes the configuration of the following ports:
l
l
l
l
l
Ethernet port
OLT PON port
DSL PVC port
DSL port
GPON virtual port
2.4.3.1 Configuring the Ethernet Port

This procedure describes how to configure the QoS parameters of the Ethernet port to
ensure the port service quality.
Prerequisite
Steps
Port QoS > Ethernet Port. The port QoS parameters are displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 2-28.
Figure 2-28 NE Protocol Manager Window - Ethernet Port Configuration
2. In the right pane select the rack number, shelf number, and slot number of the card.
2-47
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. From the port list, select a port, and then click Modify. The Ethernet Port QoS
4. Configure the QoS parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to Table
2-23.
Table 2-23 Parameter Descriptions for Ethernet Port QoS
Parameter
Description
Trust Mode
CoS: The Ethernet port performs priority marking in
DSCP: The Ethernet port performs priority marking in
accordance with the packet CoS priority.

accordance with the packet DSCP priority.
Default: CoS
Default CoS
Default CoS priority of the port. When an upstream untagged

packet arrives at this port, it is marked with this CoS priority.
Default: 0
DSCP to CoS Mapping
The CoS priority marking mode of the port is modified in

accordance with the DSCP to CoS mapping profile.
This parameter becomes effective when Trust Mode is DSCP.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_COS_PROFILE
DSCP to DSCP Profile
The DSCP priority marking mode of the port is modified in

accordance with the DSCP to DSCP profile.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DSCP_PROFILE
DSCP to Dropping Priority
The drop priority marking mode of the port is modified in
Mapping
accordance with the DSCP to dropping priority mapping profile.

Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DROP_PROFILE
Queue Parameter
Queue parameter profile used by the port.

Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_BLOCK_PROFILE
Limit
Select the check box to set Shaping Rate Limited and Shaping
Burst Size.
Shaping Rate Limited (kbps)
Maximum information rate.
Shaping Burst Size (KB)
Maximum burst size.
5. Click Set.
End of Steps
2.4.3.2 Configuring the OLT PON Port

This procedure describes how to configure the QoS parameters for the Optical Line
Terminal (OLT) Passive Optical Network (PON) port to ensure the port service quality.
2-48
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
Steps
Port QoS > OLT PON Port. The port QoS parameters are displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 2-29.
Figure 2-29 NE Protocol Manager Window - OLT PON Port Configuration
2. In the right pane, select the rack number, shelf number, and slot number of the card.
3. From the port list, select a port, and then click Modify.
The OLT PON QoS
2-24.
Table 2-24 Parameter Descriptions for OLT PON Port QoS
Parameter
Description
Queue Parameter
Queue parameter profile used by the port.

Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_BLOCK_PROFILE
Queue Mapping
Queue mapping profile used by the port.

Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_MAP_PROFILE
Egress
No Limit: Not to limit the upstream traffic rate of the port.
Limit: To limit the upstream traffic rate of the port according to

the profile.
Default: No Limit
5. Click Set.
End of Steps
2-49
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.4.3.3 Configuring the GPON Virtual Port

This procedure describes how to configure the QoS parameters of a Gigabit Passive
Optical Network (GPON) Optical Network Unit (ONU) virtual port to ensure the port
service quality.
Prerequisite
Steps
Port QoS > GPON Vport. The port QoS parameters are displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30 NE Protocol Manager Window - GPON Vport Configuration
2. In the right pane, select the rack number, shelf number, slot number, port number, and
ONU number of the GPON virtual port.
3. From the port list, select the default QoS configuration item, and then click Modify.
The GPON VPort QoS Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2-25.
Table 2-25 Parameter Descriptions for GPON VPort QoS
Parameter
Description
CoS Filter
Enable: When the service flow priority is consistent with

the port default priority, the packets are allowed to pass.
Otherwise, the packets are discarded.
Disable: To disable the CoS filter function.
Default: Disable
2-50
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Ingress CoS Remarking
VLAN priority of the upstream packets.
Egress CoS Marking
VLAN priority of the downstream packets.
CoS Marking Mode
Trust: The packet CoS priority is not modified.
Override with Default CoS: The untagged packets are marked

in accordance with the port default priority. The tagged
packets are modified in accordance with the port default
priority.
CoS to CoS: The CoS value is modified according to the CoS

priority of the original packet by using the CoS Remark Profile.
DSCP mapping to CoS: The CoS value is modified in

accordance with the DSCP priority of the original packet by
using the DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile.
Default: Trust
Default CoS
This parameter can be configured when CoS Marking Mode is

Override with Default CoS.
l
The upstream untagged packets on this port are marked in

accordance with the CoS priority.
The upstream tagged packets on this port are modified in

accordance with the CoS priority.
Default: 0
CoS to CoS Profile
Configure the CoS Remark Profile used by the PVC port when
CoS Marking Mode is CoS to CoS.
Default: _DEFAULT_COS_TO_COS_PROFILE
DSCP to CoS Mapping
Configure the DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile used by the PVC port
when CoS Marking Mode is DSCP mapping to CoS.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_COS_PROFILE
Traffic Profile Type
Traffic Profile: The port uses the Traffic Profile to limit the IP
packet rate.
Ingress
To limit the traffic rate in the upstream direction on the port.

l
No Limit: Not to limit the traffic rate in the upstream direction

on the port.
Limit: To configure the Traffic Profile used to limit the traffic

rate in the upstream direction on the port.
Default: No Limit
2-51
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Egress
To limit the traffic rate in the downstream direction on the port.

l
No Limit: Not to limit the traffic rate in the downstream

direction on the port.
Limit: To configure the Traffic Profile used to limit the traffic

rate in the downstream direction on the port.
Default: No Limit
End of Steps
2.5 DHCP Configuration

2.5.1 Configuring DHCP Snooping
This procedure describes how to configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) snooping function.
Prerequisite
Context
DHCP snooping enhances network security. It provides the following functions:
l
l
l
Sets an untrusted port. This port is connected to a computer or printer. It can only
forward the DHCP request packets from the user port and discards other DHCP
packets from the user port. In addition, this port compares the source MAC address
of the DHCP request packet with the physical address of the DHCP client. Only
when the two addresses are the same, the packet will be forwarded. Otherwise, it
will be discarded.
Sets a trusted port. This port can receive all the DHCP packets. When the port
connected to the legal DHCP server is set to trusted port and other ports are set to
untrusted ports, attacks on the network from illegal DHCP servers will be prevented.
Limits the rate of the DHCP packets on the untrusted ports, which can prevents
broadcast attacks on the legal DHCP request packets.
Sets up a DHCP snooping binding table. Once a client connected to the untrusted
port obtains a legal DHCP Offer packet, the device adds a binding item to the DHCP
snooping binding table, including the IP address, MAC address, port number, VLAN
ID, and lease period of the client that is connected to the untrusted port.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click DHCP >
DHCP Snooping Configuration. The DHCP snooping parameters are displayed in
2-52
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-31 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCP Snooping Configuration
2. Enable DHCP snooping in the VLAN.

On the VLAN Parameters tab, select a user port VLAN, and then click Switch to
enable DHCP snooping in the VLAN.
3. Enable DHCP snooping for the user port.
a. On the User Port tab, select a user port.
l For a PON NE, select the rack, shelf, card, port, and ONU where the user
port is located.
l For an AG NE, select the rack, shelf, slot, and port where the user port is
located.
b. From the port list, select a port, and then click Modify. The DHCP Snooping User
Port Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c. Configure the user port DHCP snooping parameters. For a description of the
Table 2-26 Parameter Descriptions for User Port DHCP Snooping
Parameter
Description
Service Status
Enable: To enable DHCP snooping of the user port.
Disable: To disable DHCP snooping of the user port.
Quota
Maximum DHCP sessions supported by the user port.
d. Click OK.
End of Steps
2-53
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.5.2 Viewing the DHCP Snooping Online Users

This procedure describes how to view the binding relation between the IP address and
MAC address of the DHCP snooping online users.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click DHCP >
DHCP Snooping Online Users. In the right pane, view the binding relation between
the IP address and MAC address of the DHCP snooping online users, see Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCP Snooping Online Users
End of Steps
2.6 Port Location

2.6.1 Configuring PPPoE Plus
This procedure describes how to enable Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)
Plus. After this function is enabled, the NE adds tags to the PPPoE packets and sends
the access subscriber port information to the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS).
In this way, the NE authenticates and manages user ports in a centralized way to deny the
access by illegal subscribers.
PPPoE Plus is used to authenticate and identify the PPPoE dial-up subscribers.
2-54
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
Context
Figure 2-33 shows the PPPoE Plus principles.
Figure 2-33 PPPoE Plus Principles
The PPPoE Intermediate Agent intercepts all the PPPoE Discovery packets:
l
l
l
l
l
PPPoE
PPPoE
PPPoE
PPPoE
PPPoE
Active Discovery Initiation (PADI)

Active Discovery Offer (PADO)
Active Discovery Request (PADR)
Active Discovery Session-Confirmation (PADS)
Active Discovery Terminate (PADT)
The PPPoE Intermediate Agent performs the following functions:

l
Adds the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to the upstream PPPoE Discovery packets, that
is, the PADI and PADR packets.
2-55
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Remove the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID from the downstream PPPoE Discovery
packets, that is, the PADO and PADS packets.
If a PADI or PADR packet exceeds 1500 bytes after being added with the DSL circuit
ID, the PPPoE Intermediate Agent does not need to send the modified data packet to
the broadband gateway, but sends the response packet (PADO or PADS packet) with the
Generic-Error tag to the PPPoE client.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click
Subscriber Identification. In the right pane, configure the PPPoE Plus parameters,
see Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 NE Protocol Manager Window - PPPoE Plus Configuration
2. Configure the global parameters.

a. On the General tab, click Global. The General Global Configuration dialog box
is displayed.
b. Configure the global parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 2-27.
2-56
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-27 Global Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
Node ID Type
The Circuit ID identifies the subscriber line and subscriber

physical location.
This parameter refers to the access-node-identifier type in
the Circuit ID:
l
Inband MAC: Uses the NE in-band MAC address as the

access-node-identifier type.
Node Name: Uses the NE node name as the

Node Name
This parameter needs to be configured when Node ID Type

is Node Name.
Rack
Rack number in the Circuit ID.
Shelf
Shelf number in the Circuit ID.
Circuit ID Syntax Enabling
Whether to enable the flexible configuration of the Circuit

ID syntax.
If this function is enabled, the key words in the Circuit ID can
be selected and combined flexibly.
The Circuit ID syntax for each access node is unique.
c. Click OK. The system prompts that the global information is set successfully.
3. (Optional) Configure the Circuit ID syntax.
Note:
When the Circuit ID syntax is enabled, you can customize the Circuit ID syntax. The
NE obtains the variable domain values according to their configuration sequence and
generates the Circuit ID, which includes the separator and output width.
a. On the General tab, click Circuit ID Syntax. The Circuit ID Syntax dialog box is
displayed.
b. Click New. The Add Circuit ID Component dialog box is displayed.
c. Configure the Circuit ID syntax parameters. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-28 Parameter Descriptions for the Circuit ID Syntax
Parameter
Description
Component Index
Used to identify the variable domains and their locations in

the Circuit ID syntax.
2-57
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Component Type
Standard Variable: All the variable domains defined in

the TR101 standard
Extended Variable: Self-defined variable domains,

supporting ONU-ID, GEM Port, SVLAN, CVLAN, SN,
LOID, and LOID Password
Component Content
Component Width
Separator: Used to separate the keywords
User Defined String
Content ID of each variable domain.

Output width of each variable domain.
The Circuit ID domain cannot exceed 63 characters. If
it exceeds 63 characters, the NE intercepts the first 63
characters and raises an alarm.
d. Click OK.
Note:
You can click Delete to delete the Circuit ID component that is not needed.
4. Select a user port.

l For a PON NE, select the rack, shelf, card, port, and ONU where the user port is
located.
l For an AG NE, select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and PVC where the user port is
located.
5. Configure the Circuit ID syntax of the user port.
a. On the General tab, select the default circuit ID syntax of the port, and then click
Modify. The General Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the circuit ID syntax parameters. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-29 Parameter Descriptions for Circuit ID Syntax General Configuration
Parameter
Description
Format
Circuit ID format of the user port.
Remote ID Enable
When the Circuit ID cannot identify a subscriber line

uniquely, the Remote ID is added to the Circuit ID as a
supplementary to identify the subscriber line.
Remote ID
Used to identify the remote host of a circuit port.

The Remote ID can be any string that does not exceed 63
characters.
2-58
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Click OK.
6. Enable global PPPoE Plus.
a. Click the PPPoE Plus tab, and then click Global.
The PPPoE Global
b. From the PPPoE Plus list, select Enabled.

c. Click OK.
7. Enable port PPPoE Plus.
a. On the PPPoE Plus tab, select a port, and then click Modify. The PPPoE
b. From the PPPoE Plus list, select Enabled.
c. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.6.2 Configuring DHCP Option 82

This procedure describes how to enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
Option 82. After this function is enabled, the NE adds the Option 82 field to the DHCP
packets. In this way, the NE authenticates and manages user ports in a centralized way
to deny the access by illegal subscribers.
DHCP Option 82 is used to authenticate and identify the subscribers that dynamically apply
to IP addresses.
Prerequisite
Context
Figure 2-35 shows the DHCP Option 82 principles.
2-59
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-35 DHCP Option 82 Principles
The DHCP Relay Agent intercepts the broadcast packets that the client sends to the DHCP
server, including the DHCP Discover, DHCP Offer, DHCP Request, and DHCP Inform
packets.
The DHCP Relay Agent performs the following functions:
l
l
l
Adds the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to the upstream DHCP broadcast packets that
are received from the client.
Removes the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID from the downstream reply packets that are
sent by the DHCP Server.
Forwards the valid broadcast packets with the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID that are
sent from other DHCP Relay Agents.
If a DHCP broadcast packet exceeds the maximum packet length after being added with
the Agent option, the DHCP Relay Agent will discard the packet and increase the error
count.
Steps
Subscriber Identification. The DHCP Option 82 parameters are displayed in the
2-60
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-36 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCP Option 82 Configuration

is displayed.
Table 2-30.
Parameter
Description
Node ID Type

physical location.
This parameter refers to the access-node-identifier type in the
Circuit ID:
l


Node Name
This parameter needs to be configured when Node ID Type is

Node Name.
Rack
Shelf
Circuit ID Syntax Enabling
Whether to enable the flexible configuration of the Circuit ID

syntax.
If this function is enabled, the keywords in the Circuit ID can
be selected and combined flexibly.
2-61
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
displayed.
Parameter
Description
Component Index
Used to identify the variable domains and their locations in

the Circuit ID syntax.
Component Type
Standard Variable: All the variable domains defined in

the TR101 standard

supporting ONU-ID, GEM Port, SVLAN, CVLAN, SN,
LOID, and LOID Password
User Defined String
Component Content
Component Width

The Circuit ID domain cannot exceed 63 characters. If
it exceeds 63 characters, the NE intercepts the first 63
characters and raises an alarm.
d. Click OK.
Note:
4. Select a user port.

2-62
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
For a PON NE, select the rack, shelf, card, port, and ONU where the user port is
located.
For an AG NE, select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and PVC where the user port is
located.

Parameter
Description
Format
Remote ID Enable
When the Circuit ID cannot identify a subscriber line uniquely,

the Remote ID is added to the Circuit ID as a supplementary
to identify the subscriber line.
Remote ID

characters.
c. Click OK.
6. Enable global DHCP Option 82.
a. Click the DHCP tab, and then click Global. The DHCP Global Configuration
b. From the DHCP Option82 list, select Enabled.
c. Click OK.
7. Configure port DHCP Option 82.
a. On the DHCP tab, select a port, and then click Modify. The DHCP Configuration
b. Configure the DHCP Option 82 parameters. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-33 Parameter Descriptions for DHCP Option 82
Parameter
Description
DHCP Option82
To enable or disable port DHCP Option 82.
Trust Status
Processing mode of the upstream packets that carry the

port location information:
l
Trust: To reserve or replace the packets.
Untrust: To discard or add the packets.
2-63
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Policy
Keep: To reserve the original port location information.
Replace: To replace the original port location information

with the local port location information.
Discard: To discard the upstream packets that carry the

port location information.
Add: To add an item of the port location information to

the original port location information.
c. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.6.3 Configuring DHCPv6 Option 18

This procedure describes how to enable DHCPv6 Option 18. After this function is enabled,
the NE adds the Option 18 field to the DHCPv6 packets. In this way, the NE authenticates
and manages user ports in a centralized way to deny the access by illegal subscribers.
DHCPv6 Option 18 is used to authenticate and identify the subscribers who apply IP
addresses dynamically.
Prerequisite
Steps
Subscriber Identification. In the right pane, configure the DHCPv6 Option 18
parameters, see Figure 2-37.
2-64
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-37 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCPv6 Option 18 Configuration

is displayed.
Table 2-34.
Parameter
Description
Node ID Type

physical location.
This parameter refers to the access-node-identifier type in the
Circuit ID:
l


Node Name
This parameter needs to be configured when Node ID Type is

Node Name.
Rack
Shelf
Circuit ID Syntax
Whether to enable the flexible configuration of the Circuit ID
Enabling
syntax.
If this function is enabled, the key words in the Circuit ID can be
selected and combined flexibly.
2-65
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
displayed.
Parameter
Description
Component Index
Used to identify the variable domains and their locations in the

Circuit ID syntax.
Component Type
Standard Variable: All the variable domains defined in the

TR101 standard

supporting ONU-ID, GEM Port, SVLAN, CVLAN, SN, LOID,
and LOID Password
User Defined String
Component Content
Component Width

The Circuit ID domain cannot exceed 63 characters. If it exceeds
63 characters, the NE intercepts the first 63 characters and
raises an alarm.
d. Click OK.
Note:
4. Select the rack, shelf, card, port, and ONU.

2-66
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

Parameter
Description
Format
Remote ID Enable
When the Circuit ID cannot identify a subscriber line uniquely,

the Remote ID is added to the Circuit ID as a supplementary
to identify the subscriber line.
Remote ID

characters.
c. Click OK.
6. Enable global DHCPv6 Option 18.
a. Click the DHCPv6 tab, and then click Global. The DHCPv6 Global Configuration
b. From the DHCP Option18 list, select Enabled.
c. Click OK.
7. Enable port DHCPv6 Option 18.
a. On the DHCPv6 tab, select a port, and then click Modify.
The DHCPv6
b. Configure the port DHCPv6 Option 18 parameters. For a description of the

Table 2-37 DHCPv6 Option 18 Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
DHCP Option18
Enables or disables DHCPv6 Option 18.
Trust Status
Trust status of the upstream packets that carry the port location
information:
l
Trust: Can select the Keep or Replace policy.
Untrust: Can select the Discard or Add policy.
2-67
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Policy
Keep: Keeps the original port location information.
Replace: Uses the local port location information to replace

the original port location information.
Discard: Discards the upstream packets that carry the port

location information.
Add: Adds another port location information tag to the

existing one.
c. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.7 L2 Protocol Management

2.7.1 ACL
l
l
l
l
l
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
the ACL
ACL binding
ACL statistics
the management ACL
management ACL binding
2.7.1.1 Configuring the ACL

This procedure describes how to configure the hybrid Access Control List (ACL) rules. You
can use the ACL rules to filter the traffic on the uplink port or user port and manage the
traffic that meets the ACL rules.
Prerequisite
Context
ACL is a set of permission and denial rules, which are used to filter specific packets
according to the certain conditions. The relevant NE then permits or denies the packets
according to preset policies.
The ACL and Quality of Service (QoS) can be used together to enhance NE security.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click ACL >
ACL Configuration. The hybrid ACL parameters are displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 2-38.
2-68
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-38 NE Protocol Manager Window - ACL Configuration
2. Click New. The Add ACL Configuration dialog box is displayed.

3. Configure the ACL parameters, and then click OK. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-38 ACL Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
ACL Type
Hybrid: IPv4 hybrid type, used to match the

source/destination MAC address, source VLAN ID,
source/destination IP address, TCP source/destination port
number, and UDP source/destination port number
l
ACL Index
IPv6 Hybrid: IPv6 hybrid type
ACL ID
Value range: 300399
ACL Alias
ACL name
4. Configure the ACL matching rules.

a. Select the new ACL, and then click Rule. The ACL Rule Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
b. Click New. The Add ACL Rule Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c. Configure the ACL rule parameters, and then click OK. For a description of the
Table 2-39 ACL Rule Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
ACL Rule ID
Up to 127 rules can be configured.

2-69
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Access Control
Permit: To permit the packets that match the rule.
Deny: To deny the packets that match the rule.
IP Protocol
To manage the IP protocol stack. The protocol types

include Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE), IGMP,
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Protocol Independent
Multicast (PIM), Transfer Control Protocol (TCP),
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol (VRRP).
Source/Destination Address
Source or destination IP address.
Source/Destination Address
IP address wildcard.
Wildcard
Source/Destination Operation
Sets the matching rules for the source or destination

port:
l
eq: equal
ge: greater than and equal to
le: less than and equal to
range: port number range
Source Starting/Ending Port
Source port number range of the protocol.
Destination Starting/Ending Port
Destination port number range of the protocol.
Ethernet Protocol
Ethernet protocol type.
Precedence
Precedence field in the IP packet, mutually exclusive to

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP).
TOS
Type Of Service, mutually exclusive to DSCP.
DSCP
DSCP priority.
SVLAN Priority
Service VLAN priority.
SVLAN ID
Service VLAN ID.
CVLAN Priority
User VLAN priority.
CVLAN ID
User VLAN ID.
Source/Destination MAC
Source or destination MAC address.
Source/Destination MAC
MAC address wildcard.
Wildcard
5. Configure the traffic limit parameters.

a. In the ACL Rule Configuration dialog box, select the new rule, and then select
Advanced > Traffic Limit. The Traffic Limit Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
2-70
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Configure the traffic limit parameters, and then click OK. For a description of the
Table 2-40 Traffic Limit Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Status
Select Configured to configure the traffic limit parameters.
Traffic Limit Mode
Color sensitivity mode:

l
Color Blindness: The NE considers all the received

packets to be green and colors the packets according to
the configured parameters.
Color Sensitivity: The NE identifies the packet colors

according to the DSCP priorities, colors the packets
according to the configured parameters, and then
determines the packet colors.
CIR
Committed Information Rate, unit: Kbps.
CBS
Committed Burst Size, which must be greater than the

maximum packet length, unit: KB.
EBS
Excess Burst Size, unit: KB.
PIR
Peak Information Rate, which is greater than the CIR, unit:

Kbps.
PBS
Peak Burst Size, which is greater than the CBS, unit: KB.
Forward Red Packet
Select Yes to forward the red packets.
Drop Yellow Packet
Select Yes to drop the yellow packets.
Remarked Red Drop
To modify the drop priority of the red packets.
Precedence
Remarked Yellow Drop
To modify the drop priority of the yellow packets.
Precedence
Remarked Red DSCP
To modify the DSCP priority of the red packets.
Remarked Yellow DSCP
To modify the DSCP priority of the yellow packets.
Note:
You can configure different parameters to select different traffic limiting policies.
The NE supports the following policies:
l
Single-rate three-color marking algorithm: Marks packets according to the

CIR, CBS, and EBS parameters.
If the length of a packet does not exceed the CBS, the packet is marked
with green.
If the length of a packet exceeds the EBS, the packet is marked with red.
2-71
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
This algorithm uses the packet length, rather than the packet rate, to
determine the packet legality. It is based on the ACL rate limiting rule.
l
Dual-rate three-color marking algorithm: Marks packets according to the CIR

and PIR parameters.
If the rate of a packet does not exceed the CIR, the packet is marked with
green.
If the rate of a packet is between the CIR and PIR, the packet is marked
with yellow.
If the rate of a packet exceeds the PIR, the packet is marked with red.
6. Configure the priority mark parameters.

Advanced > Priority Mark. The Priority Marking Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
b. Mark priority for the traffic that matches the ACL rule, and then click OK. The traffic
can then obtain the services matching the priority. For a description of the priority
mark parameters, refer to Table 2-41.
Table 2-41 Priority Mark Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Priority Marking Status
Select Configured to configure the priority mark parameters.
Precedence
Type Of Service (ToS) priority of packets.
Local Precedence
Local priority of packets.
l
l
Note:
The ToS priority and the DSCP priority are mutually exclusive, and cannot be
configured together.
The Class of Service (CoS) priority and the local precedence are mutually
exclusive, and cannot be configured together.
7. Configure the redirection parameters.

Advanced > Redirect. The Redirection Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Redirect the traffic that matches the ACL rules to the specified port, Central
Processing Unit (CPU), or next-hop IP address for forwarding. Click OK. For a
description of the redirection parameters, refer to Table 2-42.
2-72
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-42 Redirection Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
Redirection Status
Select Configured to configure the redirection mark parameters.
Redirection Type
CPU: Sends the packets to the CPU.
Port: Sends the packets to the specified port.
Next Hop: Sends the packets to the specified next-hop IP

address.
8. Configure the traffic mirroring parameters.

Advanced > Traffic Mirroring. The Traffic Mirroring Configuration dialog box
is displayed.
b. Mirror the traffic that matches the ACL rules to the specified port, and then click
OK. For a description of the traffic mirroring parameters, refer to Table 2-43.
Note:
This operation does not affect traffic receiving and sending on the mirroring source
port. You can analyze the traffic on the mirroring source port to monitor the traffic.
Table 2-43 Traffic Mirroring Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
Traffic Mirroring Status
Select Configured to configure the traffic mirroring parameters.
Traffic Mirroring Type
CPU: Mirrors the packets to the CPU.
Port: Mirrors the packets to the specified port.
9. Configure the VLAN mark parameters.

Advanced > VLAN Mark. The VLAN Marking Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
b. Remark the VLAN ID for the traffic that matches the ACL rules, and then click OK.
For a description of the VLAN mark parameters, refer to Table 2-44.
Table 2-44 VLAN Mark Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
VLAN Marking Status
Select Configured to configure the marked VLAN ID.

2-73
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
To delete an ACL, in the ACL Configuration window, select the ACL, and then
click Delete.
The ACL that is bound with a port cannot be deleted.
l
l
To delete an ACL rule, select the ACL rule in the ACL Rule Configuration
window, and then click Delete.
To modify a ACL rule, select the ACL rule in the ACL Rule Configuration window,
and then click Modify.
End of Steps
2.7.1.2 Configuring Management ACL Binding

This procedure describes how to bind the management ACL to the Network Management
(NM) protocols to control the external devices to access the NE.
Prerequisite
l
l

A management ACL is configured.
Steps
Management ACL Binding. The management ACL binding parameters are displayed
Figure 2-39 NE Protocol Manager Window - Management ACL Binding
Configuration
2. Select an NM protocol, and then click Modify.

Binding Configuration dialog box is displayed.
The Modify Management ACL
2-74
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Configure the management ACL binding parameters, and then click OK. For a
Table 2-45 Parameter Descriptions for Management ACL Binding
Parameter
Description
Protocol
Telnet: To control the external devices to access the NE

through Telnet.
SNMP: To control the external devices to configure and

manage the NE through Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).
ACL Binding Index
Management ACL ID.
Not Bound
Allows the external devices to access the NE.
End of Steps
2.7.1.3 Configuring ACL Binding

This procedure describes how to bind the ACL to the uplink port and user port. The ACL
rules are then used to filter and manage the traffic on the uplink port and user port.
Prerequisite
l
l

An ACL is configured.
Steps
ACL Binding. The ACL binding parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure
2-40.
2-75
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-40 NE Protocol Manager Window - ACL Binding Configuration
2. Select the port to which the ACL is bound.

l For a PON NE, select the rack, shelf, card, and port.
l For an AG NE, select the rack, shelf, slot, and port.
3. Click New. The Add ACL Binding Configuration dialog box is displayed.
4. Configure the ACL binding parameters, and then click OK. For a description of the
Table 2-46 ACL Binding Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Port Type
Description
l
Bridge Port: xDSL Permanent Virtual Channel (PVC) port
Inner-port: ports between the main control card and other

cards
Physical Port: xDSL port or Ethernet port
GPON Vport: GPON card virtual port
EPON Vport: EPON card virtual port
ONU
ONU ID
Virtual Port
Virtual port number

Range: 1255
ACL Index
Created ACL ID
Direction
Ingress: To use the ACL in the ingress direction of the port
Egress: To use the ACL in the egress direction of the port
5. (Optional) To delete an ACL binding relation, select it in the ACL Binding window, and
then click Delete.
End of Steps
2-76
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.7.1.4 Configuring the Management ACL

This procedure describes how to configure the management ACL, which limits other
devices to access the NE and controls the source IP addresses of the received IP packets.
Prerequisite
Context
In actual networking application, the NE is configured with an in-band Network
Management (NM) IP address and is connected to the public network or private network
through the uplink port. All the devices in the network can access the NE. For security
purpose, however, only a few devices are permitted to access the NE. Therefore, the NE
provides the management ACL function.
After the NE is bound with the management ACL, the NE discards the IP packets that do
not match the management ACL. The NE does not response to the Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) request packet and Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet
whose source IP addresses are not in the management ACL. This prevents illegal devices
from attacking the NE by obtaining the Medium Access Control (MAC) address and the
IP address of the NE.
Steps
Management ACL Configuration. The management ACL parameters are displayed
Figure 2-41 NE Protocol Manager Window - Management ACL Configuration
2. Click New. The Add Management ACL Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2-77
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Configure the management ACL parameters, and then click OK. For a description of
Table 2-47 Management ACL Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Management ACL
Management ACL ID
Range: 199
Management ACL Alias
Management ACL name
4. Configure a management ACL rule.

a. Select the new management ACL item, and then click Rule. The Management
ACL Rule Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Click New.
displayed.
The Add Management ACL Rule Configuration dialog box is
c. Configure the management ACL rule parameters, and then click OK. For a
Table 2-48 Parameter Descriptions for Management ACL Rules
Parameter
Description
Management ACL Rule ID
Management ACL rule ID.

Up to 127 rules are supported.
Access Control
Source Address/Source
Permit: To permit the packets that match the rule.
Deny: To deny the packets that match the rule.
Source IP address or wildcard.
Address Wildcard

l To delete a management ACL, select it in the Management ACL Configuration
window, and then click Delete.
l To delete a management ACL rule, select it in the Management ACL Rule
Configuration dialog box, and then click Delete.
l To modify a management ACL rule, select it in the Management ACL Rule
Configuration dialog box, and then click Modify.
End of Steps
2.7.1.5 Configuring ACL Statistics

This procedure describes how to collect statistics on the traffic that match the ACL rules
and view the statistics information.
Prerequisite
l

2-78
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
An ACL is configured.
Steps
ACL Statistics. The ACL statistics parameters are displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 2-42.
Figure 2-42 NE Protocol Manager Window - ACL Statistics Configuration
2. Create the statistic objects.

a. Click New. The Add ACL Statistics dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the ACL statistics parameters, and then click OK. For a description of
Table 2-49 ACL Statistics Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Packet Type
All: To collect statistics on all the packets.
Red: To collect statistics on the packets that are marked

with red.
Yellow: To collect statistics on the packets that are

marked with yellow.
Green: To collect statistics on the packets that are

marked with green.
Statistics Type
Packet: To collect statistics on the packet count.
Byte: To collect statistics on the byte.
3. View the statistics information.
2-79
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. In the ACL Statistics window, view the statistics information on the created
objects.
b. Click Refresh to refresh the statistics information.
statistics value to 0.
Click Reset to reset the
4. (Optional) To delete a statistic object, select it and click Delete.

End of Steps
2.7.2 STP
l
l
l
Configuring the STP global parameters

Configuring an STP instance
Configuring the STP port
2.7.2.1 Configuring the STP Global Parameters

This procedure describes how to enable the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and configure
the STP global parameters.
Prerequisite
Context
The STP is a link layer network protocol that ensures a loop-free topology for any bridged
LAN. It uses certain algorithms to block some redundant paths, which prevents messages
from proliferating and infinite recycling in the loop network.
The STP participates in the Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) exchange among all the
STP switches in an extended Local Area Network (LAN). The following operations are
implemented through exchanging BPDU messages.
l
l
l
Select a root bridge in the stable spanning tree topology.

Specify a switch in each switch network segment.
Set the redundant switch port to Discard to avoid any loop in the network topology.
The ZXA10 C300 STP supports the following modes:

l
l
l
Single Spanning Tree Protocol (SSTP), complying to IEEE802.1d

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), complying to IEEE802.1w
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), complying to IEEE802.1s
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click STP >
STP Global. The STP global parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure
2-43.
2-80
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-43 NE Protocol Manager Window - STP Global Configuration
2. Configure the STP global parameters. For a description of the STP global parameters,
Table 2-50 STP Global Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Protocol Type
Disabled: To disable the STP. You can configure

Transparent Enable to transparently transmit or discard
the BPDU packets. By default, the BPDU packets are
discarded.
SSTP: To enable the Single Spanning Tree Protocol

(SSTP).
RSTP: To enable the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

(RSTP).
MSTP: To enable the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

(MSTP).
Default: Disabled.
Bridge Maximum Aging Time (s)
Maximum aging time of the STP BPDU packets on a specified

bridge.
Default: 20 seconds.
The NE checks whether the configuration packet received by
the port times out in accordance with the maximum aging
time. If the configuration packet times out, the spanning tree
instance needs to be recalculated.
If the NE is the root bridge, this parameter is used to verify
the timeout. If the NE is not the root bridge, the maximum
aging time of the root bridge is used to verify the timeout.
2-81
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Bridge Hello Time (s)
Time interval that the specified NE STP sends BPDU packets.

Default: 2 seconds.
This parameter is used by the STP to periodically send the
configuration packets for the stability of the spanning tree.
If the NE does not receive configuration packets during a
period, the NE considers that the packet times out and
recalculates the spanning tree.
If the NE is the root bridge, this parameter is used to send the
configuration packet. If the NE is not the root bridge, the time
interval of the root bridge is used to send the configuration
packet.
Bridge Forwarding Delay (s)
Forwarding delay time of the STP.

Default: 15 seconds.
To prevent temporary loop, when the port state changes from
Discarding to Forwarding and the fast changing conditions of
the port state are not met, the intermediate state Learning is
set and state changing needs certain time to synchronize
with the remote switch state changing.
The forwarding delay time of the root switch determines the
time interval of state changing. If the NE is the root bridge,
this parameter is used as the forwarding delay time. If the
NE is not the root bridge, the forwarding delay time of the
root bridge is used.
Transparent Enable
To enable or disable the STP transparent transmission.

This parameter can be configured only when Protocol Type
is Disabled.
When the STP transparent transmission is enabled, the
BPDU packets are broadcast in the VLAN rather than being
sent to the Central Processing Unit (CPU) for processing.
Revision
Configuration version in mst_config_id. This parameter is

effective when Protocol Type is MSTP.
When the switches need to be configured in one domain,
this parameter must be configured to keep the switch
configuration consistent.
Default: 0.
Configuration Name
Domain name in mst_config_id. This parameter is effective

when Protocol Type is MSTP.
Default: management MAC address of the NE.
2-82
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Cisco MD5 Key
MD5 Key value required by the digest in mst_config_id. This

parameter is effective when Protocol Type is MSTP.
Default: 0x13ac06a62e47fd51f95d2ba243cd0346
This parameter is used to ensure the device security. If the
MD5 key values of two devices in one Multiple Spanning Tree
(MST) domain are different, the devices cannot communicate
with each other.
The MSTP packet formats configured by some other
providers, such as Cisco and Huawei, are different from
the IEEE standard. The switches of ZTE Corporation can
interwork with the devices of these providers in a domain only
when the key value or digest value is configured.
Cisco MD5 Digest
MD5 digest value in mst_config_id. This parameter is

effective when Protocol Type is MSTP.
Default: 0x00000000000000000000000000000000
The MSTP packet formats configured by some other
providers, such as Cisco and Huawei, are different from
the IEEE standard. The switches of ZTE Corporation can
interwork with the devices of these providers in a domain only
when the key value or digest value is configured.
Note:
The relation between the Bridge Maximum Aging Time, Bridge Hello Time, and
Bridge Forwarding Delay parameters is as follows:
2 (Bridge Forwarding Delay 1.0 s) Bridge Maximum Aging Time 2 (Bridge
Hello Time + 1.0 s)
The STP of the entire network can work effectively only when the relation described
above is met. Otherwise, the network is unstable.
3. Click Apply.
End of Steps
2.7.2.2 Configuring an STP Instance

This procedure describes how to configure an MSTP instance. MSTP instances map with
VLANs. Each VLAN can be added with one instance. Different instances in an MST
domain can maintain different spanning tree structures to achieve load balance.
The NE supports 16 MSTP instances.
2-83
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
l
l

The STP type is configured.
Context
l
In SSTP mode and RSTP mode, there is only one instance 0, that is, Common and
Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) instance. In MSTP mode, instance 0 exists by default,
and cannot be deleted.
To enter one MST domain, the bridges need to meet the following conditions:
The MST configuration names are the same.
The MST configuration versions are the same.
The instance-to-VLAN mapping tables are the same.
The devices are connected physically.
Steps
STP Instance. The STP instance parameters are displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 2-44.
Figure 2-44 NE Protocol Manager Window - STP Instance Configuration
2. Configure the MSTP instance.

a. Click New. The STP Instance Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the MSTP instance parameters, and then click OK. For a description of
2-84
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-51 STP Instance Parameter Descriptions

Parameter
Description
Instance ID
Instance ID, ranging from 0 to 32.

Instance 0 exists by default and cannot be deleted.
Bridge Priority
Priority of the NE in a specified spanning tree.

Value range: 061440, with the step value of 4096.
Default: 32768.
The MSTP devices can have different priorities in different
spanning tree instances. The device priority determines whether
the device can be selected as the root bridge of the spanning tree.
The device with the smallest priority value is selected as the root
bridge.
If the device priorities are the same, the device with the smallest
MAC address is selected as the root bridge.
VLAN Mapping
To map the specified VLAN to the specified MSTP instance.

By default, all the VLANs are mapped to instance 0, that is, CIST.
One VLAN cannot be mapped to different instances. If you map a
VLAN that is already mapped to an instance to another instance,
the previous mapping relation is cancelled automatically.
c. Select the new instance, and then click Modify. The STP Instance Configuration
d. Configure the bridge maximum hops. For a description of the parameter, refer to
Table 2-52.
Table 2-52 STP Instance Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Bridge Maximum Hops
Maximum hops of the BPDU packets in the MST domain

Value range: 140
Default: 20
The hops of a BPDU packet in the domain decreases by 1
when the packet passes a device, starting from the root bridge.
The NE discards the packet whose hop number is 0, to limit
the domain network scale.
e. Click OK.
3. Configure the port parameters in different MSTP instances.
2-85
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
The port parameters are effective only after the port is added to the instance.
a. Select an instance, and then click Port Instance.

The STP Port Instance
b. Select a port, and then click Modify. Another STP Port Instance Configuration
c. Configure the port parameters for the instance.
Table 2-53 Parameter Descriptions for the STP Port Instance

Parameter
Description
Port Priority
The port priority determines the port role in a spanning tree instance.
Generally, the smaller the value is, the higher the priority is. The
Ethernet port with the smallest priority value can be selected as the
root port.
Port Path Cost
The port path cost affects the port role in a spanning tree instance.
Root Guard Enable
After the root guard function is enabled and the port role changes
to root port or alternate port, the port status changes to Blocking.
When the port role changes to designated port, the port status
changes to Forwarding.
4. (Optional) To delete an MSTP instance, select it and click Delete.

End of Steps
2.7.2.3 Configuring the STP Port

This procedure describes how to configure the STP port.
Prerequisite
l
l

The STP type is configured.
Steps
STP Port. The STP port parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-45.
2-86
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-45 NE Protocol Manager Window - STP Port Configuration
2. Select an uplink port, and then click Modify. The STP Port Configuration dialog box
is displayed.
3. Configure the STP port parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to Table
2-54.
Table 2-54 STP Port Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
STP Enable
On: To enable the port STP.
Off: To disable the port STP.
When the global STP is enabled and port STP is disabled, the port will
discard the BPDU packets.
Link Type
Whether the port is connected with a point-to-point link.

l
Share: The STP port is connected with a link that is not point-to-point.
Auto: The STP checks whether the link connected to the port is
point-to-point.
P2P: The STP port is connected with a point-to-point link. The two
ports connected with a point-to-point link can be switched to the
Forwarding state quickly by sending synchronization packets. This
reduces the forwarding delay time.
Edged Port Enable
To enable the edged port function, that is, to specify the port as an edged
port. The port can be switched from Blocking to Forwarding quickly
and there is no delay time.
Only the ports connected to the terminal devices can be set to edged ports.
2-87
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
BPDU Guard
Processing mode of the BPDU packets received by the port.
Enable
Disabled: No BPDU guard measure is taken and the BPDU packets

are processed normally.
l
Packet Type
Enable: To shut down the port.
BPDU packet type on the STP port.

l
If the peer device is provided by Cisco, the packet type is CISCO.
If the peer device is provided by Harbour Networks Limited, the

packet type is HAMMER.
If the peer device is provided by Huawei, the packet type is HUAWEI.
If the device is not provided by the Cisco, Harbour Networks Limited,

or Huawei, the packet type is IEEE.
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.7.3 LACP
l
l
l
Configuring the Smartgroup

Configuring the LACP aggregation group
Configuring the LACP aggregation ports
2.7.3.1 Configuring the LACP Aggregation Group

This procedure describes how to configure the LACP aggregation group parameters,
including the system priority and load balance mode.
Prerequisite
l
l

The Smartgroup is configured.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click LACP >
LACP Aggregation Group. The LACP aggregation group parameters are displayed
2-88
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-46 NE Protocol Manager Window - LACP Aggregation Group Configuration
2. Select the created Smartgroup, and then click Modify. The LACP Aggregation
3. Configure the LACP aggregation group parameters.
Table 2-55 Parameter Descriptions for the LACP Aggregation Group

Parameter
Description
System Priority
The port of the device whose system priority and MAC address
values are bigger is selected to the aggregation group.
Value range: 165535, from low to high
Default: 32768
Load Balance Mode
Load balance mode of the aggregation group.

The NE supports eight load balance modes: Destination IP,
Destination MAC, Source/Destination IP, Source/Destination
MAC, Source IP, Source MAC.
Default: Source/Destination MAC
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.7.3.2 Configuring the LACP Aggregation Ports

This procedure describes how to configure the member ports of an LACP aggregation
group.
Prerequisite
l

2-89
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
The Smartgroup is configured.
Context
The member ports of an LACP aggregation group need to meet the following principles:
l
l
l
l
Each aggregation group can contain up to eight member ports.

The member ports can be on different interface cards, but all the member ports must
work in full duplex mode and their working rates are consistent.
The VLAN modes of the member ports can be access, trunk, or hybrid. They must be
consistent.
The VLAN link type of the member ports should be consistent with that of the
Smartgroup. Otherwise, the ports are not allowed to be added to the link aggregation
group.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click LACP >
LACP Aggregation Port. The LACP aggregation port parameters are displayed in
Figure 2-47 NE Protocol Manager Window - LACP Aggregation Port Configuration
2. Click New. The LACP Aggregated Configuration dialog box is displayed.

3. Configure the member ports of the LACP aggregation group, and then click OK. For a
Table 2-56 Parameter Descriptions for the LACP Aggregation Port
Parameter
Description
Rack/Shelf/Slot/Port
Rack number, shelf number, slot number, and port number

of a member port.
2-90
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
SmartGroup ID
LACP aggregation group ID.
SubGroup ID
The ZXA10 C300 supports LACP active/standby mode. The

ports in an aggregation group can be added to different
subgroups.
The subgroup ID ranges from 0 to 2. By default, the subgroup
is not configured, and the default subgroup ID is 0.
The subgroup active/standby switchover is as follows:
l
For an aggregation group, the first configured subgroup is

active, and the other is standby.
After the active subgroup is switched to the standby

one, only when all the ports in the active subgroup are
reactivated, the standby subgroup can be switched to
the active one.
Port Mode
On: The link aggregation mode is static trunk. The LACP

does not run, and the member ports are directly added to
the trunk group to form a logical port.
In static trunk mode, the aggregated ports of both ends
need to be set to On.
Active: The link aggregation mode is LACP. The member

ports are aggregated to the trunk group through the LACP
to form a logical port. The LACP implements aggregation
automatically to obtain the maximum bandwidth.
In this mode, the port sends the LACP packets to the peer
port actively for LACP calculation.
In LACP mode, the port of one end needs to be set to
Active and that of the other needs to be set to Passive,
or both of them are set to Active.
Passive: The link aggregation mode is LACP. The member

In this mode, the port does not send the LACP packets
to the peer port actively. After the port receives an LACP
packet from the peer port, it starts the LACP calculation.
4. (Optional) Select the created LACP aggregation port, and then click Modify. The
LACP Aggregated Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2-91
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
When the port mode is Active or Passive, modify the LACP aggregation port
parameters, and then click OK. For a description of the parameters, refer to Table
2-57.
Table 2-57 Parameter Descriptions for the LACP Aggregation Port
Parameter
Description
Priority
LACP port priority

The port with a higher port priority and port ID is added to the
aggregation group first.
Default: 32768
Port Timeout
Long Time: The NE sends an LACP packet every 30 seconds.
Short Time: The NE sends an LACP packet every one seconds.
5. (Optional) To delete an LACP aggregation port, select it and click Delete.

End of Steps
2.8 L3 Protocol Management

2.8.1 Configuring a Layer 3 Interface
This procedure describes how to configure a layer 3 interface. A layer 3 interface is a
virtual interface, and it is created based on the Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN). The
Network Element (NE) can transmit packets to other devices through the IP protocol by
configuring a layer 3 interface IP address.
Prerequisite
l
l

At least one layer 3 interface VLAN is created.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Layer 3
> Layer 3 Interface. The layer 3 interface parameters are displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 2-48.
2-92
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-48 NE Protocol Manager Window - Layer 3 Interface Configuration
2. Create a layer 3 interface.

a. Click Add. The Layer 3 Interface Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the layer 3 interface parameters. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-58 Layer 3 Interface Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Interface Type
Layer 3 VLAN: layer 3 VLAN interface, which can be used

to create an IP address and generate a subnet route to
implement communications between the subnets in a VLAN.
Layer 3 Super VLAN: Super VLAN is based on the layer 3

VLAN. A super VLAN can contain multiple sub-interface
VLANs, which can communicate with each other through
the ARP proxy.
Layer 3 Loopback: The local loopback interface is a virtual

interface. The IP address of the local loopback interface is
generally specified to the packet source address to enhance
network reliability.
ID
Created VLAN ID. For how to create a VLAN, refer to 2.2.1

Configuring a Static VLAN.
2-93
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
ARP Proxy
Enable: Enables the ARP proxy function on the layer

3 interface to implement communications between the
separated ports in a broadcast domain or between the ports
in different broadcast domains.
When the switch interface receives an ARP request packet
whose source IP address is in the same IP segment with the
interface IP address but in a different physical network, the
interface sends its MAC address as a response packet and
forwards the received data packet.
Disable: Disables the ARP proxy function on the layer 3

interface.
Default: Enable
c. Click OK.
3. Configure the IP address of the layer 3 interface.
a. Select the new layer 3 interface, and then click IP Address. The Layer 3 Interface
IP Address Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Click Add. Another Layer 3 Interface IP Address Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
c. Configure the parameters of the layer 3 interface IP address. For a description of
Table 2-59 Parameter Descriptions for the Layer 3 Interface IP Address
Parameter
Description
IP Address Type
Only IPV4 is supported.
IP Address
IP address of the layer 3 interface.
Subnet Mask/Prefix Length
Subnet mask of the IP address.
Category/Status
l
l
Primary: primary IP address of the layer 3 interface.

Secondary: secondary IP address of the layer 3
interface.
d. Click OK.
l To delete a layer 3 interface, select it in the Layer 3 Interface window, and then
click Delete.
l To modify the parameters of a layer 3 interface, select it in the Layer 3 Interface
window, and then click Modify.
l To delete the IP address configuration of a layer 3 interface, select it in the Layer
3 Interface IP Address Configuration dialog box, and then click Delete.
End of Steps
2-94
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.8.2 DHCP
l
l
l
l
Configuring the DHCP layer 3 general parameters

Configuring the DHCP relay
Configuring the DHCP server
Viewing the DHCP online users
2.8.2.1 Configuring the DHCP Layer 3 General Parameters

This procedure describes how to configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) layer 3 general parameters, including the layer 3 interface working mode and
DHCP global parameters.
You need to configure these parameters before configuring the DHCP relay and DHCP
server.
Prerequisite
l
l

The layer 3 interface is created. For details, refer to 2.8.1 Configuring a Layer 3
Interface.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Layer
3 > DHCP > DHCP Layer 3 General Configuration. The DHCP layer 3 general
parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-49.
Figure 2-49 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCP Layer 3 General Configuration
2. Configure the working mode of the layer 3 interface.

2-95
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. Select a layer 3 interface VLAN, and then click Modify. The DHCP Layer 3
General VLAN Interface dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the VLAN interface mode. For a description of the parameter, refer to
Table 2-60.
Table 2-60 Parameter Descriptions for the VLAN Interface Mode
Parameter
Description
VLAN Interface Mode
Server: The NE works as the DHCP server and

assigns IP addresses to users.
Relay: The NE works as the DHCP relay agent.

When the DHCP client and server are in different
network segments, the NE forwards the user DHCP
request to the specified DHCP server.
Proxy: It is the extended mode of the relay mode, in

which user offline status can be detected quickly.
c. Click OK.
3. Configure the DHCP global parameters.
a. Click Advanced. The DHCP Layer 3 General Global Configuration dialog box
is displayed.
b. Configure the DHCP global parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer
to Table 2-61.
Table 2-61 DHCP Layer 3 Global Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
DHCP Layer 3 Global Status
Only when the DHCP layer 3 status is enabled, the layer

3 interfaces that work in relay, proxy, or server mode can
operate normally.
DHCP Layer 3 Log Status
Whether to enable the DHCP layer 3 log function.
c. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.8.2.2 Configuring the DHCP Relay

This procedure describes how to configure the DHCP relay. When the DHCP client and
server are in different network segments, the ZXA10 C300 works as the DHCP relay agent
and forwards the user DHCP request to the specified DHCP server.
Prerequisite
l

2-96
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
The layer 3 general parameters are configured. For details, refer to 2.8.2.1
Configuring the DHCP Layer 3 General Parameters.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Layer 3
> DHCP > DHCP Relay. The DHCP relay parameters are displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 2-50.
Figure 2-50 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCP Relay Configuration
2. Configure the global parameters of the DHCP relay.

a. Click Advanced. The DHCP Relay Global Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the global parameters of the DHCP relay. For a description of the
Table 2-62 DHCP Relay Global Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Maximum Retry Times
Maximum retry times that the NE sends the request packet to the
DHCP server.
If the NE sends the request packet for more than the retry times, it
considers that the DHCP server is faulty and sets the forwarding
status of this server to dead. It then sends the packet to the next
server. If no other servers are configured, it continues using this
server.
2-97
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Proxy Lease Time (s)
Short lease time in DHCP proxy mode.

In DHCP proxy mode, user offline status can be detected quickly
through different lease time periods between the client and relay
agent, between the relay agent and server.
The lease time period between the client and relay agent is short
lease time T1, and that between the relay agent and server is
the long lease time T2. When a user gets offline, the relay agent
detects the offline during T1, and then sends a release packet to
the server to release the resource.
Updating ARP
Enable: After the successfully forwarding the IP address that

the DHCP server replies to the DHCP client, the DHCP relay
agent binds the IP address that the DHCP server assigns to
the DHCP user with the ARP table, and stops ARP learning.
This prevents ARP attacks to the DHCP users.
This parameter is effective only when the Forwarding Mode
of the DHCP server is Security.
Disable: The IP address of the DHCP user is not bound with

the ARP table.
c. Click OK.
3. Configure the mapping relations between the Option 60 string and the server IP
address.
Note:
After the DHCP Option 60 function is enabled, the VLAN interface server does not
need to be configured. The Option 60 field in the user request packet determines
which server to be used.
a. On the Option60 tab, click New. The DHCP Relay Option60 Configuration
b. Configure the Option 60 parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 2-63.
Table 2-63 Parameter Descriptions for DHCP Relay Option 60
Parameter
Description
String
String used to communicate with the external DHCP server.
Server
IP address of the external DHCP server.
2-98
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Forwarding Mode
Smart: The mode is determined by whether the downstream

packet sent by the first server carries the Option 60 field. If
yes, it is the Standard mode. If not, it is the Security mode.
Standard: After applying for the IP address successfully, the

user releases the space and does not process the following
DHCP packets.
Security: After applying for the IP address successfully, the

user reserves the space and processes the following DHCP
unicast packets.
c. Click OK.
4. Configure the DHCP relay agent parameters.
a. Click the VLAN ID tab, select the layer 3 interface VLAN that connects the NE
and the DHCP client, and then click Modify. The DHCP Relay VLAN Interface
b. Configure the DHCP relay agent parameters. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-64 Parameter Descriptions for the DHCP Relay VLAN Interface
Parameter
Description
Option60 Operation
Enable: Select the DHCP server according to the Option 60
Disable: Use the DHCP server configured under the VLAN
field in the user request packet.

interface.
Agent IP
IP address of the DHCP relay agent, which should be consistent

with the that of the layer 3 interface.
c. Click OK.
5. (Optional) Configure the VLAN interface server.
Note:
When Option60 Operation is Disable, the VLAN interface server needs to be
configured.
a. Click the VLAN Interface Server tab, and then click New. The DHCP Relay VLAN
Interface Server Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the VLAN interface server parameters.
2-99
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 2-65 Parameter Descriptions for the DHCP Relay VLAN Interface Server
Parameter
Description
VLAN ID
Layer 3 interface VLAN that connects the NE and the DHCP

client.
Server IP
IP address of the external DHCP server.
Server Forwarding Mode
Smart: The mode is determined by whether the

downstream packet sent by the first server carries the
Option 82 field. If yes, it is the Standard mode. If not, it
is the Security mode.
Standard: After applying for the IP address successfully,

the user releases the space and does not process the
following DHCP packets.
Security: After applying for the IP address successfully,

the user reserves the space and processes the following
DHCP unicast packets.
c. Click OK.
6. (Optional) To delete a mapping relation between the Option 60 string and the server
IP address, select it on the Option60 tab, and then click Delete.
7. (Optional) To delete a VLAN interface server, select it on the VLAN Interface Server
tab, and then click Delete.
End of Steps
2.8.2.3 Configuring the DHCP Server

This procedure describes how to configure the DHCP server, which dynamically assigns
addresses to the DHCP client through the DHCP.
Prerequisite
l
l

The layer 3 general parameters are configured. For details, refer to 2.8.2.1
Configuring the DHCP Layer 3 General Parameters.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Layer 3 >
DHCP > DHCP Server. The DHCP server parameters are displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 2-51.
2-100
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-51 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCP Server Configuration
2. Configure the global parameters of the DHCP server.

a. Click Advanced.
displayed.
The DHCP Server Global Configuration dialog box is
b. Configure the global parameters of the DHCP server. For a description of the
Table 2-66 DHCP Server Global Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Primary/Secondary DNS
Domain Name Server (DNS) address that the DHCP

server assigns to the DHCP client.
Up to two DNS addresses can be configured.
Lease Time (s)
Lease time of the IP address that the DHCP server

assigns to the DHCP client.
Unit: seconds
Updating ARP
Enable: After the successfully forwarding the IP

address that the DHCP server replies to the DHCP
client, the DHCP relay agent binds the IP address
that the DHCP server assigns to the DHCP user
with the ARP table, and stops ARP learning. This
prevents ARP attacks to the DHCP users.
Disable: The IP address of the DHCP user is not

bound with the ARP table.
c. Click OK.
3. Configure the IP address pool of the DHCP server.
2-101
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. On the IP Pool, click New. The DHCP Server IP Pool Configuration dialog box
is displayed.
b. Configure the IP address pool parameters. For a description of the parameters,
Table 2-67 Parameter Descriptions for the DHCP Server IP Address Pool
Parameter
Description
Starting/Ending IP
Starting and ending IP addresses of the IP address

pool.
Mask
Mask of the IP address pool.
c. Click OK.
4. Configure the DHCP server parameters of the layer 3 interface.
a. Click the VLAN ID tab, select the layer 3 interface VLAN that connects the NE
and the DHCP client, and then click Modify. The DHCP Server VLAN Interface
b. Configure the default address pool name used by the VLAN interface. For a
description of the parameter, refer to Table 2-68.
Table 2-68 Parameter Descriptions for the DHCP Server VLAN Interface
Parameter
Description
IP Pool Name
Default address pool name used by the VLAN interface.
c. Click OK.
5. Configure the VLAN interface gateway of the DHCP server.
a. Click the VLAN Interface Gateway tab, and then click New. The DHCP Server
VLAN Interface Gateway Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the VLAN interface gateway parameters. For a description of the
Table 2-69 Parameter Descriptions for the DHCP Server VLAN Interface
Gateway
Parameter
Description
VLAN ID
Layer 3 interface VLAN that connects the NE and the DHCP

client.
Gateway
DHCP gateway address that the DHCP server assigns to the

DHCP client on the layer 3 interface. It should be consistent
with the IP address of the layer 3 interface.
c. Click OK.
2-102
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
6. (Optional) To delete an IP address pool, select it on the IP Pool tab, and then click
Delete.
7. (Optional) To delete a VLAN interface gateway, select it on the VLAN Interface
Gateway tab, and then click Delete.
End of Steps
2.8.2.4 Viewing the DHCP Online Users

This procedure describes how to view the online user information on the DHCP relay or
server. The DHCP user information includes the user VLAN, MAC address, IP address,
status, and lease time.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The DHCP relay is configured. For details, refer to 2.8.2.2 Configuring the DHCP
Relay.
The DHCP server is configured. For details, refer to 2.8.2.3 Configuring the DHCP
Server.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Layer 3 >
DHCP > DHCP Online Users. The information on the DHCP online users is displayed
Figure 2-52 NE Protocol Manager Window - DHCP Online Users
2. View the information on the DHCP online users.

l On the DHCP Relay tab, view the online user information on the DHCP relay,
including the VLAN, MAC address, IP address, status, and lease time.
2-103
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Click the DHCP Server tab, and then view the online user information on the
DHCP server, including the VLAN, MAC address, IP address, status, and lease
time.
End of Steps
2.9 Configuring OSPF

This procedure describes how to configure the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and
Non-Stop Forwarding (NSF) administrative status, and the NSF time.
Prerequisite
Context
OSPF is a link status route protocol that is designed for a single autonomous system.
Each OSPF router keeps the same database to describe the topology structure of the
autonomous system, and uses this database to create the shortest path tree and calculate
the routing table.
After detecting that the topology changes, OSPF can use little route traffic to calculate the
path quickly. OSPF provides equivalent multiple paths. It provides area paths to provide
extra path protection and reduce the traffic required by the protocol. In addition, all the
OSPF routing information exchange is verified.
NSF ensures normal data forwarding when a fault occurs at the router controlling layer.
This protects the key services on the network.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click OSPF
> OSPF Global. The OSPF global parameters are displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 2-53.
2-104
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-53 NE Protocol Manager Window - OSPF Global Configuration
2. Configure the OSPF global parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 2-70.
Table 2-70 OSPF Global Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
OSPF Administrative Status
Enabled: The OSPF protocol is enabled.
Disabled: The OSPF protocol is disabled.
NSF Time
Maximum time for NSF
End of Steps
2.10 NE Security Configuration

NE security configuration includes the following:
l
l
l
l
l
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
the ARP MFF gateway

anti-DoS management
MAC anti-spoofing
the CLI login users
port IP source guard
2.10.1 Configuring the ARP MFF Gateway

This procedure describes how to configure the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
MAC-Forced Forwarding (MFF) gateway. MFF provides a solution to layer 2 isolation and
layer 3 interworking between the client hosts in the same broadcast domain.
MFF captures ARP request packet from a user, and returns an ARP reply packet containing
the gateway MAC address to the user. In this way, MFF forces the user to send all the
2-105
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
traffic, including the traffic in the same subnet, to the gateway. The gateway can then
monitor the data traffic and prevents malicious attacks between users, which ensures the
network deployment security.
Prerequisite
Context
ARP is a protocol that resolutes an IP address to an Ethernet MAC address, which is also
known as the physical address.
In a Local Area Network (LAN), before a host or other network device sends data to another
host or device, it needs to know the network-layer address (IP address) of the receiving
party. IP data packets need to be encapsulated to frames before being sent through
the physical network, so the sending party should also know the physical address of the
receiving party. The ARP can map an IP address to a physical address.
The ARP is simple and easy to use, but it has no security mechanism and is easy to be
attacked.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click NE
Security > ARP MFF Gateway. The ARP MFF gateway parameters are displayed
Figure 2-54 NE Protocol Manager Window - ARP MFF Gateway Configuration
2. From the MFF list, select Enabled, and then click Set. MFF is enabled globally.
3. Click Create. The Add ARP MFF Gateway dialog box is displayed.
2-106
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
4. Configure the MFF gateway parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 2-71.
Table 2-71 MFF Gateway Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
VLAN
VLAN that the port with MFF enabled belongs to.
Gateway Mode
Manual: applicable for the scenario that a user configures the

IP address statically.
Automatic: applicable for the scenario that a user obtains the

IP address dynamically through the DHCP
In this mode, one VLAN can learn and maintain the information
about up to 20 gateways. The exceeding gateways will not be
learnt or processed. After a gateway IP address is obtained,
it will not be updated, that is, it will never age until MFF is
disabled.
5. Click OK.
End of Steps
2.10.2 Configuring Anti-DoS Management

Denial of Service (DoS) disables the computer or network to provide normal services.
General DoS includes attacks on the computer network bandwidth and connectivity.
This procedure describes how to configure anti-DoS management.
Prerequisite
Steps
Security > Anti-DoS Management. The anti-DoS management parameters are
2-107
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-55 NE Protocol Manager Window - Anti-DoS Management Configuration
2. Configure the anti-DoS management parameters. For a description of the parameters,

Table 2-72 Anti-DoS Management Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Anti-DoS
Enables or disables anti-DoS.
Anti-DoS Blacklist
Enables or disables the anti-DoS blacklist.

If the traffic of the packets sent by a malicious user exceeds the
threshold, the user will be added to the blacklist. A blacklist
alarm will also be sent to the Network Management System
(NMS). The alarm information contains the MAC address, VLAN
ID, and port number.
Threshold
If the traffic of the packets sent by a malicious user exceeds the

threshold, the user will be added to the blacklist.
3. Click Set.
End of Steps
2.10.3 Configuring MAC Anti-Spoofing

MAC spoofing can be used to access a network without permission. MAC drift refers to
unstability of MAC addresses. In a Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) environment, the MAC
address of the same port is learnt on different ports of the switch, and this causes a loop.
This procedure describes how to configure MAC anti-spoofing and anti-drift.
2-108
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
Steps
Security > MAC Anti-Spoofing. The MAC anti-spoofing parameters are displayed
Figure 2-56 NE Protocol Manager Window - MAC Anti-Spoofing Configuration
2. Configure the MAC anti-spoofing and anti-drift parameters. For a description of the
Table 2-73 MAC Anti-Spoofing Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
MAC Anti-Spoofing
Enables or disables MAC anti-spoofing.
MAC Anti-Spoofing Mode
Enables or disables uplink port protection for MAC

anti-spoofing.
Anti-MAC Drift Notification Enable
Enables or disables MAC anti-drift notification.
Uplink Port Protected MAC Address
Protected MAC addresses of uplink ports.
List
3. Click Set.
End of Steps
2-109
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2.10.4 Configuring the CLI Login Users

This procedure describes how to view the information on the users that log in to the
ZXA10 C300 through Command Line Interface (CLI). The user information includes the
user permission priorities and IP addresses.
Prerequisite
l
l

There are users that log in to the ZXA10 C300 through CLI.
Steps
Security > Current CLI Sessions. The parameters of the CLI login user information
are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-57.
Figure 2-57 NE Protocol Manager Window - Current CLI Sessions
2. View the CLI login user information. For a description of the parameters, refer to Table
2-74.
Table 2-74 Parameter Descriptions for CLI Login Users
Parameter
Description
Priority
CLI user permission priority

The ZXA10 C300 has 16 priorities for the CLI user permissions. The
priorities range form 0 to 15. The user with the priority of 15 has the
highest permission. By default, the user permission priority is 1.
Location
IP address used by the CLI user to log in to the ZXA10 C300

2-110
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. (Optional) To force a user to log out of the ZXA10 C300, select the user and click Force
Quit.
End of Steps
2.10.5 Configuring Port IP Source Guard

This procedure describes how to configure port IP source guard, which controls the filtering
of the packets forwarded by the port. This prevents illegal packets to pass through the port,
prevents illegal usage of the network resource (for example, an illegal host uses a legal IP
address to access the network), and enhances port security.
Prerequisite
l
l

The PON service is configured.
Context
When a port that is configured with IP source guard receives a packet, it queries the IP
source guard binding table. If the packet matches the items in the table, the port forwards
the packet. Otherwise, the port discards the packet. When a port is bound with the table,
only this table is controlled, and the other ports are not controlled.
The matching items in the IP source guard binding table include the source IP address,
source MAC address, and VLAN ID. The following combinations of the binding items are
also supported:
l
l
IP, MAC, IPMAC

IPVLAN, MACVLAN, IPMACVLAN
Steps
Security > Port IP Source Guard. The parameters of the port IP source guard are
2-111
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 2-58 NE Protocol Manager Window - Port IP Source Guard Configuration
2. Select a card, PON port, and ONU.

3. Click Global Configuration. The Global Configuration dialog box is displayed.
4. From the IP Source Guard list, select Enabled. Click OK.
5. View and configure the IP source guard information.
a. On the IP Source Guard Configuration tab. View the IP source guard
information, including the IP address, MAC address, and VLAN ID that are bound
with the port.
b. (Optional) Click Add. The Add IP Source Guard Configuration dialog box is
displayed. Configure the IP address, MAC address, and VLAN ID that are bound
with the port. Click OK.
6. Configure IP source guard.
a. Click the IP Source Guard tab. Select a service port, and then click Modify. The
Modify IP Source Guard Enabling dialog box is displayed.
b. From the IP Source Guard list, select Enabled.
c. Click OK.
End of Steps
2-112
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 3
Device Configuration and

Management
Table of Contents
Port Management.......................................................................................................3-1
PON Global Configuration Management...................................................................3-19
ONU Management ...................................................................................................3-79
3.1 Port Management

Port management includes the following:
l
l
l
Configuring the uplink port

Configuring the EPON port
Configuring the GPON port
3.1.1 Configuring the Uplink Port

This procedure describes how to configure the uplink port, including enabling or disabling
the port, viewing the real-time performance, and configuring the port, service, MAC
address, port mirroring, Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) sub-interface, and
Uplink Auto Protection Switching (UAPS) protection.
l
l
l
Enabling or disabling the port.

Viewing the real-time performance.
Configuring the port, service, MAC address, port mirroring, Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP) sub-interface, and Uplink Auto Protection Switching (UAPS)
protection.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE and select Port
Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed.
2. In the navigation tree, double-click the card where the uplink port is located. The uplink
port parameters are displayed in the right pane.
Figure 3-1 shows the uplink ports of ZXA10 C300.
3-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-1 Uplink Ports of ZXA10 C300

3-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 3 Device Configuration and Management
3. In the Port Manager window, perform the following operations.

l
View the detailed information about an uplink port.

Double-click an uplink port to view its basic information and performance.
Enable an uplink port.

i.
Select the uplink port.
ii.
Click Enable.
Disable an uplink port.

i.
Select the uplink port, and then click Disable.
ii.
In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
Configure an Ethernet port.

i.
Select the uplink port that needs to be configured, and then click Configure
Port. The Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Configure the port control, Ethernet port parameters, and bandwidth usage
threshold, and then click Set. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Parameter Descriptions for Ethernet Port Configuration
Parameter
Description
Trap Enabling
Enables or disables alarm reporting.

3-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Flow Control
Enables or disables port flow control.
Speed&Duplex
Data transmission mode of the port.
Received Threshold
Maximum usage of the receiving bandwidth on the uplink

port.
When the receiving bandwidth usage exceeds this
threshold, the system raises an alarm.
Transmitted Threshold
Maximum usage of the sending bandwidth on the uplink

port.
When the sending bandwidth usage exceeds this
threshold, the system raises an alarm.
iii. Click Close.

l
Configure the port VLAN properties.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a port, and then select Configure
Service > Port VLAN. The Port VLAN Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
ii.
Select a port, and then click Modify. The Modify Port VLAN Configuration
iii. Configure the uplink port properties, and then click OK. For a description of
Table 3-2 Port VLAN Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
VLAN Mode
Hybrid: Forwards both untagged packets and tagged

packets.
Port PVID
Trunk: Only forwards tagged packets.
Access: Only forwards untagged packets.
Default port VLAN ID.

When the VLAN mode is set to Access, the port is added to
the VLAN in untagged mode.
Outter TPID
TPID is a field in the VLAN tag. The field value is 0x8100,

which is specified by IEEE 802.1Q.
iv. In the Port VLAN Configuration dialog box, select the port that needs to be
bound with the VLAN, and then click VLAN Binding. The VLAN Binding
v.
Select the VLAN binding type, and enter the VLAN ID. For a description of
3-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

Parameter
Description
VLAN Binding Type
It is recommended to select Tagged VLAN. The upstream

packets will carry the VLAN tag to the uplink device.
vi. Click Bind.

l
Bind the ACL with the uplink port.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a port, and then select Configure
Service > ACL Binding. The ACL Binding Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
ii.
Click New. The Add ACL Binding Configuration dialog box is displayed.
iii. Configure the ACL binding parameters, and then click OK. For a description
of the parameters, refer to Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 ACL Binding Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Port Type
Type of the port that needs to be bound with the ACL.
ACL Index
ID of the ACL that needs to be bound with the port.
Direction
Ingress: Applies the ACL in the ingress direction.
Egress: Applies the ACL in the egress direction.
View the uplink port alarms.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a port, and then select Active Alarms.
The Active Alarms dialog box is displayed.
ii.
View or process the active alarms of the selected uplink port. For a description
of the alarm parameters and operations, refer to Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 Operation Descriptions for the Uplink Port Alarms
Parameter or Icon
Description
Severity
Displays the active alarms by alarm severity.
ACK State
Displays the active alarms by acknowledgement state.
Visibility
Displays the active alarms by visibility.

Exports the active alarm table to the local disk.
You can select to export the visible columns or all the
columns.
Prints the active alarm table.
Stops refreshing or continues refreshing, whether to
refresh the active alarm table in real time.
3-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter or Icon
Description
Customizes the alarm parameters displayed in the Active
Alarms dialog box.
iii. Right-click an alarm and select an option from the shortcut menu to perform
the corresponding operation on the alarm.
iv. Click OK.
l
View the real-time performance of an uplink port.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a port, and then click Realtime Perf. The
Add Realtime Performance Data Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Click Select Indices/Counters. The Select Indices/Counters dialog box is

displayed.
iii. In the navigation tree, select the uplink port objects, and then click OK.
iv. Click Select Locations. The Select Locations dialog box is displayed.
v.
Select the locations of the monitored objects, and then click OK.
vi. In the Add Realtime Performance Data Monitoring dialog box, set Task life
cycle and Collection granularity.
vii. Click OK. The real-time performance data is displayed in the Realtime
Performance Data Monitoring window.
l
Configure uplink port address binding.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select the port that needs to be bound with
a MAC address, and then select Advanced > MAC Binding. The MAC
Binding dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Click New. The Add MAC Binding dialog box is displayed.
iii. In the MAC Address text box, enter the MAC address that needs to be bound.
Click OK.
l
View the MAC address table of an uplink port.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a port, and then select Advanced > MAC
Address Table. The MAC Address Table window is displayed.
ii.
View the MAC addresses in the window. The MAC addresses learnt by this
port are displayed automatically. For a description of the MAC address table
Table 3-6 Parameter Descriptions for MAC Address Table
Parameter
Description
VLAN
VLAN ID of the port.
MAC Address
Specified MAC address.
Add
Adds the VLAN ID and MAC address of the specified port.

3-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Export
Exports the VLAN ID and MAC address of the specified port.
iii. Configuring port mirroring.
Note:
The ZXA10 C300 supports the duplication of the sent or received data frames
between two uplink ports. The port from which the data frames are duplicated
is called the source mirroring port, and the other port is called the destination
mirroring port.
i.
In the Port Manager window, select Advanced > Port Mirroring. The
Port Mirroring Management window is displayed.
ii.
Click New. The Add Mirroring Port dialog box is displayed.
next to Destination Mirroring Port.

iii. Click
Destination Mirroring Port dialog box is displayed.
The Specify
iv. Set the destination mirroring port, and then click OK.
v.
Click
next to Source Mirroring Port 1. The Specify Source
Mirroring Port dialog box is displayed.
vi. Set the source mirroring port parameters, and then click OK. For a
Table 3-7 Parameter Descriptions for the Source Mirroring Port
Parameter
Description
Port
Source mirroring port number.
Mirrored Traffic
Direction
Both: Copies the data sent or received by the source

mirroring port to the destination mirroring port.
Egress: Copies the data sent by the source mirroring

port to the destination mirroring port.
Ingress: Copies the data received by the source mirroring port to the destination mirroring port.
vii. Configure the parameters of other source mirroring ports in the same way.
l
Describe uplink ports.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select Advanced > Port Description. The
Port Description dialog box is displayed.
3-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
l
Set the range of the uplink ports that need to be described. In the Port
Description text box, enter the description. Click Set.
Configure the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) aggregated ports.
Note:
Link aggregation refers to that multiple physical ports are bound to form a logical
port, which implements load share of ingress and egress traffic in the member
ports.
i.
In the Port Manager window, select Advanced > LACP Aggregated. The
LACP Aggregated Configuration dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Click New.
displayed.
Another LACP Aggregated Configuration dialog box is
iii. Configure the aggregated port parameters.

Table 3-8 Parameter Descriptions for the LACP Aggregated Port

Parameter
Description
Port
Port number of a member port.
SmartGroup ID
LACP group ID.
SubGroup ID
LACP subgroup ID.
Port Mode
On: The link aggregation mode is static trunk. The LACP

does not run, and the member ports are directly added to
the trunk group to form a logical port.
In static trunk mode, the aggregated ports of both ends
need to be set to On.
Active: The link aggregation mode is LACP. The member

In this mode, the port sends the LACP packets to the
peer port actively for LACP calculation.
Passive: The link aggregation mode is LACP. The member ports are aggregated to the trunk group through
the LACP to form a logical port. The LACP implements
aggregation automatically to obtain the maximum bandwidth.
3-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
In this mode, the port does not send the LACP packets
to the peer port actively. After the port receives an LACP
packet from the peer port, it starts the LACP calculation.
iv. (Optional) Select the created LACP aggregation port, and then click Modify.
The LACP Aggregated Configuration dialog box is displayed.
When the port mode is Active or Passive, modify the LACP aggregated port
parameters, and then click OK. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Parameter Descriptions for the LACP Aggregated Port
Parameter
Description
Priority
LACP port priority

The port with a higher port priority and port ID is added to
the aggregation group first.
Default: 32768
Port Timeout
Long Time: The NE sends an LACP packet every 30

seconds.
Short Time: The NE sends an LACP packet every one

seconds.
Configure uplink port UAPS.
Note:
The ZXA10 C300 supports UAPS of the Ethernet port. The system periodically
checks the working status of the uplink port. When the system detects that the
working port is disconnected or the link quality is deteriorated to an unavailable
degree, it switches the services to the standby port automatically without
interrupting the services.
i.
In the Port Manager window, select Advanced > Port UAPS Protection.
The UAPS Configuration dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Click New. The Add UAPS Configuration dialog box is displayed.
iii. Set the UAPS group ID, and then click OK.
3-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
iv. Select the UAPS group, and then click Port Configuration. The UAPS Port
v.
Select the primary port and standby port, and then click OK.
vi. (Optional) Select an UAPS group, and then click Modify. The Modify Port
Modify the UAPS parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 3-10.
Table 3-10 UAPS Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Switch Type
Common: Swaps based on the physical ports.
Trunk: Swaps based on the trunk group.
Secondary Port Lighting
Whether to enable lighting for the secondary device in
Shutdown
standby state.
Automatic Recovery
Whether to enable automatic service switching from
Enabling
the standby port back to the active port when the active
port is recovered from a fault.
Protection Time
If the UAPS group implements a switching operation, it

will not implement it again during the protection time.
Configure the optical module alarm for an uplink port.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select Advanced > Optical Module

Management. The Optical Module Configuration window is displayed.
ii.
(Optional) Click Alarm Profiles. The Optical Module Alarm Profiles window
is displayed. Modify the profile parameters or create a profile.
iii. (Optional) Select an uplink port, and then click Modify. The Modify Optical
Module Configuration dialog box is displayed. Select a profile, and then
click OK.
l
Configure the Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) port for an uplink port.
i.
In the Port Manager window, select Advanced > Port EFM Configuration.
The Port EFM Configuration window is displayed.
ii.
Configure the EFM parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to

Table 3-11.
Table 3-11 EFM Configuration Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
EFM Enable
Enables or disables EFM OAM.
Enables or disables the administrative status for the port.
3-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Passive Mode
The EFM OAM working mode includes Active Mode and

Passive Mode.
The EFM OAM connection can be initiated only by the port
that is enabled with EFM OAM in active mode. The port
that is enabled with EFM OAM in passive mode can only
wait for the connection request from the peer port that is
enabled with EFM OAM. The EFM OAM connection cannot
be established between two ports that are enabled with EFM
OAM in passive mode.
Operational Status
EFM OAM connection status.
Loopback Status
Remote loopback operational status.
iii. Select an uplink port, and then click Modify.

The Modify Port EFM
iv. From Administrative Status list, select Enable. Click OK.

v.
Click Start Loopback to start the remote loopback test.
vi. Click Link Test to start the link performance and fault test.
l
Configure Ethernet packet rate limitation.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select Advanced > Ethernet Rate Limitation
Configuration. The Ethernet Rate Limitation Configuration window is
displayed.
ii.
Select a port, and then click Modify.

The Ethernet Rate Limitation
iii. Modify the broadcast packet rate limitation and flooding packet rate limitation.
iv. Click OK.
End of Steps
3.1.2 Configuring the EPON Port

This procedure describes how to configure the Ethernet Passive Optical Network (EPON)
port, including the following:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l

Configuring the port.
Viewing the active alarms.
Viewing the real-time performance.
Configuring loopback management.
Binding the IP address pool.
Configuring the Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBA) priority.

3-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
2. In the navigation tree, double-click an EPON card. The EPON port parameters are
Figure 3-4 Port Manager Window - EPON Port Configuration

l View the detailed information about an EPON port.
i.
Select the EPON port.
ii.
Click Details to view its basic information, performance, and optical module
information.
Enable an EPON port.

i.
Select the EPON port.
ii.
Click Enable.
Disable an EPON port.

i.
Select the EPON port, and then click Disable.
ii.
Configure an EPON port.

i.
Select the EPON port that needs to be configured, and then click Configure
3-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
Configure the PON port rate, Header Error Check (HEC) mode, and other
parameters, and then click Set. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 3-12.
Table 3-12 Parameter Descriptions for EPON Port Configuration
Parameter
Description
Trap Report Enabling
Enabled: Reports the EPON port alarms.
Disabled: Does not report the EPON port alarms.
802.3 Draft
902.3 Standard
Both
No
HEC Mode
Max RTT
Maximum Round Trip Time (RTT).
View the EPON port alarms.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select an EPON port, and then select Active
Alarms. The Active Alarms dialog box is displayed.
ii.
View or process the active alarms of the selected EPON port. For a
description of the alarm parameters and operations, refer to Table 3-13.
Table 3-13 Operation Descriptions for the EPON Port Alarms
Parameter or Icon
Description
Severity
ACK State
Visibility

columns.
Stops refreshing or continues refreshing, whether to
refresh the active alarm table in real time.
Customizes the alarm parameters displayed in the
Active Alarms dialog box.
iv. Click OK.
l
View the real-time performance of an EPON port.

3-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
i.
In the Port Manager window, select an EPON port, and then click Realtime
Perf. The Add Realtime Performance Data Monitoring dialog box is
displayed.
ii.

displayed.
iii. In the navigation tree, select the EPON port objects, and then click OK.
v.
l
Configure EPON loopback management.
Note:
EPON loopback management is used to check the PON link performance, which
facilitates service provisioning and fault location.
i.
In the Port Manager window, select an EPON port, and then select
Advanced > Loopback Management. The Loopback Management dialog
box is displayed.
ii.
Set the loopback status, and then click Set.
Set the IP address pool for an EPON port.

i.
Advanced > Bind IP Pool. The Bind IP Pool dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Select the IP address pool that will be bound with the EPON port, and then
click Set.
For how to configure the IP address pool, refer to 3.2.2 Configuring the OLT
IP Address Pool.
Configure the DBA priority for an EPON port.

i.
Advanced > DBA Priority Configuration. The DBA Priority Configuration
ii.
On the Priority Queue Map tab, set the frame priorities and queue mapping.
3-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
iii. Click the DBA Priority tab. Set the polling rates of the DBA queues, and then
click Set.
End of Steps
3.1.3 Configuring the GPON Port

This procedure describes how to configure the Gigabit Passive Optical Network (GPON)
port, including the following:
l
l
l
l
l

Configuring the port.
Viewing the active alarms, distance measurement parameters, and ONU discovery
period.
Binding the IP address.
Viewing the port bandwidth information.
Steps
2. In the navigation tree, double-click a GPON card. The GPON port parameters are
Figure 3-5 Port Manager Window - GPON Port Configuration

l View the detailed information about a GPON port.
3-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
i.
Select the GPON port.
ii.
Click Details to view its basic information, performance, and optical module
information.
Enable a GPON port.

i.
Select the GPON port.
ii.
Click Enable.
Disable a GPON port.

i.
Select the GPON port, and then click Disable.
ii.
Configure a GPON port.

i.
Select the GPON port that needs to be configured, and then click Configure
ii.
Configure the GPON port parameters, and then click Set. For a description
Table 3-14 Parameter Descriptions for GPON Port Configuration
Parameter
Description
Trap Report Enabling
Enabled: Reports the GPON port alarms.
Disabled: Does not report the GPON port alarms.
Unlocked: Can manage the GPON port.
Locked: Cannot manage the GPON port.
Learning: After the ONU is connected and powered
Lock Status
ONU SN Authentication
Mode
on, it is in authenticated state and needs ONU type

configuration.
Provisioning: After the ONU is powered on, it is in

authenticated state.
ONU SN Mask
ONU SN authentication mask.
ONU Initial State at
Registering
Inactive: The OLT is not permitted to deliver configuration data to ONUs.
OMCI Ready: The OLT is permitted to deliver configuration data to ONUs.
3-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
FEC Mode
None: Forward Error Correction (FEC) mode is not

applicable.
Downstream: Uses FEC mode in the downstream

direction.
FEC mode provides the following functions:
t
Corrects the error codes in the transmission

and reduces the error code rate.
Increases the optical power budget, and thus

increases the distance between the OLT and
ONU.
Increases the splitting ratio of the PON.
Enhances the digit channel reliability.
Aging Time of ONU
The GPON OLT port can detect whether the registration
Auto-discovery
mode of the connected ONU is automatic learning

mode. If it is automatic learning mode, after an
ONU that has never been registered on the OLT
will be registered automatically. If the ONU is not
acknowledged, it will be deleted by the OLT after the
aging time.
Aging Time of
If a GPON ONU fails to pass the authentication after
Unauthenticated ONU
getting online, it will exist in the unauthenticated ONU

list under the PON port. The PON port deletes the ONU
from the unauthenticated ONU list after the aging time.
View the GPON port alarms.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a GPON port, and then select Active
Alarms. The Active Alarms dialog box is displayed.
ii.
View or process the active alarms of the selected GPON port. For a
description of the alarm parameters and operations, refer to Table 3-15.
Table 3-15 Operation Descriptions for the GPON Port Alarms
Parameter or Icon
Description
Severity
ACK State
Visibility

columns.
3-17
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter or Icon
Description
Stops refreshing or continues refreshing, whether to refresh
the active alarm table in real time.
Customizes the alarm parameters displayed in the Active
Alarms dialog box.
iv. Click OK.
l
View the real-time performance of a GPON port.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a GPON port, and then click Realtime
Perf. The Add Realtime Performance Data Monitoring dialog box is
displayed.
ii.

displayed.
iii. In the navigation tree, select the GPON port objects, and then click OK.
v.
l
Configure the distance measurement parameters.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a GPON port, and then click Advanced
> Ranging Parameters. The Ranging Parameters dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Set the base value and step length.
iii. Click Set.

l
Configure the ONU discovery period.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a GPON port, and then click Advanced
> ONU Discovery Period. The ONU Discovery Period dialog box is
displayed.
ii.
Configure the ONU discovery period parameters. Table 3-16 describes the
ONU discovery period parameters.
3-18
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-16 Parameter Descriptions for ONU Discovery Period

Parameter or Icon
Description
ONU Discovery Period
Specify the time to discover the ONU that is online for the
first time.
ONU Rediscovery
Specify the time to discovery the ONU that is online again
Period
after it is offline.
iii. After the configuration, click Set.

l
Set the IP address pool for a GPON port.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a GPON port, and then select Advanced
> Bind IP Pool. The Bind IP Pool dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Select the IP address pool that will be bound with the GPON port, and then
click Set.
For how to configure the IP address pool, refer to 3.2.2 Configuring the OLT
IP Address Pool.
View the configured bandwidth information on a GPON port.

In the Port Manager window, select a GPON port, and then select Advanced
> Port Configured Bandwidth Information. The Port Configured Bandwidth
Information dialog box is displayed.
End of Steps
3.2 PON Global Configuration Management

3.2.1 Profile Configuration
In the Profile Configuration window, you can add, modify or delete GPON/EPON profiles,
which are used for the various service configuration.
Figure 3-6 shows the Profile Configuration window.
3-19
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-6 Profile Configuration Window
3.2.1.1 Configuring ONU Type Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an ONU type profile. When creating a new
ONU, the profile can be used to define the ONU type.
Context
l
l
The ONU Type Profile must be correctly configured for slot and port configuration by
the OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) or OMCI.
If the slot and type of board changed, a new ONU type profile needs to be created
even if the ONU is of the same type.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE, and select
Profile Configuration. The Profile Configuration window is displayed.
2. In the left pane, double-click ONU Type > ONU Type Profile. The ONU type profile
information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 3-7.
3-20
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-7 Profile Configuration WindowONU Type Profile
3. Click Add. The Add Profile dialog box is displayed.

4. Configure the parameters.
For a description of the parameters, refer to Table 3-17.
Table 3-17 Parameters for ONU Type Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
ONU profile name, such as ZTE-9806H,

ZTE-F820.
Profile Description
Describes the ONU port number and port type.
PON Type
EPON/10G EPON or GPON.
UNI Type
ONU UNI type.
Slot
Physical slot for the ONU port.
Port
ONU physical port number.
Protection Type
ONU port protection type.
Speed
Speed at the PON port.
Auto-configuration Enabling Status
If the status is Disabled, the configuration

data will not be automatically updated by
OLT when the ONU is online.
If the status is Enabled, the configuration

data will be automatically updated by OLT
when the ONU is online.
The automatic configuration can just be

applied to an EPON ONU. If an ONU is created
by a type profile, the auto-configuration
3-21
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
enabling status of this ONU is the same as
that of the type profile.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an ONU type profile, refer to Table 3-18.
Table 3-18 Managing an ONU Type Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created ONU type profile
Select an ONU type profile. Click Add by

Copy. The Add Profile by Copy dialog box
is displayed. Configure the parameters. Click
OK.
Modify the ONU type profile
Select an ONU type profile. Click Modify.
Delete the ONU type profile
Select an ONU type profile. Click Delete.
Apply the ONU type profile to other NEs
Select an ONU type profile. Click Apply to

Other NEs. The Batch Operation window is
displayed. Select the NEs that need to apply
the profile. Click Start.
End of Steps
3.2.1.2 Configuring ONU Type Offline Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an ONU type offline profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click ONU Type > ONU Type Offline Profile. The ONU type
offline profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 3-8.
3-22
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-8 Profile Configuration WindowONU Type Offline Profile

Table 3-19 Parameters for ONU Type Offline Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
ONU profile name, such as ZTE-9806H,

ZTE-F820.
Profile Description
Describes the ONU port number and port type.
PON Type
EPON/10G EPON or GPON.
UNI Type
ONU UNI type.
Slot
Physical slot for the ONU port.
Port
ONU physical port number.
Protection Type
ONU port protection type.
Speed
Speed at the PON port.
3-23
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Auto-configuration Enabling Status
If the status is Disabled, the configuration

data will not be automatically updated by
OLT when the ONU is online.
If the status is Enabled, the configuration

data will be automatically updated by OLT
when the ONU is online.
The automatic configuration can just be

applied to an EPON ONU. If an ONU is created
by a type profile, the auto-configuration
enabling status of this ONU is the same as
that of the type profile.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an ONU type offline profile, refer to Table 3-20.
Table 3-20 Managing an ONU Type Offline Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created ONU type offline profile
Select an ONU type offline profile. Click Add

by Copy. The Add Profile by Copy dialog
box is displayed. Configure the parameters.
Click OK.
Modify the ONU type offline profile
Select an ONU type offline profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the ONU type offline profile
Select an ONU type offline profile. Click

Delete.
Apply the ONU type offline profile to other NEs
Select an ONU type offline profile. Click Apply

to NEs. The Batch Operation window is
End of Steps
3.2.1.3 Configuring a GPON VoIP IP Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP IP profile. You can configure the
VoIP IPs of GPON ONUs in batch.
Steps
3-24
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > IP Profile. The GPON VoIP IP profile
Figure 3-9 Profile Configuration WindowGPON VoIP IP Profile

5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP IP profile, refer to Table 3-21.
Table 3-21 Managing a GPON VoIP IP Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP IP profile
Select a GPON VoIP IP profile. Click Add by

OK.
Modify the GPON VoIP IP profile
Select a GPON VoIP IP profile. Click Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP IP profile
Select a GPON VoIP IP profile. Click Delete.
Apply the GPON VoIP IP profile to other NEs
Select a GPON VoIP IP profile. Click Apply to

End of Steps
3.2.1.4 Configuring a GPON VoIP VLAN Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP VLAN profile.
3-25
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > VLAN Profile. The GPON VoIP VLAN
profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10 Profile Configuration WindowGPON VoIP VLAN Profile

Table 3-22 Parameters for a GPON VoIP VLAN Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON VoIP VLAN profile name.
VLAN Tagging Mode
Defines two mode:

l
Tag: Adds a tag layer to the untagged

uplink packet. The specified CVLAN and
CVLAN priority are used.
The single-tagged and double-tagged
uplink packets are not filtered. For the
downlink packets, the tag is removed.
Double-layer VLAN: Adds two tag layers

to the untagged packets. The CVLAN is
used as the tag for the inner layer, and the
SVLAN is used as the tag for the outer
3-26
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
layer. For the downlink packets, the tag
is removed.
CVLAN
Inner VLAN for a double-tag VLAN.
CVLAN Priority
Priority of an inner VLAN.
SVLAN
Outer VLAN for a double-tag VLAN.
Apply to NEs
Applies the GPON VoIP VLAN to NEs.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP VLAN profile, refer to Table 3-23.
Table 3-23 Managing a GPON VoIP VLAN Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP VLAN profile
Select a GPON VoIP VLAN profile. Click Add

Click OK.
Modify the GPON VoIP VLAN profile
Select a GPON VoIP VLAN profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP VLAN profile

Delete.
Apply the GPON VoIP VLAN profile to other

NEs

Apply to Other NEs. The Batch Operation
window is displayed. Select the NEs that need
to apply the profile. Click Start.
End of Steps
3.2.1.5 Configuring a GPON VoIP MGC Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP MGC profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > MGC Profile. The GPON VoIP MGC
3-27
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-11 Profile Configuration WindowGPON VoIP MGC Profile

Table 3-24 Parameters for a GPON VoIP MGC Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON VoIP MGC profile name.
Primary Server
IP address or name of the primary MGC

server.
Validation Scheme (Primary Server)
Secondary Server
Include three options:

l
Disabled
MD5
Basic
IP address or name of the secondary MGC

server.
Validation Scheme (Secondary Server)

l
Disabled
MD5
Basic
Assigned Policy (User TID)
Default option is Automatically.
Assigned Policy (RTP TID)
Default option is Automatically.
3-28
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Message Format

l
Long Text
Short Text
Binary
Default option is Long Text.

Protocol Version
Megaco protocol version.

0 indicated the version is not confirmed.
UDP Port
UDP port that communicates with the MGC.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP MGC profile, refer to Table 3-25.
Table 3-25 Managing a GPON VoIP MGC Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP MGC profile
Select a GPON VoIP MGC profile. Click Add

Click OK.
Modify the GPON VoIP MGC profile
Select a GPON VoIP MGC profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP MGC profile
Select a GPON VoIP MGC profile. Click

Delete.
Apply the GPON VoIP MGC profile to other NEs
Select a GPON VoIP MGC profile. Click Apply

to Other NEs. The Batch Operation window
is displayed. Select the NEs that need to apply
End of Steps
3.2.1.6 Configuring a GPON VoIP SIP Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP SIP profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > SIP Profile. The GPON VoIP SIP profile
3-29
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-12 Profile Configuration WindowGPON VoIP SIP Profile

Table 3-26 Parameters for a GPON VoIP SIP Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON VoIP SIP profile name.
Host Part URI
SIP address of the host or the domain.
Proxy Server Address
IP address or URI (Uniform Resource

Identifiers) of the SIP proxy server.
Out-of-band Server Address
IP address or URI of the out-of-band SIP

server.
Expiration Time (s)
Expiration time period of the SIP registration.

If the value is 0, there is no expiration time
period.
Default value is 3600 seconds.
Re-registration Start Time (s)
Time-out period before the re-registration

begins
Default value is 360 seconds.
Server
IP address or server name of the SIP

registration server.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP SIP profile, refer to Table 3-27.
3-30
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-27 Managing a GPON VoIP SIP Profile

Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP SIP profile
Select a GPON VoIP SIP profile. Click Add

Click OK.
Modify the GPON VoIP SIP profile
Select a GPON VoIP SIP profile. Click Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP SIP profile
Select a GPON VoIP SIP profile. Click Delete.
Apply the GPON VoIP SIP profile to other NEs
Select a GPON VoIP SIP profile. Click Apply

End of Steps
3.2.1.7 Configuring a GPON VoIP Network Dial Plan Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP network dial plan profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > Network Dial Plan Profile. The GPON
VoIP network dial plan profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure
3-13.
3-31
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-13 Profile Configuration WindowGPON VoIP Network Dial Plan Profile

Table 3-28 Parameters for a GPON VoIP Network Dial Plan Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON VoIP SIP profile name.
Critical Dial Timeout (ms)
The default value is 4000 ms.
Partial Dial Timeout (ms)
Format
Dial plan format supported by the ONU

providing the VoIP service.
Table ID
Dial plan ID.
Token
Dial Plan.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP network dial plan profile, refer to Table 3-29.
Table 3-29 Managing a GPON VoIP Network Dial Plan Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP network dial plan
Select a GPON VoIP network dial plan profile.
profile
Click Add by Copy. The Add Profile by

Copy dialog box is displayed. Configure the
parameters. Click OK.
3-32
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Modify the GPON VoIP network dial plan profile

Click Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP network dial plan profile

Click Delete.
Apply the GPON VoIP network dial plan profile
to other NEs
Click Apply to Other NEs. The Batch

Operation window is displayed. Select the
NEs that need to apply the profile. Click Start.
End of Steps
3.2.1.8 Configuring a GPON VoIP Media Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP media profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > Media Profile. The GPON VoIP media
Figure 3-14 Profile Configuration Window GPON VoIP Media Profile

3-33
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-30 Parameters for a GPON VoIP Media Profile

Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON VoIP media profile name
Fax Mode
OOB DTMF
Enabled: DTMF signals can be

transmitted out-of-band.
Disabled: DTMF is transmitted through

PCM stream.
Fist Codec Selection Fourth Codex Selection
Decoding mode.
First Packet Period Fourth Packet Period
Interval of packet cycle selections.

First Silence Selection Fourth Silence
Selection
Announcement Type
Jitter Target
Jitter target value.

0 indicates the dynamic jitter buffer.
Jitter Maximum Buffer
Equipment-related jitter maximum buffer
Echo Cancellation
PSTN Variant
Determines the POTS signal variant used for

the related UNI.
The value is the country code defined in the
ITU-T E.164.
Base RTP Port
Minimum RTP port number used for voice

data stream.
The default value is 50000.
Top End RTP Port
Maximum RTP port number used for voice

data stream.
The value must be larger than the minimum
RTP port number.
DSCP Mark (HEX)
The default value is 2E.
Piggyback Events
Configures whether to enable RTP piggyback

Events processing.
Tone Events
Configures whether to enable RTP tone events

processing.
DTMF Events
Configures whether to enable RTP DTMF

events processing.
If the OOB DTMF is disabled, this function is
also disabled.
3-34
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
CAS Events
Configures whether to enable RTP CAS

events processing.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP media profile, refer to Table 3-31.
Table 3-31 Managing a GPON VoIP Media Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP media profile.
Select a GPON VoIP media profile. Click Add

Click OK.
Modify the GPON VoIP media profile.
Select a GPON VoIP media profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP media profile.

Delete.
Apply the GPON VoIP media profile to other
NEs.

End of Steps
3.2.1.9 Configuring a GPON VoIP Feature Access Code Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP feature access code profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > Feature Access Code Profile. The
information of GPON VoIP feature access code profiles is displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 3-15.
3-35
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-15 Profile Configuration Window GPON VoIP Feature Access Code
Profile

5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP feature access code profile, refer to Table 3-32.
Table 3-32 Managing a GPON VoIP Feature Access Code Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP feature access
Select a GPON VoIP feature access code
code profile
profile. Click Add by Copy. The Add Profile

by Copy dialog box is displayed. Configure
the parameters. Click OK.
Modify the GPON VoIP feature access code
profile
profile. Click Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP feature access code
profile
profile. Click Delete.
Apply the GPON VoIP feature access code
profile to other NEs
profile. Click Apply to Other NEs. The Batch

End of Steps
3.2.1.10 Configuring a GPON VoIP Application Service Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON VoIP application service profile.
3-36
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > VoIP > Application Service Profile. The GPON
VoIP application service profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure
3-16.
Figure 3-16 Profile Configuration Window GPON VoIP Application Service Profile

5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON VoIP application service profile, refer to Table 3-33.
Table 3-33 Managing a GPON VoIP Application Service Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON VoIP application
Select a GPON VoIP application service
service profile.

Modify the GPON VoIP application service
Select a GPON VoIP application service profile.
profile.
Click Modify.
Delete the GPON VoIP application service
Select a GPON VoIP application service profile.
profile.
Click Delete.
3-37
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Apply the GPON VoIP application service
Select a GPON VoIP application service
profile to other NEs.
profile. Click Apply to Other NEs. The Batch

End of Steps
3.2.1.11 Configuring a GPON ONU Bandwidth Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON ONU bandwidth profile. The profile
defines the T-CONT bandwidth parameters.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > Bandwidth > ONU Bandwidth Profile. The
GPON ONU bandwidth profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure
3-17.
Figure 3-17 Profile Configuration Window GPON ONU Bandwidth Profile

3-38
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-34 Parameters for a GPON ONU Bandwidth Profile

Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON ONU bandwidth profile name.
Bandwidth Type
Supports the following five bandwidth types:

l
Fixed: for VoIP service.
Assured: for IPTV service.
Assured and Non-assured: assured

bandwidth and maximum bandwidth.
Best-effort: maximum bandwidth for

broadband service.
All: configures the fixed, assured and

maximum bandwidth.
Fixed(kbps)
Uplink bandwidth for T-CONT. The bandwidth

is fixed no matter the T-CONT has uplink
stream or not.
Assured(kbps)
Assured bandwidth allocated to T-CONT when

it needs bandwidth. If the bandwidth needed
by T-CONT is smaller than the allocated
bandwidth, the vacant bandwidth can be used
by other T-CONT.
Maximum(kbps)
Maximum uplink bandwidth that can be

allocated by T-CONT.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON ONU bandwidth profile, refer to Table 3-35.
Table 3-35 Managing a GPON ONU Bandwidth Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON ONU bandwidth
Select a GPON ONU bandwidth profile.
profile.

Modify the GPON ONU bandwidth profile.
Select a GPON ONU bandwidth profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the GPON ONU bandwidth profile.

Delete.
3-39
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Apply the GPON ONU bandwidth profile to
other NEs.

End of Steps
3.2.1.12 Configuring a GPON ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON ONU bandwidth offline profile. The
profile defines the T-CONT bandwidth parameters.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > Bandwidth > ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile.
The GPON ONU bandwidth offline profile information is displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 3-18.
Figure 3-18 Profile Configuration Window GPON ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile

3-40
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-36 Parameters for a GPON ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile

Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON ONU bandwidth offline profile name.
Bandwidth Type
Supports the following five bandwidth types:

l
Fixed: for VoIP service.
Assured: for IPTV service.
Assured and Non-assured: assured

bandwidth and maximum bandwidth.
Best-effort: maximum bandwidth for

broadband service.
All: configures the fixed, assured and

maximum bandwidth.
Fixed(kbps)
Uplink bandwidth for T-CONT. The bandwidth

is fixed no matter the T-CONT has uplink
stream or not.
Assured(kbps)
Assured bandwidth allocated to T-CONT when

it needs bandwidth. If the bandwidth needed
by T-CONT is smaller than the allocated
bandwidth, the vacant bandwidth can be used
by other T-CONT.
Maximum(kbps)
Maximum uplink bandwidth that can be

allocated by T-CONT.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON ONU bandwidth offline profile, refer to Table 3-37.
Table 3-37 Managing a GPON ONU Bandwidth Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON ONU bandwidth offline
Select a GPON ONU bandwidth offline profile.
profile.

Modify the GPON ONU bandwidth offline
profile.
Click Modify.
Delete the GPON ONU bandwidth offline
profile.
Click Delete.
3-41
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Apply the GPON ONU bandwidth offline profile
to other NEs.
Click Apply to Other NEs. The Batch

End of Steps
3.2.1.13 Configuring GPON Traffic Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON traffic profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > Bandwidth > Traffic Profile. The GPON traffic
Figure 3-19 Profile Configuration Window GPON Traffic Profile

5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON traffic profile, refer to Table 3-38.
3-42
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-38 Managing a GPON Traffic Profile

Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON traffic profile.
Select a GPON traffic profile. Click Add by

OK.
Modify the GPON traffic profile.
Select a GPON traffic profile. Click Modify.
Delete the GPON traffic profile.
Select a GPON traffic profile. Click Delete.
Apply the GPON traffic profile to other NEs.
Select a GPON traffic profile. Click Apply to

End of Steps
3.2.1.14 Configuring a GPON Remote Traffic Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON remote traffic profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > Bandwidth > Remote Traffic Profile. The
GPON remote traffic profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 3-20.
Figure 3-20 Profile Configuration Window GPON Remote Traffic Profile
3-43
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

Table 3-39 Parameters for a GPON Remote Traffic Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
GPON remote traffic profile name.
CIR
Assured rate
Default value: 0
PIR
Maximum rate
Default value: 0.
CBS
Assured burst change rate

Default value: 0.
PBS
Maximum burst change rate

Default value: 0
Colour Mode
Includes the following options:

l
Colour-blind: takes into account the

marks on the ingress data packets.
Colour-aware: neglects the marks on the

ingress data packets.
In the Colour-aware mode, the data packets

are degraded.
Default value: Colour-blind
Ingress Colour Marking
Effective under the colour-aware mode.

Abandon priority for the Ingress data packets.
Default value: No marking
Egress Colour Marking
Abandon priority for the egress data packets.

Default value: No marking
Meter Type
Algorithm for colouring the data packets.

Default value: Not Specified
5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON remote traffic profile, refer to Table 3-40.
Table 3-40 Managing a GPON Remote Traffic Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON remote traffic profile.
Select a GPON remote traffic profile. Click

Add by Copy. The Add Profile by Copy
dialog box is displayed. Configure the
3-44
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Modify the GPON remote traffic profile.

Modify.
Delete the GPON remote traffic profile.

Delete.
Apply the GPON remote traffic profile to other

NEs.

End of Steps
3.2.1.15 Configuring a GPON Traffic Scheduler Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON traffic scheduler profile.
Context
When the network is in congestion, multiple packets will try to obtain the network resource.
Queue scheduling is used to solve the problem.
l
l
SP (Strict Priority): Queue with higher priority can transmit data packets earlier.
WRR (Weighted Round Robin): defines a value reflecting the relative importance of
the current queue to other queues.
Through the scheduling, queues with lower priority also have chances to be
transmitted, thus the network resource allocation is improved.
SP+WRR: ensures the queues with higher priorities to be scheduled earlier, and
avoids the queues with lower priorities to be neglected.
After all the data packets of the queues with higher priorities are scheduled, others
queues start to be scheduled.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > Bandwidth > Traffic Scheduler Profile. The
GPON traffic scheduler profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure
3-21.
3-45
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-21 Profile Configuration Window GPON Traffic Scheduler Profile

5. Click OK.
For how to manage a GPON traffic scheduler profile, refer to Table 3-41.
Table 3-41 Managing a GPON Traffic Scheduler Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created GPON traffic scheduler
Select a GPON traffic scheduler profile.
profile.

Modify the GPON traffic scheduler profile.
Select a GPON traffic scheduler profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the GPON traffic scheduler profile.

Delete.
Apply the GPON traffic scheduler profile to
other NEs.

End of Steps
3.2.1.16 Configuring a DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile

This procedure describes how to configure a DSCP to CoS mapping profile.
3-46
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
This profile can be applied at the following ports: Ethernet port, GPON ONU virtual port,
and xDSL PVC port.
Context
CoS (Class of Service) is the priority mark for the layer two ISL or a 802.1Q data frame. It
ranges from 0 to 7. DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) is the service type mark of
a layer three data packet. It ranges from 0 to 63.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click GPON > DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile. The information
of DSCP to CoS Mapping Profiles is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22 Profile Configuration Window DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile

5. Click OK.
For how to manage a DSCP to CoS mapping profile, refer to Table 3-42.
Table 3-42 Managing a DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created DSCP to CoS mapping
Select a DSCP to CoS mapping profile.
profile.

3-47
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Modify the DSCP to CoS mapping profile.
Select a DSCP to CoS mapping profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the DSCP to CoS mapping profile.

Delete.
Apply the DSCP to CoS mapping profile to

other NEs.

End of Steps
3.2.1.17 Configuring an EPON ONU Card Offline Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON ONU card offline profile.
Steps
2. On the left pane, double-click EPON > ONU Card Offline Profile. The information of
EPON ONU card offline profiles is displayed on the right pane, see Figure 3-23.
Figure 3-23 Profile Configuration Window EPON ONU Card Offline Profile

5. Click OK.
3-48
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
For how to manage an EPON ONU card offline profile, refer to Table 3-43.
Table 3-43 Managing an EPON ONU Card Offline Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON ONU card offline
Select an EPON ONU card offline profile.
profile.

Modify the EPON ONU card offline profile.
Select an EPON ONU card offline profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the EPON ONU card offline profile.
Select an EPON ONU card offline profile. Click

Delete.
End of Steps
3.2.1.18 Configuring an EPON ONU Bandwidth Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON ONU bandwidth profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > Bandwidth > ONU Bandwidth Profile. The
EPON ONU bandwidth profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure
3-24.
Figure 3-24 Profile Configuration Window EPON ONU Bandwidth Profile
3-49
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

Table 3-44 Parameters for an EPON ONU Bandwidth Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON ONU profile name
Upstream Fixed Bandwidth
Fixed upstream bandwidth allocated to the

ONU. The recommended value is 0.
Upstream Assured Bandwidth
Assured upstream bandwidth allocated to the

ONU.
Upstream Max Bandwidth
Max upstream bandwidth that can be allocated

to the ONU.
Upstream Max Burst Size
Priority
Priority of an ONU when the extra bandwidth

is allocated to it. The default value is
recommended.
Downstream Max Bandwidth
Max downstream bandwidth that can be

allocated to the ONU.
Downstream Max Burst Size
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON ONU bandwidth profile, refer to Table 3-45.
Table 3-45 Managing an EPON ONU Bandwidth Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON ONU bandwidth
Select an EPON ONU bandwidth profile.
profile.

Modify the EPON ONU bandwidth profile.
Select an EPON ONU bandwidth profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the EPON ONU bandwidth profile.

Delete.
Apply the EPON ONU bandwidth profile to

other NEs.

End of Steps
3-50
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3.2.1.19 Configuring an EPON ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON ONU bandwidth offline profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > Bandwidth > ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile.
The EPON ONU bandwidth offline profile information is displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 3-25.
Figure 3-25 Profile Configuration Window EPON ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile

Table 3-46 Parameters for an EPON ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON ONU offline profile name
Upstream Assured Bandwidth
Assured upstream bandwidth allocated to the

ONU.
Upstream Maximum Bandwidth
Max upstream bandwidth that can be allocated

to the ONU.
Upstream Max Bandwidth
3-51
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Priority
Priority of an ONU when the extra bandwidth

is allocated to it. The default value is
recommended.
Downstream Max Bandwidth
Max downstream bandwidth that can be

allocated to the ONU.
Downstream Max Burst Size
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON ONU bandwidth offline profile, refer to Table 3-47.
Table 3-47 Managing an EPON ONU Bandwidth Offline Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON ONU bandwidth offline
Select an EPON ONU bandwidth offline
profile.

Modify the EPON ONU bandwidth offline profile.

profile. Click Modify.
Delete the EPON ONU bandwidth offline profile.

profile. Click Delete.
Apply the EPON ONU bandwidth offline profile
Select an EPON ONU bandwidth offline profile.
to other NEs.
Click Apply to NEs. The Batch Operation

End of Steps
3.2.1.20 Configuring an EPON UNI Bandwidth Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON UNI bandwidth profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > Bandwidth > UNI Bandwidth Profile. The
EPON UNI bandwidth profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure
3-26.
3-52
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-26 Profile Configuration Window EPON UNI Bandwidth Profile

Table 3-48 Parameters for an EPON UNI Bandwidth Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON UNI Bandwidth Profile.
Up CIR
Assured uplink transmission rate.
Up CBS
Assured uplink burst size.
Up EBS
Allowed uplink extra burst size.
Down CIR
Assured downlink transmission rate.
Down CBS
Assured downlink burst size.
Down EBS
Allowed downlink extra burst size.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON UNI bandwidth profile, refer to Table 3-49.
Table 3-49 Managing an EPON UNI Bandwidth Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON UNI bandwidth profile.
Select an EPON UNI bandwidth profile.

3-53
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Modify the EPON UNI bandwidth profile.
Select an EPON UNI bandwidth profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the EPON UNI bandwidth profile.

Delete.
Apply the EPON UNI bandwidth profile.

End of Steps
3.2.1.21 Configuring an EPON UNI Bandwidth Offline Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > Bandwidth > UNI Bandwidth Offline Profile.
The EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile information is displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 3-27.
Figure 3-27 Profile Configuration Window EPON UNI Bandwidth Offline Profile

3-54
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

Table 3-50 Parameters for an EPON UNI Bandwidth Offline Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile
Upstream CIR
Assured uplink transmission rate.
Upstream CBS
Assured uplink burst size.
Upstream EBS
Allowed uplink extra burst size.
Downstream CIR
Assured downlink transmission rate.
Downstream CBS
Assured downlink burst size.
Downstream EBS
Allowed downlink extra burst size.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile, refer to Table 3-51.
Table 3-51 Managing an EPON UNI Bandwidth Offline Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON UNI bandwidth offline
Select an EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile.
profile.

Modify the EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile.

Click Modify.
Delete the EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile.

Click Delete.
Apply the EPON UNI bandwidth offline profile.

Click Apply to NEs. The Batch Operation
End of Steps
3.2.1.22 Configuring an EPON VoIP IP Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON VoIP IP profile.
Steps
3-55
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > VoIP > IP Profile. The EPON VoIP IP profile
Figure 3-28 Profile Configuration Window EPON VoIP IP Profile

Table 3-52 Parameters for an EPON VoIP IP Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON ONU VoIP IP profile name
IP Management and IP Relation

l
Independent: The ONU management IP

is different with the ONU VoIP IP. For the
FTTB ONU, this option is recommended.
Shared: The ONU management IP is the

same as the ONU VoIP IP. For the FTTH
ONU, this option is recommended.
IP Mode

l
Static: A default gateway and primary

DNS server must be configured.
PPPoE: PPPoE mode must be configured.
DHCP: automatic IP allocation.
One ONU can just apply one IP allocation

mode.
An ONU VoIP IP profile just applies to the
static mode.
3-56
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Default Gateway
Default gateway IP in the static IP allocation

mode.
Primary DNS Server IP
Primary DNS server IP in the static IP

allocation mode.
PPPoE Mode

l
Auto
Chap: Challenge Handshake

Authentication Protocol
Pap: Password Authentication Protocol
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON VoIP IP profile, refer to Table 3-53.
Table 3-53 Managing an EPON VoIP IP Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON VoIP IP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP IP profile. Click Add by

OK.
Modify the EPON VoIP IP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP IP profile. Click Modify.
Delete the EPON VoIP IP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP IP profile. Click Delete.
Apply the EPON VoIP IP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP IP profile. Click Apply

End of Steps
3.2.1.23 Configuring an EPON VoIP VLAN Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON VoIP VLAN profile, which is used to
configure an ONU VoIP VLAN remotely through the extended OAM channel.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > VoIP > VLAN Profile. The EPON VoIP VLAN
3-57
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-29 Profile Configuration Window EPON VoIP VLAN Profile

Table 3-54 Parameters for an EPON VoIP VLAN Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON VoIP VLAN profile name.
Tag Mode
Includes the following modes:

l
Tag: The ONU uploads the VoIP packets

with single layer tags. The CVAN and
priority parameters must be configured.
Transparent: The ONU uploads the VoIP

packets without tags.
VLAN Stacking: The ONU uploads the

VoIP packets with double-layer tags.
In the VLAN Stacking mode, the CVAN,
priority and SVLAN parameters must be
configured.
The priority value ranges from 0 to 7. The
7 is the highest priority.
CVLAN
Inner layer of a double-tag VLAN.
Priority
Packet priority.
SVLAN
Outer layer of a double-tag VLAN.
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON VoIP VLAN profile, refer to Table 3-55.
3-58
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-55 Managing an EPON VoIP VLAN Profile

Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON VoIP VLAN profile.
Select an EPON VoIP VLAN profile. Click Add

Click OK.
Modify the EPON VoIP VLAN profile.
Select an EPON VoIP VLAN profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the EPON VoIP VLAN profile.

Delete
Apply the EPON VoIP VLAN profile.

End of Steps
3.2.1.24 Configuring an EPON VoIP H.248 Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON VoIP H.248 profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > VoIP > VoIP H.248 Profile. The EPON VoIP
H.248 profile information is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 3-30.
3-59
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-30 Profile Configuration Window EPON VoIP H.248 Profile

Table 3-56 Parameters for an EPON VoIP H.248 Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON VoIP H.248 profile name.
Primary Register Server IP
IP address of the primary softswitch server.
Secondary Register Server IP
IP address of the secondary softswitch server.
Primary Register Server Port
Port number of the primary softswitch server.
Secondary Register Server Port
Port number of the secondary softswitch

server.
ONU Heartbeat Mode

l
None: disables the heartbeat mode.
H.248 Service Change
H.248Ctc: China Telecom Standard STO

format
RTP Link Kept Flag
ONU Heartbeat Cycle
Default value: 30 seconds
Media Register Mode

l
Domain Name
IP
Device Name
3-60
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
ONU Heartbeat Count
number of times of heartbeat timeout

Default value: 3
Media Gateway Port
Default value: 2944
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON VoIP H.248 profile, refer to Table 3-57.
Table 3-57 Managing an EPON VoIP H.248 Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON VoIP H.248 profile.
Select an EPON VoIP H.248 profile. Click Add

Click OK.
Modify the EPON VoIP H.248 profile.
Select an EPON VoIP H.248 profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the EPON VoIP H.248 profilee.

Delete
Apply the EPON VoIP H.248 profile.

End of Steps
3.2.1.25 Configuring an EPON VoIP SIP Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON VoIP SIP profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > VoIP > SIP Profile. The EPON VoIP SIP profile
3-61
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-31 Profile Configuration Window EPON VoIP SIP Profile

Table 3-58 Parameters for an EPON VoIP SIP Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON VoIP SIP profile name
Register Server IP
IP address of the primary softswitch server.
Media Gateway Port
Default value: 5060
Register Server Port
Default value: 5060
IP address of the secondary softswitch server.
Default value: 5060
Proxy Server IP
IP address of the primary SIP proxy server

(can be the same as the register server)
Proxy Server Port
Port number of the primary SIP proxy server

Default value: 5060
Secondary Proxy Server IP
IP address of the secondary SIP proxy server

(can be the same as the register server)
Secondary Proxy Server Port
Port number of the secondary SIP proxy server

Default value: 5060
Register Interval
The unit is seconds. The default value is 3600

seconds.
3-62
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
ONU Heartbeat Switch
SIP Heartbeat Switch

SS and ONU can locate the equipment fault
by the heartbeat function.
ONU Heartbeat Cycle
ONU Heartbeat Count
Default value: 3 times
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON VoIP SIP profile, refer to Table 3-59.
Table 3-59 Managing an EPON VoIP SIP Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON VoIP SIP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP SIP profile. Click Add

Click OK.
Modify the EPON VoIP SIP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP SIP profile. Click

Modify.
Delete the EPON VoIP SIP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP SIP profile. Click

Delete.
Apply the EPON VoIP SIP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP SIP profile. Click Apply

End of Steps
3.2.1.26 Configuring an EPON VoIP MGCP Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON VoIP MGCP profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > VoIP > MGCP Profile. The EPON VoIP MGCP
3-63
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-32 Profile Configuration Window EPON VoIP MGCP Profile

Table 3-60 Parameters for an EPON VoIP MGCP Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON VoIP MGCP profile name.
Register Server IP
IP address of the primary softswitch server
IP address of the secondary softswitch server
Register Server Port
Port number of the primary softswitch server

Default value: 1001
Port number of the secondary softswitch

server
Default value: 1001
Media Gateway Port
Default value: 1001
Media Register Mode
Includes the following three modes:
Heartbeat Mode
Domain Name
IP
Device Name
The SS and ONU detects the faults through

the heartbeat function.
Heartbeat Cycle
None: disables the heartbeat mode
MGCP
3-64
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Heartbeat Count
Number of times of heartbeat timeout

Default value: 1
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON VoIP MGCP profile, refer to Table 3-61.
Table 3-61 Managing an EPON VoIP MGCP Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON VoIP MGCP profile.
Select an EPON VoIP MGCP profile. Click

Add by Copy. The Add Profile by Copy
dialog box is displayed. Configure the
Modify the EPON VoIP MGCP profile.

Modify.
Delete the EPON VoIP MGCP profile.

Delete.
Apply the EPON VoIP MGCP profile.

End of Steps
3.2.1.27 Configuring EPON VoIP Fax Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON VoIP fax profile.
Steps
2. In the left pane, double-click EPON > VoIP > Fax Profile. The EPON VoIP fax profile
3-65
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-33 Profile Configuration Window EPON VoIP Fax Profile

Table 3-62 Parameters for an EPON VoIP Fax Profile
Parameter
Description
Profile Name
EPON VoIP fax profile name
Fax Mode
Fax Control Mode
T30
T38

l
None
RTCP
SS
AUTOVBD
5. Click OK.
For how to manage an EPON VoIP fax profile, refer to Table 3-63.
Table 3-63 Managing an EPON VoIP Fax Profile
Task
Operation
Copy the created EPON VoIP fax profile.
Select an EPON VoIP fax profile. Click Add

Click OK.
3-66
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operation
Modify the EPON VoIP fax profile.
Select an EPON VoIP fax profile. Click Modify.
Delete the EPON VoIP fax profile.
Select an EPON VoIP fax profile. Click Delete.
Apply the EPON VoIP fax profile.
Select an EPON VoIP fax profile. Click Apply

End of Steps
3.2.2 Configuring the OLT IP Address Pool

This procedure describes how to configure the OLT IP address pool. You can establish
an association between the IP pool and a PON port. The OLT assigns an available IP
address to an ONU belonging to the PON port.
Steps
1. Perform one of the following operations to open the OLT IP Pool Configuration
window, see Figure 3-34.
l In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE, and select
GPON Management > OLT IP Pool Configuration.
EPON Management > OLT IP Pool Configuration.
3-67
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-34 OLT IP Pool Configuration Window
2. Configure the parameters for the IP pool.

a. Click
. The Select NE dialog box is displayed.
b. Select a network element, and click OK.

c. Click Add. The Add IP Pool dialog box is displayed.
d. Configure the parameters.
Table 3-64 Parameters for the IP Address Pool
Parameter
Description
IP Pool Name
Begin IP Address
End IP Address
Mask
Priority
Priority of the management VLAN.
VLAN ID
ID of the management VLAN.
Net IP Address
Network segment where the network management system

locates.
Net Mask
Subnetwork mask for the gateway of a network segment.
Net Gateway
IP address for the gateway of a network segment.
3-68
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
e. Click OK.
End of Steps
3.2.3 Configuring the PON Authentication Mode

This procedure describes how to configure the EPON ONU authentication mode.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE, and
select EPON Management > OLT Authentication Configuration. The OLT
Authentication Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35 OLT Authentication Configuration Dialog Box
2. Configure the ONU authentication parameters.

a. Click
. The Select Card dialog box is displayed.
b. Select a card, and click OK.

c. Configure the parameters.
3-69
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-65 Parameters for the OLT Authentication

Parameter
Description
ONU Auth Mode
Includes the following authentication modes:

l
The card is authenticated by the PON MAC address of

the ONU.
The card is authenticated by the serial number of the

ONU.
The card is authenticated by the logical ID of the ONU.
The card is authenticated in hybrid mode. In this mode,

the card can be authenticated by the MAC address,
logical ID, or a serial number of any type.
MAC HW Auth Status
Only supports the hardware authentication.
Auto Authentication
The unauthenticated ONUs are reported to the network

management system for automatic configuration.
ONU Silence Enabling
Enables a re-authentication procedure performed after a

period of time since an ONU authentication procedure fails.
The ONU Silence Enabling function is available only when
the ONU Auth Mode is LOID or hybrid mode.
d. Click OK.
End of Steps
3.2.4 Configuring PON Encryption

This procedure describes how to configure EPON encryption.
Steps
EPON Management > OLT Encryption Configuration. The OLT Encrpt dialog box
3-70
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-36 OLT Encrypt Dialog Box
2. Configure the OLT encryption parameters.

a. Click
. The Select Card dialog box is displayed.
b. Select a card, and click OK.

Table 3-66 Parameters for the OLT Encryption
Parameter
Description
Encrypt Arithmetic
Includes:
l
AES128
Triple Churning
Key Update Time (s)
Sets an interval of encryption key updates.
Key Update Timeout (s)
Sets an interval of sending an encryption key update request,

if the OLT does not receive the encryption key update frame
from the target ONU.
d. Click OK.
End of Steps
3.2.5 Configuring PON Port Protection

This procedure describes the how to configure PON port protection.
3-71
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Context
The ZXA10 C300 equipment is design with PON port protection. When the ZXA10 C300
disconnects with the ONU, the equipment will switch to the backup PON port.
Steps
1. Perform one of the following operations to open the PON Protection Configuration
dialog box, see Figure 3-37.
GPON Management > PON Protection Configuration.
EPON Management > PON Protection Configuration.
Figure 3-37 PON Protection Configuration Dialog Box
2. Create a PON protection group.

a. Click
. The Select NE dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an NE, and click OK.

c. Click Add. The PON Protection Configuration dialog box is displayed.
d. Configure the parameters.
Table 3-67 Parameters for the PON Protection Configuration
Parameter
Description
Name
Protection group name
Working PON Port
3-72
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Protection PON Port
Type
The following protection types are supported:

l
Type A: Redundant protection for backbone optical fiber.
Type B: Redundant protection for backbone optical fiber

and OLT PON port.
Type C: Dual redundant protection for OLT dual PON

port, ONU dual optical module, backbone optical fiber,
optical splitter and distribution optical fiber.
Type D: Dual redundant protection for OLT dual PON

port, ONU dual PON port, backbone optical fiber, optical
splitter and distribution optical fiber.
e. Click OK.
3. Configure the switch mode.
a. In the PON Protection Configuration dialog box, select a protection group, and
click Advanced. The PON Protection Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the parameters.
Table 3-68 Parameters for the PON Protection Switch Mode
Parameter
Description
Switch Mode
The following switch modes are supported:

l
Revertive: The service will switch to the original PON port

if the fault is solved.
Non-revertive: The service will not switch to the original

PON port if the fault is solved.
Waiting Interval(s)
Interval before the protected service switch to the original

PON port if the fault is solved.
c. Click OK.
4. (Optional) Configure the protection mode.
a. In the PON Protection Configuration dialog box, select a protection group, and
click Swap. The PON Protection Configuration is displayed.
b. Configure the parameters.
Table 3-69 PON Protection Switch Mode
Switch Mode
Description
Force P2W
Force switches to the working PON port.

3-73
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Switch Mode
Description
Force W2P
Force switches to the protection PON port.
Manual P2W
Manually switches to the working PON port.
Manual W2P
Manually switches to the protection PON port.
Clear All
Clears all the witch commands. Use the default port switch
mode.
Lock out
Disables the switch protection.
c. Click OK.
End of Steps
3.2.6 Duplicating Configuration Data of a PON Port

This procedure describes the how to duplicate configuration data of a PON port (or an
ONU) to another PON interface.
Steps
1. Perform one of the following operations to open the PON Configuration Copy dialog
box, see Figure 3-38.
GPON Management > PON Configuration Copy.
EPON Management > More > PON Configuration Copy.
3-74
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-38 PON Configuration Copy Dialog Box
2. Configure the related parameters.

3. Click Copy.
End of Steps
3.2.7 Managing Unauthenticated ONUs

This procedure describes the how to query and manage unauthenticated ONUs, and
authenticate these ONUs.
Steps
1. Perform the following operations to open the Unauthenticated ONU Configuration
a. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE, and select
ONU Manager.
b. Select a slot and port. All the authorized ONUs under the PON port are displayed.
c. Click Unauthenticated ONU. The Unauthenticated ONU Configuration dialog
box is displayed. All the unauthenticated ONUs under the PON port are displayed.
3-75
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-39 Unauthenticated ONU Configuration Dialog Box
2. Configure the ONU attributes.

a. Select an unauthenticated ONU. Click Add To. The Add ONU dialog box is
displayed.
b. Click the Basic & Extended Parameters tab.
For a description of the parameters, refer to Table 3-70 and Table 3-71.
Table 3-70 Basic & Extended Parameters for a GPON ONU
Parameter
Description
Location
Displays the locations of the network elements that all the

unauthenticated ONUs belong to, and the locations of the
related PON port.
ID
ONU IDs ranged from 1 to 128.
Name
ONU name.
ONU Type
Includes all the created ONU types.
VPort Mode
The VPort can be created by the following modes:

l
GEM Port: indicates each VPort of an ONU is

automatically created when a GEM Port is created. One
GEM Port matches one VPort.
ONU: indicates a VPort is created when an ONU is

created. One ONU has one VPort. All the GEM ports of
the ONU match this VPort.
Manual: indicates a VPort is created manually by a user.

The corresponding relationship between the VPort and
GEM Port is also configured manually.
3-76
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Authentication Mode
Includes the following GPON ONU authentication modes:

l
SN
Password
SN+Password
Password (Hex)
SN+Password (Hex)
LOID
LOID+Password
Authentication Value
Authorization value of the corresponding authentication mode.
Authentication Information
Enables the OLT to record the SN the first time then an ONU
at Back-online
is connected to the network. The OLT will verify the SN the

next time when ONU is connected to the network.
Splitter ID
Determines the layer of the ODN network where an ONU

locates.
ONU IP
IP address of the inner network management system of an

ONU.
Netmask
Mask of the IP address.
Management VLAN
VLAN of the inner network management system of an ONU.
Route Destination
Network segment address of the network management system
Route Netmask
Route mask of an ONU
Route Gateway
Gateway address of an ONU
Table 3-71 Basic & Extended Parameters for an EPON ONU

Attribute
Description
Location
Displays the locations of the network elements that all the

unauthenticated ONUs belong to, and the locations of the
related PON port.
ID
ONU IDs ranged from 1 to 64.
Name
ONU name
Authentication Mode
Includes the following EPON ONU authentication modes:

l
SN
Password
SN+Password
Password (Hex)
SN+Password (Hex)
LOID
LOID+Password
3-77
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Attribute
Description
Authentication Value
Authorization value of the corresponding authentication mode.
ONU Type
Includes all the created ONU types.
Splitter ID
Determines the layer of the ODN network where an ONU

locates.
Management Path
Bandwidth
Includes all the created ONU bandwidth templates.
ONU IP
IP address of the inner network management system of an

ONU.
Netmask
Mask of the IP address.
Management VLAN
VLAN of the inner network management system of an ONU.
Route Destination
Network segment address of the network management system
Route Netmask
Route mask of an ONU
Route Gateway
Gateway address of an ONU
d. Click the Maintenance Parameters tab.

e. Configure the ONU service level, service type, ONU user information,
maintenance staff information, and the ONU description.
(Optional) Click
beside Service Level. The ONU Monitoring Level
Configuration dialog box is displayed. Configure the ONU monitoring in
accordance with the ONU priorities. Click OK.
f. Click OK.
End of Steps
3.2.8 Viewing the ONU Topology Graph

This procedure describes the how to view the ONU topology graph, which displays the
ONU information under a PON port, ONU connection status, ONU type, ONU alarm and
ONU-optocal splitter relationship.
Steps
ONU Topology. The ONU Topology window is displayed.
2. On the ONU navigation tree in the left pane, double-click a PON port. The ONU
information of this port is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 3-40.
3-78
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-40 ONU Topology Window
End of Steps
3.3 ONU Management

Figure 3-41 shows the ONU Manager window. which displays the ONUs under each PON
card. You can configure the EPON ONUs and GPON ONUs.
Figure 3-41 ONU Manager Window
Perform one of the following operations to open the ONU Manager window by the following
methods:
l
In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE, and select
ONU Manager.
3-79
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
l
l
In the Rack window, right-click a PON card, and select ONU Manager.
In the Rack window, right-click a PON port, and select ONU Manager.
Right-click the ONU warning message, and select Goto ONU Configuration.
In a ONU query dialog box, right-click and select ONU Manager from the shortcut
menu.
In the ONU Manager window, you can perform the following management operations on
an ONU:
l
Physical management
Add, delete and modify an ONU.
Port configuration
Configure the ANI port, or the UNI port.
Route configuration
For GPON, you can map the following ports to VPort: GEM Port, TCONT, Vport and
GEM Port.
Vport service configuration

Configure the following protocol service configuration for an ONU: ServicePort, VLAN,
QoS and multicast.
l
l
Service configuration
ONU maintenance
Check the ONU performance and alarms.
For a description of the function buttons in the operation tree, refer to Table 3-72.
Table 3-72 Function Buttons in the Operation Tree
Icon
Description
Opens Options dialog box. You can display and
hide the nodes or the right-click menu.
Finds the matched operation nodes with the
search text.
Expand the node.
Collapse the node.
3.3.1 Managing an ONU

This procedure describes how to manage an ONU.
3-80
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
ONU Manager. The ONU Manager window is displayed.
2. Select the slot and port. All the authenticated ONUs under the PON port is displayed,
see Figure 3-42.
3. You can perform the following operations on an ONU.

l Add an ONU.
i.
Click Add. The Add ONU dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Click the Basic & Extended Parameters tab. Configure the parameters.
iii. Click the Maintenance Parameters tab. Configure the parameters.

iv. Click OK.
l
Modify ONU attributes.

i.
Double-click an ONU. The Modify ONU dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Click the Basic & Extended Parameters tab. Configure the parameters.
iii. Click the Maintenance Parameters tab. Configure the parameters.

iv. Click OK.
l
Delete an ONU.
i.
Right-click an ONU, and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
ii.
Click OK.
Change an ONU.
i.
Right-click an ONU, and select Change ONU from the shortcut menu. The
Change ONU dialog box is displayed.
3-81
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
Set a new authentication value.

Or click
to open the Unauthenticated ONU Configuration dialog box.
Select an unauthenticated ONU to replace the current ONU. Click OK.
iii. Click OK.

l
Enable an ONU.
i.
Select an ONU. In the operation tree, select Physical Configuration >

Enable
ii.
Click OK.
Disable an ONU.
i.
Select an ONU. In the operation tree, select Physical Configuration >

Disable
ii.
Click OK.
Reboot an ONU.
i.
Right-click an ONU, and select Reboot from the shortcut menu.
ii.
Click OK.
End of Steps
3.3.2 Viewing Detailed Information of an ONU

This procedure describes how to View detailed information of an ONU.
Steps
2. Select the slot and port. All the authenticated ONUs under the PON port is displayed.
3. Right-click an ONU, and select Details from the shortcut menu. The ONU Details
dialog box is displayed, see Figure 3-43.
3-82
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-43 ONU Details Dialog Box
4. View the ONU information by clicking the tabs in the dialog box.
End of Steps
3.3.3 Restoring ONU Factory Settings

This procedure describes how to restore the factory settings of a GPON ONU.
3-83
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
2. Select the GPON slot and port. All the authenticated GPON ONUs under the PON
port is displayed.
3. Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Physical Configurations > More > Restore
to Factory Settings. The Restore to Factory Settings dialog box is displayed, see
Figure 3-44.
Figure 3-44 Restore to Factory Settings Dialog Box
4. Select a restore option. Table 3-73 describes the restore options.

Table 3-73 Restore Options
Option
Description
Restore settings configured
Restore the settings configured by the OLT through OMCI (ONT
by OMCI to factory
Management Control Interface)
Restore all settings to factory
Restore all the ONU settings to the factory settings.
5. Click OK.
End of Steps
3.3.4 Managing Unauthenticated ONUs

For how to manage the unauthenticated ONUs, refer to the related contents in the manual.
3.3.5 Synchronizing the MDUs to the Main Topology

An ONU can not be configured by the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System. All
the configurations must be delivered to the ONU by the OLT.
An MDU (Multiple Dwelling Unit) can be used as an ONU managed by the OLT.
3-84
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
3. Click Update MDU Topology. The Update MDU Topology Node dialog box is
Figure 3-45 Update MDU Topology Node Dialog Box
4. Configure the parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to Table 3-74.
Table 3-74 Parameters for Updating MDU Topology Node
Parameter
Description
Read/Write Community
Add NE Topology Node to

Specified Group
Using the Default Value
Same as OLT
Customized
Select this option, and click
. The Select Object dialog
box is displayed. Select an object, and it will be displayed in the

topology graph.
5. Click Start.
End of Steps
3.3.6 Configuring an EPON UNI Port

This procedure describes how to configure an EPON ONU port, or configure a batch of
EPON ONU ports.
3-85
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
2. Select the EPON slot and port. All the authenticated EPON ONUs under the PON port
are displayed.
3. You can configure an EPON ONU port, or configure a batch of EPON ONU ports.
l Configure an ONU port.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > Port
Configuration. The Port Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 3-46
Figure 3-46 Port Configuration Dialog Box
Configure the Ethernet UNI.

t
On the Ethernet UNI tab, select a port, and click Modify. The Ethernet
UNI Attribute Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Configure the parameters. For a description of the parameters, refer to
Table 3-75.
Table 3-75 Parameters for the Ethernet UNI
Parameter
Description
Tag Strip
3-86
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Flow Control
Bandwidth Profile
Upstream Policing
Sets whether this function is enabled.
Upstream Policing CIR
Upstream CBS
Upstream EBS
Downstream Policing
Sets whether this function is enabled.
Downstream Policing
CIR
Downstream CBS
Downstream EBS
Configure Duplex
Data transmission mode.
Speed
Actual Duplex Model
Data transmission mode.
Actual Speed
Actual transmission speed.
Click OK.
Click Reset. The Reset UNI dialog box is displayed. Select an UNI, and
click OK.
Click MAC Query. The EPON ONU MAC Query dialog box is displayed.
The specified Ethernet port is displayed.
Configure the E1 attributes in the E1 tab.

i.
Select an E1 port. Click Modify.
ii.
From the Administrative

Enabled/Disabled.
Status
drop-down
list,
select
Configure the CoIP port attributes in the VoIP tab.

i.
Select an VoIP port.

Click Modify.
The VoIP Port Attribute
ii.
From the Administrative

Enabled/Disabled.
drop-down
Status
list,
select
Configure a batch of EPON ONU ports.

i.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > Port Batch
Configuration. The Port Batch Configuration dialog box is displayed, see
Figure 3-47.
3-87
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 3-47 Port Batch Configuration Dialog Box
ii.
Configure the parameters.

Table 3-76 and Table 3-75 describes the parameters.
Table 3-76 Parameter for the Port Batch Configuration
Parameter
Description
All Ports
All the ports of an ONU.
Specific Ports
Specific ports of an ONU
iii. Click Set in each parameter setting areas.

End of Steps
Follow-Up Action
3.3.7 Configuring a GPON UNI Port

This procedure describes how to configure a GPON UNI port.
Steps
2. Select the GPON slot and port. All the authenticated GPON ONUs under the PON
port are displayed.
3-88
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Configure the GPON UNI (User Network Interface).

l Configure the ANI (Access Network Interface).
i.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > ANI
Configuration. The ANI Configuration dialog box is displayed.
ii.
(Optional) Click Modify. The Modify ANI Information dialog box is

displayed. Modify the GEM block size. Click OK.
Configure the Ethernet UNI port.

i.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > Ethernet
UNI. The Ethernet UNI dialog box is displayed.
ii.
(Optional) Click Modify.

displayed.
The Modify Ethernet UNI Port dialog box is

Table 3-77 Parameters for the Ethernet UNI Port
Parameter
Description
Speed and Duplex
Ethernet speed and duplex mode.
Enabled
Disabled
Maximum Frame Size
(byte)
Loopback Status
IP Retrieving Mode
Pause Time
Time period when the user terminal stop to send data.

The unit is 512 bits times
ARC Interval
Alarm interval
The unit is minute.
Configure the VoIP UNI.

i.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > VoIP UNI.
The VoIP UNI dialog box is displayed.
ii.
(Optional) Modify the VoIP UNI parameters.

i.
Click VoIP UNI tab. Click Modify. The Modify VoIP UNI dialog box is
displayed.
ii.

3-89
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-78 Parameters for the VoIP UNI

Parameter
Description
Unlock
Lock
Impedance
Impedance of the POTS UNI
Tx Path
Set the POTS UNI status as full-time hook or

time-division hook.
Rx Gain
Range: -12.0 dB 6 dB
Tx Gain
Range: -12.0 dB 6 dB
iii. Click OK.

iv. (Optional) Query the VoIP line status.
Click the VoIP Line Status tab. Configure the parameters.
v.
(Optional) Check the calling record.

Click the VoIP Calling Record tab. Configure the parameters.
Configure the video UNI.

i.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > Video UNI.
The Video UNI dialog box is displayed.
ii.
(Optional) Select a port, and click Modify.
iii. (Optional) Configure the parameters.

Table 3-79 Parameters for the Video UNI
Parameter
Description
Unlock
Lock
Power Control Enabling
Configures whether to provide power supply for the

external devices.
iv. Click OK.

l
Configure the CES (Circuit Emulation Service) UNI.

i.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > CES UNI.
The CES UNI dialog box is displayed.
ii.
(Optional) Select a port. Click Modify.
iii. (Optional) Configure the parameters.

3-90
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 3-80 Parameters for the CES UNI

Parameter
Description
Expected Type
Sets the UNI type.
CES Loopback
Sets the loopback type.
Unlocked
Locked
DS1 Framing
Sets the framing structure.
Encoding
Configures the line encoding scheme.
Line Length
Sets the line length between the DS1 interface and the
DSX-1 cross connection point, or the length between the
DS3 interface and the DS3-3 cross connection point
ARC
0: Disable ARC
1: Enable ARC
DS1 Mode
Sets DS1 mode.
ARC Interval
The unit is minute and the value ranges from 0 255.
Line Type
Sets the line type in the DS3 or E3 application.
iv. Click OK.

l
Configure the VEIP (Virtual Ethernet Interface Point) UNI.

i.
Select an ONU. On the right pane, select Port Configurations > VEIP UNI.
The VEIP UNI dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Select a port. Click Modify.
iii. Modify the parameters.

Table 3-81 Parameters for the VEIP UNI
Parameter
Description
Enabled
Disabled
Interdomain Name
Port Assign Enabling
Protocol Type
Assigned Port
IP Host ID
3-91
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
iv. Click OK.

End of Steps
3.3.8 Configuring the Maintenance and Diagnosis Management

This procedure describes how to configure the ONU maintenance and diagnosis.
Steps
ONU Manager.
3. Perform the following operations to maintain an ONU device.
l In the topology view, select an MDU.
Note:
Before this operation, the MDU must be synchronized to the main topology.
i.
Select an MDU to be displayed in the topology graph. In the operation

navigation tree on the right pane, select ONU Maintenance Operations >
Goto > MDU Topology View
ii.
The system switched to the Topology Management window. Select an MDU

network element.
Open the rack graph of the selected MDU.
Note:
i.
Select the MDU to be displayed in the topology graph. In the operation

Goto > MDU Chassis View.
ii.
The system switched to the Topology Management window. The rack view
of the selected MDU is displayed.
Open the Port Manager of the selected MDU.
3-92
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
i.
Select the MDU to be displayed in the topology graph. In the operation

Goto > MDU Port Manager
ii.
The system switched to the Topology Management window. The Port

Manager window of the selected MDU is displayed.
Display the selected ONU in the ONU Topology window.

i.
Select an ONU. In the operation navigation tree on the right pane, select ONU
Maintenance Operations > Goto > ONU Topology
ii.
The ONU Topology window is displayed.
Display the current ONU alarms.

i.
Maintenance Operations > Active Alarms
ii.
The Active Alarms dialog box is displayed. You can perform operations on
the active alarms.
View the real-time ONU performance.

i.
Maintenance Operations > Realtime Performance. The Add Realtime
Performance Data Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
ii.

displayed. On the left pane, select an ONU. Click OK.
iii. (Optional) Click Select Locations.The Select Locations dialog box is

displayed. Select a location. Click OK.
iv. Set the task life cycle and the collection granularity. Click OK.
l
l
l
Configure the ONU history traffic collection parameters.

i.
Maintenance Operations > Traffic History Monitoring > Traffic Collection
Setting. The Traffic Collection Setting dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Configure the parameters. Click OK.
Service simulation test: tests the whether the service configuration works.
Rouge ONU management:
i.
Select a rouge ONU. In the operation navigation tree on the right pane, select
ONU Maintenance Operations > More > Rouge ONU Management. The
Rouge ONU Management dialog box is displayed.
3-93
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
Configure the parameters, and click OK.

Table 3-82 Parameters for Rouge ONU Management
Parameter
Description
Operation
On: enables the ONU optical module functions.
Off: disables the ONU optical module functions.
Shutdown: shuts down the ONU optical module functions.
Recovery Time (min)
The interval between the shutdown of the ONU optical module

and the re-enabling of the module.
MDU Host Configuration:

An MDU can work as an ONU in the network. The MDU must be synchronized to
the main topology.
i.
Select an MDU. In the operation navigation tree on the right pane, select ONU
Maintenance Operations > More > MDU Host Configuration.
ii.
(Optional) Modify the system name of the device, locations and the contact
person. Click OK.
MDU SNMP ping:

i.
Maintenance Operations > More > MDU SNMP Ping.
ii.
Click Start.
Telnet to an MDU device:

i.
Maintenance Operations > More > Telnet.
ii.
In the command line, telnet to the MUD device.
End of Steps
3-94
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 4
Diagnosis Configuration and

Management
Table of Contents
Diagnosing a PON Optical Module .............................................................................4-1
Configuring the Rogue ONU Detecting Function.........................................................4-3
Querying a MAC Address...........................................................................................4-4
Performing the Service Simulation Test ......................................................................4-5
4.1 Diagnosing a PON Optical Module

This procedure describes how to diagnose a PON optical module.
Diagnose an OLT optical module.

1. Perform one of the following operations to open the OLT Optical Module Diagnosis
Perform the following to open the dialog box:
l
l
GPON Management > More > OLT Optical Diagnosis.
EPON Management > More > OLT Optical Diagnosis.
Figure 4-1 OLT Optical Module Diagnosis Dialog Box
2. Select a card and PON port.

3. Click the Transmit Parameter tab. Configure the parameters, and then click Set.
4-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
4. Click the Receive Parameter tab. Select an ONU, and then configure the related
parameters. Click Set.
Diagnosing an GPON ONU Optical Module

GPON Management > More > ONU Optical Module Diagnosis. The ONU Optical
Module Diagnosis dialog box is displayed.
2. Configure the related parameters, see Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 GPON ONU Optical Module Diagnosis Dialog Box

Table 4-1 Parameters for GPON ONU Optical Module Diagnosis
Parameter
Description
Alarm Reporting Enabling
Falling Alarm Threshold
Enabled
Disabled
If the transmit/received power is lower than this

threshold, the ONU will report alarms.
Rising Alarm Threshold
If the transmit/received power is higher than

this threshold, the ONU will report alarms.
3. Click Set.
Diagnosing an EPON ONU Optical Module

EPON Management > More > ONU Optical Diagnosis Management. The ONU
Optical Module Diagnosis dialog box is displayed.
2. Configure the related parameters, see Figure 4-3.
4-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Configuration and Management
Figure 4-3 EPON ONU Optical Module Diagnosis Dialog Box

Table 4-2 Parameters for EPON ONU Optical Module Diagnosis
Parameter
Description
Rising Alarm Threshold
If the parameter value is higher than this

Falling Alarm Threshold
If the parameter value is lower than this

Rising Warning Threshold
If the parameter value is higher than this

threshold, the ONU will report warnings.
Falling Warning Threshold
If the parameter value is lower than this

threshold, the ONU will report warnings.
Set Alarm Threshold
Click this button to apply the configurations.
Enable Alarm Warning
Enables the alarm reporting function.
3. Click Set.
4.2 Configuring the Rogue ONU Detecting Function

This procedure describes how to configure the rogue ONU detecting function.
Steps
Diagnosis Management > Rogue ONU Detecting Configuration. The Rogue ONU
Detecting Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 4-4.
4-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 4-4 Rogue ONU Detecting Configuration Dialog Box
2. Click
. Select an ONU card.

Table 4-3 Parameters for Rogue ONU Detecting Configuration
Parameter
Description
Rogue ONU detecting
Enables/Disables rogue ONU detecting.
Locating Rogue ONU Enabling
Enables/Disables the rogue ONU location.
Auto-shutdown Rogue ONU Enabling
Enables/Disables the rogue ONU

auto-shutdown.
4. Click Set.
End of Steps
4.3 Querying a MAC Address

This procedure describes how to query a MAC address.
Steps
System Management > MAC Address Table. The MAC Address Table is displayed,
see Figure 4-5.
4-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 4-5 MAC Address Table Dialog Box
2. Select the rack, shelf, and card. The system displays the MAC address under this
port. For a description of the parameters, refer to Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Parameters for the MAC Address Table
Parameter
Description
VLAN
Specifies the VLAN.
MAC Address
Displays the information of the specified MAC

address.
Add
Add VLAN and MAC address information to

a specified port.
Export
Exports the VLAN and MAC address

information under a specified port.
End of Steps
4.4 Performing the Service Simulation Test

This procedure describes how to perform a service simulation test to check whether the
broadband and narrowband configuration for an ONU works.
Steps
4-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2. Select a slot and port. All the authenticated ONUs under the PON port are displayed.
3. Select an ONU. On the right pane, select ONU Maintenance Operations > More >
Service Simulation Test. The Service Simulation Test dialog box is displayed, see
Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Service Simulation Test Dialog Box
4. Select the services for the simulation test. Configure the parameters. For a description
Table 4-5 Parameters for the Service Simulation Test
Parameter
Description
Type of simulation test
Selects the type of simulation test: broadband,

narrowband, or multicast.
Port
Sets the ONU port for a simulation test.

If All is selected, all the ports will be tested in
sequence.
Test Type
C-Tag VLAN
DHCP
PPPoE
If Use Default VLAN is selected, the PVID is

used.
User Name
User name for broadband dialing
Password
Password for broadband dialing
(Caller) Port
Sets the VoIP port for the narrowband caller

simulation test.
If All is selected, all the VoIP ports will be
tested in sequence.
4-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Callee Number
The number used to call for the narrowband

service simulation test
(Callee) Port
Sets the VoIP port for the narrowband callee

simulation test.
If All is selected, all the VoIP ports will be
tested in sequence.
After the test is started, the callee number
should be dialed.
5. Click Start.
End of Steps
4-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
4-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 5
OLT Commissioning
Configuration
To perform initial configuration during OLT commissioning, perform the following
procedures to configure required objects:
1. Add cards and configure the fans.
l Add cards.
a. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE, and
select Open Rack Diagram. The Rack window is displayed.
b. Right-click a vacant slot, and select Add Card. The Add Card dialog box is
displayed.
c.
l
Configure the card parameters. For details, refer to 1.2.1 Adding or Deleting
a Card.
Configure the fans.

select System Management > More > Environment Configuration. The
Environment Configuration dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the fan parameters.
Environment Monitoring.
For details, refer to 1.10.1 Configuring
2. Configure the system information.

l Configure the system name.
select System Management > System Information. The displayed System
Information dialog box is displayed.
b. Configure the system name. For details, refer to 1.1 Viewing and Configuring
the System Information.
l
Configure the system time.

a. In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE,
and select System Management > NE Time. The NE Time dialog box is
displayed.
b. Set the NE time. For details, refer to 1.4.1 Configuring the NE Time.
Configure the clock.

5-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
select System Management > More > Clock Source Management. The
Clock Source Management dialog box is displayed.
b. Select the card for providing the clock source and configure the parameters.
3. Configure SNMP parameters.
l Configure the Trap server.
and select System Management > SNMP Trap Server The Trap Server
b. Configure the required parameters. For details, refer to 1.5 Configuring the
Trap Server.
l
Configure the community names.

select Topology Management > Modify NE. The ManagementModify
b. Modify the write and read community names.
4. Configure system security management.

l Configure Syslog parameters.
select System Management > More > Syslog Configuration. The SYSLOG
Configuration window is displayed.
b. Configure the required parameters. For details, refer to 1.7.3 Configuring the
Syslog Server.
l
Configure CLI user security parameters.

select System Management > CLI User Configuration. The CLI User
b. Configure the required parameters. For details, refer to 1.7.1 Configuring CLI
Users.
Configure ACL parameters.

and select NE Protocol Manager. The NE Protocol Manager window is
displayed.
b. In the navigation pane, double-click ACL > Management ACL Binding.
Configure the ACL binding parameters in the right pane. For details, refer to
2.7.1.4 Configuring the Management ACL.
5. Configure global layer-2 protocol parameters.

l Configure global VLAN parameters.
5-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 5 OLT Commissioning Configuration
In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click VLAN >
Static VLAN. Configure the VLAN parameters in the right pane. For details, refer
to 2.2.1 Configuring a Static VLAN.
l
IP Source Guard
In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click NE
Security > Port IP Source Guard. In the right pane, configure the IP source
guard parameters. For details, refer to 2.10.5 Configuring Port IP Source Guard.
Configure multicast VLAN.

In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click
Multicast > Multicast > Multicast VLAN. Configure the multicast VLAN
parameters in the right pane. For details, refer to 2.3.4 Configuring the Multicast
VLAN.
Configure IGMP parameters.

Multicast > Multicast > IGMP Parameters. Configure the global IGMP
parameters in the right pane. For details, refer to 2.3.2 Configuring the IGMP
Parameters.
Enable DHCP-Option82.
Subscriber Identification. Configure the DHCP Option82 parameters in the
right pane. For details, refer to 2.6.2 Configuring DHCP Option 82.
Enable DHCPv6-Option18.
Subscriber Identification. Configure the DHCPv6 Option18 parameters in the
right pane. For details, refer to 2.6.3 Configuring DHCPv6 Option 18.
Enable the PPPoE-Plus.

Subscriber Identification. Configure the PPPoE Plus parameters in the right
pane. For details, refer to 2.6.1 Configuring PPPoE Plus.
Configure anti-DOS attack.

Security > Anti-DoS Management. Configure the anti-DOS parameters in the
right pane. For details, refer to 2.10.2 Configuring Anti-DoS Management.
Configure anti-spoofing for MAC addresses.

Security > MAC Anti-Spoofing. Configure the MAC anti-spoofing parameters
in the right pane. For details, refer to 2.10.3 Configuring MAC Anti-Spoofing.
Configure the Smartgroup.

5-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click LACP

> LACP Aggregation Group. Configure the Smartgroup parameters in the right
pane. For details, refer to 2.7.3 LACP.
l
Configure the packet rate.

select System Management > More > LMI Enabling and Rate Limiting.
The LMI Enabling and Rate Limiting window is displayed.
b. Configure the rate limits. For details, refer to 1.10.3 Configuring LMI and
Packet Rate Limiting.
6. Configure global PON parameters.

l Configure OLT authentication.
select EPON Management > OLT Authentication Configuration. The OLT
Authentication Configuration window is displayed.
b. Select an EPON card. Configure the authentication mode for the ONUs
connected to the EPON card. For details, refer to 3.2.3 Configuring the PON
Authentication Mode.
l
Configure OLT encryption.

select EPON Management > OLT Encryption Configuration. The OLT
Encryption Configuration window is displayed.
b. Select an EPON card. Configure the encryption parameters for the EPON
card. For details, refer to 3.2.4 Configuring PON Encryption.
Configure an ONU type profile.

and select Profile Configuration. The Profile Configuration window is
displayed.
b. In the navigation tree, double-click ONU Type > ONU Type Profile. Configure
the ONU type profile parameters. For details, refer to 3.2.1.1 Configuring
ONU Type Profile.
Configure PON service profiles.

and select Profile Configuration. The Profile Configuration window is
displayed.
b. Configure the PON service profiles. For details, refer to Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 PON Service Profile Configuration
To...
Refer to...
Create an EPON ONU bandwidth profile
3.2.1.18 Configuring an EPON ONU

Bandwidth Profile
5-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 5 OLT Commissioning Configuration
To...
Refer to...
Configure an EPON ONU VoIP IP profile
3.2.1.22 Configuring an EPON VoIP IP

Profile
Configure an EPON ONU VoIP VLAN
3.2.1.23 Configuring an EPON VoIP
profile
VLAN Profile
Configure an EPON ONU VoIP protocol
3.2.1.24 Configuring an EPON VoIP
profile
H.248 Profile, 3.2.1.25 Configuring an

EPON VoIP SIP Profile, and 3.2.1.26
Configuring an EPON VoIP MGCP Profile
Configure an EPON ONU VoIP fax profile
3.2.1.27 Configuring EPON VoIP Fax

Profile
Configure a GPON bandwidth profile
3.2.1.11 Configuring a GPON ONU

Bandwidth Profile
Configure a GPON traffic profile
3.2.1.13 Configuring GPON Traffic Profile
Configure a GPON ONU VoIP VLAN
3.2.1.4 Configuring a GPON VoIP VLAN
profile
Profile
Configure a GPON ONU VoIP SIP profile
3.2.1.6 Configuring a GPON VoIP SIP

Profile
7. Configure the uplink ports.

For details, refer to 3.1.1 Configuring the Uplink Port.
8. Configure the PON port.
l Configure the EPON port.
For details, refer to 3.1.2 Configuring the EPON Port.
l
Configure the GPON port.

For details, refer to 3.1.3 Configuring the GPON Port.
Configure the QinQ rule based on PON port.

In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click VLAN
> More > Smart QinQ Configuration. Configure the smart QinQ function in the
right pane. For details, refer to 2.2.10 Configuring Smart QinQ Global Parameters.
Configure PON port protection.

a. In the ZXA10 C300 Rack window, right-click a PON card, and select PON
Protection Configuration. The PON Protection Configuration window is
displayed.
b. Configure the PON port protection parameters. For details, refer to 3.2.5
Configuring PON Port Protection.
9. Configure the ONU software updating task.
5-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
select System Management > ONU Software Scheduled Updating. The ONU
Software Scheduled Updating window is displayed.
b. Configure the ONU updating parameters. For details, refer to 1.6.4.1 Managing
ONU Software Updating Tasks.
5-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 6
FTTB ONU Configuration

Table of Contents
EPON FTTB Configuration .........................................................................................6-1
ZXA10 F822 Configuration .......................................................................................6-33
6.1 EPON FTTB Configuration

This section uses the ZXDSL 9806H (9806H for short) as an example to describe how to
configure EPON FTTB ONU services for an OLT on which smart QinQ is enabled. The
smart QinQ configuration is performed during OLT commissioning. For details, refer to
2.2.12 Configuring Smart QinQ.
9806H configuration includes the following:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Add an ONU
Authenticate an ONU
Create NEs
Configure global parameters
Configure an ADSL offline line profile
Configure services
6.1.1 Adding an EPON ONU

This procedure uses the ZXDSL 9806H (9806H for short) as an example to describe how
to add an EPON FTTB ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
The EPON ONU is offline.

The NetNumen U31 Topology Management window is open.
Steps
1. Open the ONU Manager window.
Use either of the following two ways to open the ONU Manager window.
l
Open Rack Diagram. In the displayed Rack window, right-click the specified
PON port and select ONU Manager.
In the Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE and select
ONU Manager. Set the card and port.
6-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
The ONU Manager window is used to manage the ONUs under the specified PON
port in a unified way.Figure 6-1 shows the ONU Manager window. For details, refer
to 3.3 ONU Management.
2. Click Add. The Add ONU dialog box is displayed, see Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Add ONU Dialog Box
3. Select ZXDSL9806H as the ONU Type. Configure the basic attributes, management
IP and route, maintenance parameters, and service level. For a description of some
parameters, refer to 3.3.1 Managing an ONU.
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
6.1.2 Authenticating an EPON ONU

This procedure uses ZXDSL 9806H (9806H for short) as an example to describe how to
authenticate an EPON FTTB ONU.
6-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 6 FTTB ONU Configuration
Steps
l
l
In the Rack window of the ZXA10 C300 NE, right-click the specified PON port and
select ONU Manager.
2. Manage the unauthenticated ONUs..

Click Unauthenticated ONU. The Unauthenticated ONU Configuration dialog box
Use either of the following two ways to Unauthenticated ODU Configuration dialog
box.
l
l
More > Unauthenticated ONU Configuration.
In the ONU Manager window, click the Authenticated ONU button
3. In the Unauthenticated ONU Configuration dialog box, select a 9806H device, and
click Add To. The Add ONU dialog box is displayed, see Figure 6-5.
6-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
4. Configure the basic attributes, management IP and route, maintenance parameters,

and service level.
For detailed parameter descriptions, refer to 3.2.7 Managing Unauthenticated ONUs.
End of Steps
6.1.3 NE Creation
For ONUs of the MDU type, some services are configured automatically through the SNMP
on the NMS. To configure all services for these ONUs, you need to create individual NEs.
The section includes the following:
l
l
l
Creating an NE on the NetNumen NMS

Creating an NE Through Topology Synchronization
Creating an NE Through Topology Deployment
6.1.3.1 Manually Creating an NE on the NetNumen NMS

This procedure describes how to manually create a 9806H NE on the NetNumen NMS.
Prerequisite
The data configuration on OLT is complete.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the group and select Create Object
> Add Wireline NE. The ManagementAdd dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the ZXDSL9806H NE type from the left pane. Configure the parameters on the
Basic tab in the right pane.
3. Click Add to create a 9806H NE.
6-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
4. Click Close.
End of Steps
6.1.3.2 Creating an NE Through Topology Synchronization

This procedure describes how to create a 9806H NE through topology synchronization.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, right-click the ZXA10
C300 NE, and select ONU Manager. The ONU Manager window is displayed.
2. Select the card and port. Click Update MDU Topology. The Update MDU Topology
Node dialog box is displayed, see Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Update MDU Topology Node Dialog Box
3. Select ZTE-9806. Set the Read/Write Community. You can select Using the Default
Value, Same as OLT, or Customized as required.
4. Select Add NE Topology Node to Specified Group and click
to select a group.
For a description of the parameters in the Update MDU Topology Node dialog box,
refer to 3.3.5 Synchronizing the MDUs to the Main Topology.
5. Click Start to add the 9806H NE to the specified group.
End of Steps
6.1.3.3 Creating an NE Through Topology Deployment

This procedure describes how to create a 9806H NE through topology deployment.
6-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
l
l
The MDU device has been registered and authenticated on the ZXA10 C300.
The management IP address the MDU device has been configured.
Context
The NetNumen NMS supports automatic ONU topology deployment.
Steps
More > MDU NE Node Auto-Discovery. The MDU NE Node Auto-Discovery dialog
box is displayed, see Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 MDU NE Node Auto-Discovery Dialog Box
2. Click Yes.
Figure 6-8 shows the topology deployment of ONUs.
6-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-8 ONU Topology Deployment
Related Tasks
To configure the ONU topology deployment function in the NetNumen NMS, perform the
following steps:
i.
Open the auto-deployment configuration file (.\netnumen\ems\ums-server\pro

cs\ppus\an.ppu\an-is.pmu\pon-common\an-pon-common.par\conf\anis-pon-onudeploy-conf.xml).
ii.
Modify the parameters as illustrated in the red frames. Table 6-1 describes the
parameters.
Table 6-1 Parameters for MDU NE Node Auto-Discovery Configuration
Parameters
Description
adminstatus
1: Enables ONU topology deployment.
2: Disables ONU topology deployment (default).
1: Gets topology data from the database (default,
datasource
recommended).
l
2: Gets topology data from the NE.
3: Gets topology data from the database and NE in

sequence.
6-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameters
Description
communitymode
1: Sets read/write community from the configuration file

(default).
2: Sets read/write community from the OLT NE (the

read/write community in the configuration file is invalid).
namerule
onuName: The ONU node is named according to the ONU

name (default).
onu IP: The ONU node is named according to its

management IP address.
voipDomain: The ONU node is named according to its

VoIP domain name.
modifyCurrNeNameFlag
1: If the ONU already exists in the topology before the

deployment, its name is not modified after the deployment
(default).
2: If the ONU already exists in the topology before the

deployment, it is renamed according to the namerule after
the deployment.
iii. Save the data.

End of Steps
6.1.4 Global Parameter Configuration

l
l
l
l
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Configuring
Time Management
a Trap Server
a CLI User
the SNMP Community
6.1.4.1 Configuring Time Management

The Command Line Interface (CLI) log and alarms of a 9806H NE need to use the system
time. This procedure describes how to configure time management.
Prerequisite
l
l
The data configuration on tne OLT is complete.

The 9806H NE is synchronized to the topology graph.
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the 9806H NE and select System
Management > Time Management. The Time Management window is displayed,
see Figure 6-9.
6-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-9 Time Management Window
2. Configure the related parameters.

Generally, the SNTP server IP uses the IP address of the network management server.
3. Click Apply to complete the configuration.
Relate Tasks
You can perform the following steps to configure the time of NEs in batches.
i.
Click Batch Configuration. The NE Time Batch Configuration window is displayed,

see Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10 NE Time Batch Configuration Window
6-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
iii. Click Set. The NE Time Batch Configuration Window window is displayed, see
Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-11 NE Time Batch Configuration Window
iv. Select the NEs.

v.
Click Start to configure the time of the selected NEs in batches.

End of Steps
6.1.4.2 Configuring a Trap Server

A trap server is used to report the alarms of an NE to the network management system.
The network management system can manage the NE according to the alarms. This
procedure describes how to configure a trap server on a 9806H NE.
Prerequisite
l
l
The data configuration on tne OLT is complete.

Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the 9806H NE and select System
Management > Trap Server. The Trap Server window is displayed, see Figure 6-12.
6-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-12 Trap Server Window
Note:
If you select Apply to NEs, the trap server is applied to all NEs.
2. Click Add. The Add Trap Server dialog box is displayed, see Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13 Add Trap Server Dialog Box
3. Configure the trap server parameters.

Generally, the Trap Server IP uses the IP address of the network management server.
4. Click OK to go back to the Trap Server window.
5. Click Close.
End of Steps
6-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
6.1.4.3 Configuring a CLI User

This procedure describes how to configure a CLI user on a 9806H NE. After a CLI user is
configured, the CLI user can log in to the 9806H NE and perform operations.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the 9806H NE, and select System
Management > CLI User Configuration. The CLI User Configuration window is
Figure 6-14 CLI User Configuration Window
Note:
If you select Batch Add, the configuration is applied to NEs in batches.
2. Create a CLI user or modify a CLI user.

Table 6-2 lists the operations on a CLI users.
6-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 6-2 Operations on a CLI User

Operation
Steps
Create a CLI user.
i.
In the CLI User Configuration window, click Add. The

Add CLI User dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Set the user name, the password, and the access level.
iii. Click OK to confirm.

Modify a CLI user.
i.
In the CLI User Configuration window, click Modify. The

Modify CLI User dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Modify the password.
iii. Click OK to confirm.

Delete a CLI user.
i.
In the CLI User Configuration window, select a CLI user

and click Delete.
ii.
The Question dialog box is displayed.
iii. Click Yes to confirm.
3. Click OK to go back to the CLI User Configuration window.

4. Click Close.
End of Steps
6.1.4.4 Configuring the SNMP Community

This procedure describes how to configure the SNMP community on a 9806H NE. The read
community/write community needs to be configured the same as the read community/write
community which is configured on the NE. Otherwise, the network management system
cannot communicate with the NE.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click a 9806H NE, and select System
Management > SNMP Community Configuration.
The SNMP Community
6-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-15 SNMP Community Configuration Window
Note:
You can click Batch Create to create SNMP community on multiple NEs or click Batch
Delete to delete SNMP community from multiple NEs.
2. Click Create. The Create SNMP Community dialog box is displayed, see Figure
6-16.
Figure 6-16 Create SNMP Community Dialog Box
Note:
It is recommended to select Set as NMS Read Community. If not, the NMS cannot
manage the NE.
6-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Click OK to go back to the SNMP Community Configuration window.

4. Click Close.
End of Steps
6.1.5 Configuring an ADSL Offline Line Profile

This procedure describes how to configure an ADSL offline line profile and apply it.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. On the menu bar of the Topology Management window, select Configuration >
Access Network Offline Profiles > ADSL Offline Line Profile. The ADSL Offline
Line Profile window is displayed, see Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 ADSL Offline Line Profile Window
6-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
The ADSL offline line profile can be used to configure NEs in batches. The available
operations are described as follow:
l
Apply: Apply the ADSL offline profile to NEs. If the NE already has a profile
which has the same name as this profile, you need to modify the parameters in
the profile.
Delete: Delete the profile which already exists. However, if the profile is being
used on a port, this profile cannot be deleted.
Replace: Replace the profile which is already applied to ports with another profile.
3. Click Create.
End of Steps
6.1.6 Service Configuration

l
l
l
Configuring the Broadband Service

Configuring the Multicast Service
Configuring the VoIP Service
6.1.6.1 Configuring the Broadband Service

This procedure describes how to configure the broadband service on a 9806H.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
l
The
The
The
The
data configuration on OLT is complete.

9806H management channel is configured.
9806H NE is synchronized to the topology graph.
9806H line configuration profile is configured.
Configuration Data
Table 6-3 lists the configuration data of the 9806H broadband service.
Table 6-3 9806H Broadband Service Configuration Data
Item
Data
VLAN ID
20012024
Uplink port
5/1
Service port
4/124
Line profile
2M.PRF
6-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Item
Data
PVC
8:81
Steps
1. Configure port VLANs.
a. In the Topology Management window, double-click the 9806H NE. The Rack
b. Right-click the broadband service card and select Port VLAN Configuration. The
Port VLAN Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 6-18.
Figure 6-18 Port VLAN Configuration Window
c. Click Modify. The Port VLAN Configuration dialog box is displayed

d. Configure the parameters, see Figure 6-19.
6-17
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-19 Port VLAN Configuration Dialog Box
Table 6-4 describers the parameters in the Port VLAN Configuration dialog box.
Table 6-4 Parameter Description for Port VLAN Configuration
Parameter
Description
Start/End
The start slot/port and the end slot/port.
Start VLAN ID
The first VLAN ID in batch configuration.
Increase By One
Select Yes from the drop-down list to configure

VLANs in batches.
Specify Uplink Ports Bound to VLAN
Select the specified Uplink Port to bind the uplink
(Tagged)
port to VLANs in batches.
e. Click Set to bind VLAN in batches.

2. Configure the DSL parameters in batches.
a. In the Rack window, right-click the broadband subscriber card and select DSL
Ports Batch Configuration. The DSL Ports Batch Configuration window is
displayed.
b. Configure parameters, see Figure 6-20.
6-18
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-20 DSL Ports Batch Configuration Window
Table 6-5 describers the parameters in the DSL Ports Batch Configuration dialog
box.
Table 6-5 Parameter Description for DSL Ports Batch Configuration
Parameter
Description
Start/End
The start slot/port and the end slot/port
Select the Administrative Status check box and

select Enable from the drop-down list.
Trap Enable
Select the Trap Enable check box and select Enable

from the drop-down list.
Configure Line
Select a DSL line profile or DSL offline profile.
PVID
c. Click Set.
3. Save the configuration data.
a. In the Topology Management window, right-click the 9806H NE and select Save
Configuration Data. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.
b. Click Yes to save the configuration data to the flash.
End of Steps
6.1.6.2 Configuring the Multicast Service

This procedure describes how to configure the multicast service on a 9806H.
6-19
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The 9806H management channel is configured.
Configuration Data
Table 6-6 lists the configuration data of the 9806H multicast service.
Table 6-6 9806H Multicast Service Configuration Data
Item
Data
Multicast VLAN ID
500
Multicast protocol
IGMP Snooping
Uplink port
5/1
Service port
2/1
Multicast groups
224.1.1.1224.1.1.3
Steps
1. Configure IPTV global parameters.
a. In the Topology Management window, double-click the 9806H NE. The Rack
b. Right-click the main control card and select IPTV Management > IGMP Global
Configuration. The IGMP Configuration window is displayed.
c. Select Enable from the IGMP Status drop-down list and Snooping from the
Working Mode drop-down list, see Figure 6-21.
6-20
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-21 IGMP Configuration Window
d. Click Set.
2. Configure the static VLAN and bind ports.
a. In the Rack window of the 9806H NE, right-click the broadband subscriber card
and select Port VLAN Configuration. The Port VLAN Configuration window is
displayed.
b. Click Modify. The Port VLAN Configuration dialog box is displayed. Configure
the parameters, see Figure 6-22.
c. Click Set to bind the VLAN.

6-21
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Configure the service port status and PVID.

a. In the Rack window of the 9806H NE, right-click the broadband subscriber card
and select ADSL Management > PVC Configuration. The PVC Config window
is displayed.
b. Select the port to be modified and click Query. The query result is displayed in
the bottom part of the dialog box.
c. Select the record to be modified, and click Modify. The Modify PVC dialog box
is displayed.
d. Configure parameters, see Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 Modify PVC Dialog Box
e. Click OK.
4. Open the Multicast VLAN Registration window .
In the Rack window of the 9806H NE, right-click the main control card and select IPTV
Management > Multicast VLAN Registration. The Multicast VLAN Registration
6-22
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-24 Multicast VLAN Registration Dialog Box
5. Configure the multicast VLAN information.

a. In the left pane of the Multicast VLAN Registration window, select New.
b. On the Basic tab, configure the parameters, see Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 Multicast VLAN Registration (Basic Tab)
c. Click Add.
6. Configure the MVLAN source.
6-23
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. In the left pane of the Multicast VLAN Registration window, select MVLAN 500.
b. On the Channel IP tab, click Add. The MVR ConfigurationAdd Group dialog
box is displayed.
c. Configure the parameters, see Figure 6-26.
Figure 6-26 MVR Configuration Add Group Dialog Box
d. Click OK.
7. Configure the MVLAN source port.
a. In the Multicast VLAN Registration window, select the Source Port tab, see
Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27 Multicast VLAN Registration Dialog BoxSource Port Tab
b. Select the specified service port and click Bind.

6-24
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
8. Configure the MVLAN receiving port.

i.
In the 9806H Rack window, right-click the broadband subscriber card, and select
IPTV Management > Multicast VLAN Registration. The Multicast VLAN
Registration window is displayed, see Figure 6-28.
Figure 6-28 Multicast VLAN Registration
On the Receive Port tab, select the receiving port, and click Bind.
a. In the Topology Management window, right-click the 9806H NE and select Save
b. Click OK to save the configuration data to the flash.
End of Steps
6.1.6.3 Configuring the VoIP Service

This procedure describes how to configure the VoIP service on a 9806H.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
l
The
The
The
The

9806H management channel is configured.
9806H NE is synchronized to the topology graph.
9806H Rack window is open.
Configuration Data
Table 6-7 lists the configuration data of the 9806H VoIP service.
6-25
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 6-7 9806H VoIP Service Configuration Data

Item
Data
VoIP service VLAN ID
200
Service port
2/148
MG
Service IP: 10.63.174.165
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 10.63.174.254
IP address: 10.66.22.1
Protocol: H.248
Registration mode: IPv4
User TID: USER000USER047 (default)
IPS (RTP) TID: RTP000RTP047
MGC
Voice resource
Steps
1. Configure the VLAN uplink port of the VoIP service.
a. In the Rack window of the 9806H NE , right-click the main control card and select
Port VLAN Configuration. The Port VLAN Configuration window is displayed.
b. Click Modify. The Port VLAN Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Figure 6-29 Port VLAN Configuration Dialog BoxBinding VoIP VLAN
d. Click Set.
2. Configure the VoIP service VLAN IP address.
a. Double-click the 9806H NE. The Rack window is displayed.
b. Right-click the main control card and select System Management > Static
Subnet. The Subnet Configuration window is displayed.
6-26
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Click Create. The Add Subnet dialog box is displayed.

d. Configure the parameters, see Figure 6-30.
Figure 6-30 Add Subnet Dialog Box
Note:
The VoIP subnet is used for VoIP service.
e. Click OK.
3. Configure the VoIP route.
a. In the Rack window of the 9806H NE, right-click the main control card and select
System Management > Static Route. The Route Configuration window is
displayed.
b. Click Create. The Create Static Route dialog box is displayed.
6-27
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-31 Create Static Route Dialog Box
d. Click OK.
4. (Optional) Configure the MG.
Note:
When you configure the VoIP service VLAN IP address, the IP address is automatically
set to the IP address of the MG.
a. In the Rack window of the 9806H NE, right-click the narrowband subscriber card
and select Voice Service Management. The Voice Configuration Management
Figure 6-32 Voice Service Management Window
6-28
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Click MG Configuration. The MG Configuration dialog box is displayed, see

Figure 6-33.
Figure 6-33 Modify MG Dialog Box
c. Set the parameters and click Apply.

5. Configure the MGC.
b. Click MGC Configuration. The MGC dialog box is displayed.
c. Select the default MGC, and click Modify.
displayed.
The Modify MGC dialog box is
d. Modify the parameters, see Figure 6-34.
6-29
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-34 Modify MGC Dialog Box
e. Click OK.
6. (Optional) configure the users TIDs.
Note:
If the users TID is the same as the default value, you can skip this step.
and select Port Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed.
b. (Optional) delete TIDs.
i.
Click Delete Termination ID. The Delete Termination ID dialogue box.
ii.
Configure parameters, see Figure 6-35.
6-30
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-35 Delete Termination ID Dialog Box
iii. Click OK to return to the Port Manager window.

iv. Click Set Termination ID Prefix. The Set Termination ID Prefix dialog box
is displayed
v.
Set the Termination ID prefix, see Figure 6-36.

Figure 6-36 Set Termination ID Prefix Dialog Box
c. Click OK.
7. Configure IPS resource.
b. Click the Advanced button and then select VoIP Resource Configuration from
the list. The VoIP Resource window is displayed, see Figure 6-37
6-31
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-37 VoIP Resource Window
c. (Optional) Click TID Delete. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, and then click
OK.
Note:
If you want to modify a TID, delete it first and then set the new TID.
d. Click TID Create. The Set TID Prefix dialog box is displayed.
e. Configure parameters, see Figure 6-38, and then click OK.
Figure 6-38 Set TID Prefix Dialog Box
8. Query the VoIP registration status.

In the 9806H rack window, right-click the narrowband subscriber card and select VoIP
Resource Statistic > H248 Performance Statistics to query the VoIP registration
status.
6-32
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, right-click the

9806H NE and select Save Configuration Data. A dialog box is displayed for
your confirmation.
b. Click Yes to save the configuration data to the flash.
End of Steps
6.2 ZXA10 F822 Configuration

The section includes the following:
l
l
l
l
Authenticating an ONU
NE Creation
Global Parameter Configuration
Service Configuration
6.2.1 Adding a GPON ONU

This procedure uses ZXA10 F822 (F822 for short) as an example to describe how to add
a GPON FTTB ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
The GPON ONU is offline.

THe NetNumen U31 Topology Management window is open.
Steps
l
port in a unified way. Figure 6-39 shows the ONU Manager window. For details, refer
6-33
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Select F822 as the ONU Type. Configure the basic attributes, management IP
and route, maintenance parameters, and service level. For a description of some
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
6.2.2 Authenticating a GPON ONU

This procedure uses the ZXA10 F822 (F822 for short) as an example to describe how to
authenticate a GPON FTTB ONU.
6-34
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
l
l

The GPON ONU is online.
Context
The default F822 ONU type on the ZXA10 C300 is EPON ONU. For the operations of
creating an F822 GPON ONU type, refer to 3.2.1.1 Configuring ONU Type Profile.
Steps
Use either of the two following ways to open the ONU Manager window.
l
2. Manage the unauthenticated ONU.

In the ONU Manager window, click Unauthenticated ODU. The Unauthenticated
ODU Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 6-42.
6-35
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-42 Unauthenticated ODU Configuration Dialog Box
Use either of the following two ways to open the Unauthenticated ODU
Configuration dialog box.
l
l
In the ONU Manager window, click the Authenticated ONU button.
3. In the Unauthenticated ONU Configuration dialog box, select an F822 device, and

and service level.
End of Steps
6-36
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
6.2.3 NE Creation
Refer to 6.1.3 NE Creation.
6.2.4 Global Parameter Configuration

Refer to 6.1.4 Global Parameter Configuration.
6.2.5 Service Configuration

l
l
l
Configuring the Broadband Service

Configuring the Multicast Service
Configuring the VoIP Service
6.2.5.1 Configuring the Broadband Service

This procedure describes how to configure the broadband service on an F822.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
The F822 device is authenticated.

The F822 management channel is configured.
The F822 is synchronized to the topology graph.
Configuration Data
Table 6-8 lists the configuration data of the F822 broadband service.
Table 6-8 F822 Broadband Service Configuration Data
Item
Data
OLT service port
User bandwidth management unit
GEM port
OLT service channel
ONU port: gpon-onu_1/4/1:15
Service-port ID: 1
Virtual port ID: 1
T-CONT ID: 2
Bandwidth profile: default
GEM Port ID: 1
T-CONT ID: 2
Name: HSI
Service mode: internet
GEM Port ID: 1
Priority: 0
VLAN ID: 100
F822 service VLAN ID
10011024
F822 uplink port
3/1
6-37
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Item
Data
F822 user port
2/124
Steps
ONU Manager. The ONU Manager window is displayed, see Figure 6-44.
port in a unified way.
b. Click
to select a GPON card and a PON port. All ONUs under this PON port
are displayed, see Figure 6-45.
Figure 6-45 ONU Manager WindowQuery Result
2. Configure the T-CONT.

6-38
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. In the ONU Manager window, select an F822 NE.

b. From the Operations pane on the right, select Line Configurations > T-CONT
Configuration. The T-CONT window is displayed, see Figure 6-46.
Figure 6-46 T-CONT Window
c. Click Add. The Add T-CONT dialog box is displayed.

d. Configure the T-CONT parameters, and click
bandwidth profile, see Figure 6-47.
next to Bandwidth to select a
Figure 6-47 Add T-CONT Dialog Box
e. Click OK to go back to the Add T-CONT dialog box.

f. Click OK.
3. Configure the GEM port.
6-39
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. From the Operations pane on the right, select Line Configurations > GEM Port
Configuration. The GEM Port Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
6-48.
Figure 6-48 GEM Port Configuration Window
c. Click Add. The Add GEM Port dialog box is displayed

d. Configure the GEM port parameters, see Figure 6-49.
Figure 6-49 Add GEM Port Dialog Box
e. Click OK to go back to the GEM Port Configuration window.

6-40
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
4. Configure the service channel.

b. From the Operations pane on the right, select PON Service Configurations >
ONU Service. The ONU Service Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
6-50.
Figure 6-50 ONU Service Configuration Window
c. Click Add. The Add ONU Service dialog box is displayed

d. Configure the F822 broadband service channel, see Figure 6-51.
Figure 6-51 Add ONU Service Dialog Box
e. Click OK to go back to the ONU Service Configuration window.

6-41
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

b. From the Operations pane on the right, select Vport Service Configurations >
Service Port. The Service Port Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
6-52.
Figure 6-52 Service Port Configuration Window
c. Click New. The Add Service Port dialog box is displayed

d. Set the service port parameters. , see Figure 6-53. For detailed information about
the parameter settings, refer to 2.1 Configuring a Service Port.
Figure 6-53 Add Service Port Dialog Box
Note:
By default, the virtual port (vport) corresponds to GEM port one by one.
6-42
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
e. Click OK to go back to the Service Port Configuration window.

6. Bind ports to VLANs in batches.
a. In the Topology Management window, double-click the F22 NE. The Rack
b. Right-click the broadband subscriber card and select Port VLAN Configuration.
The Port VLAN Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 6-54.
c. Click Modify. The Port VLAN Configuration dialog box is displayed.

d. Configure the required parameters, see Figure 6-55.
Figure 6-55 Port VLAN Configuration Dialog BoxBinding VLANs in Batches
e. Click Set.
6-43
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
For a description of the parameters in the Port VLAN Configuration dialog box,
refer to Table 6-9.
Table 6-9 Parameter Description for Binding VLANs in Batches
Parameter
Description
Start/End
Start VLAN ID
The first VLAN ID for the batch configuration
Increase By One
Select Yes from the drop-down list to configure

VLAN IDs in batches.
Specify Uplink Ports to Bound to
Select the uplink port(s) to bind the VLANs in
VLAN
batches to the uplink port(s).
f. Click Set.
7. Configure the port PVIDs.
a. In the F822 Rack window, right-click the broadband subscriber card and select
Ethernet Port Batch Configuration. The Ethernet Port Batch Configuration
b. In the VLAN Parameter tab, set the port PVIDs, see Figure 6-56.
6-44
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-56 Ethernet Port Batch Configuration WindowVLAN Parameter Tab
For a description of the related parameters, refer to Table 6-10.

Table 6-10 Parameter Descriptions for Port PVID Configuration
Parameter
Description
CVID (C-Tag)
Type the start PVID and select Increase By One.
Port Selection
Select the slots and ports to be configured. All means that

the configuration is to be applied to all slots or ports.
c. Click Apply To NEs.

8. Enable the port administration status.
a. In the Ethernet Port Batch Configuration window, select the Other Parameter
tab.
6-45
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Select the Port Admin Status check box, and then select Enable from the
drop-down list, see Figure 6-57.
Figure 6-57 Ethernet Port Batch Configuration WindowOther Parameter Tab

a. In the Topology Management window, right-click the F822 NE and select Save
End of Steps
6.2.5.2 Configuring the Multicast Service

This procedure describes how to configure the multicast service on an F822.
Prerequisite
l
l
The GPON ONU is authenticated.

The multicast service is configured at the OLT side.
6-46
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Configuration Data
Table 6-11 lists the configuration data of the F822 multicast service.
Table 6-11 F822 Multicast Service Configuration Data
Item
Data
Multicast protocol
IGMP snooping
Multicast VLAN ID
500
Priority
Multicast group IP address
224.1.1.1224.1.1.3
Service port
Service-port ID: 1
Virtual port ID: 1
T-CONT ID: 1
GEM Port ID: 1
T-CONT ID: 1
Name: multicast
GEM port
Service channel
Service mode: iptv
GEM Port ID: 1
Priority: 5
VLAN ID: 500
500
F822 uplink port
3/1
F822 service port
2/1
Steps
a. Right-click the ZXA10 C300 NE and select ONU Manager. The ONU Manager
b. Click
6-47
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)


d. Configure the T-CONT parameters. Click
bandwidth profile. See Figure 6-60
6-48
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

f. Click Close.
6-61.
Figure 6-61 GEM Port Configuration Window
c. Click Add. The Add GEM Port dialog box is displayed.

6-49
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

6-63.
6-50
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Click Add. The Add ONU Service dialog box is displayed, see Figure 6-64.

a. In the ONU Manager window, select the F822 NE.
6-65.
6-51
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

d. Configure the service port parameters, see Figure 6-66. For detailed parameter
descriptions, refer to 2.1 Configuring a Service Port.
Note:

6. Configure IPTV global parameters.
6-52
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Right-click the uplink card and select IPTV Management > IGMP Global
Configuration. The IGMP Configuration window is displayed.
c. Select Enable from the IGMP Status drop-down list and Snooping from the
Working Mode drop-down list, see Figure 6-67.
Figure 6-67 IGMP Configuration Window
d. Click Set.
7. Bind the port to the VLAN.
a. In the Rack window of the F822 NE, right-click the broadband subscriber card
and select Port VLAN Configuration. The Port VLAN Configuration window is
6-53
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Click Modify. The Port VLAN Configuration dialog box is displayed. Bind the
user port 2/1 and uplink port 3/1 to VLAN 500, see Figure 6-69.
For a description of the parameters in the Port VLAN Configuration dialog box,
Table 6-12 Parameter Description for Binding VLANs in Batches
Parameter
Description
Start/End
Start VLAN ID
The first VLAN ID for the batch configuration
Increase By One
Select Yes from the drop-down list to configure VLAN IDs

in batches.
6-54
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Specify Uplink Ports to
Select the uplink port(s) to bind the VLANs in batches to
Bound to VLAN
the uplink port(s).
c. Click Set to bind the VLAN.

8. Configure the port PVID.
a. In the Rack window of the F822 NE, right-click the broadband subscriber card
and select Ethernet Port Batch Configuration. The Ethernet Port Batch
b. On the VLAN Parameter tab, configure the port VLANs in batches, see Figure
6-70.
Figure 6-70 Ethernet Port Batch Configuration WindowVLAN Parameter Tab
For a description of the related parameters, refer to Table 6-13.
6-55
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 6-13 Parameter Descriptions for Port PVID Configuration

Parameter
Description
CVID (C-Tag)
Type the start PVID and select Increase By One.
Port Selection
Select the slots and ports to be configured. All means that

the configuration is to be applied to all slots or ports.

9. Configure the basic MVLAN parameters.
a. In the Rack window of the F822 NE, right-click the broadband subscriber card and
select IPTV Management > Multicast VLAN Registration. The Multicast VLAN
Registration window is displayed.
b. Click Add. The Add MVLAN dialog box is displayed.
c. Configure the MVLAN parameters, see Figure 6-71.
Figure 6-71 Add MVLAN Dialog Box
10. Configure MVLAN source.

a. In the Multicast VLAN Registration window, select MVLAN 500, and click
Modify. The Modify MVLAN dialog box is displayed, see Figure 6-72.
6-56
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-72 Modify VLAN Dialog Box
b. Select the Group Address tab, and click Add. The MVR ConfigurationAdd
Group dialog box is displayed.
Figure 6-73 MVR Configuration Add Group Dialog Box
d. Click OK.
11. Configure the MVLAN receiving port.
6-57
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
a. In the Multicast VLAN Registration window, select the Receive Port tab,
and click Add. The MVR ConfigurationAdd Receiving Port dialog box is
Figure 6-74 MVR ConfigurationAdd Receiving Port Dialog Box (1)
b. Select the slot. In this task, select Shelf1_Slot2, and click Search. The ports are
listed.
c. Select port 1 and click OK, see Figure 6-75.
6-58
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-75 MVR ConfigurationAdd Receiving Port Dialog Box (2)
12. Configure the MVLAN source port.

a. In the Multicast VLAN Registration window, select the Source Port tab, and
click Add. The MVR ConfigurationAdd Source Port dialog box is displayed,
see Figure 6-76.
6-59
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-76 MVR ConfigurationAdd Source Port Dialog Box (1)
b. Select the slot. In this task, select Shelf1_Slot3, and click Search. The ports are
listed.
c. Select port 1 and click OK, see Figure 6-77.
6-60
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-77 MVR ConfigurationAdd Source Port Dialog Box (2)

End of Steps
6.2.5.3 Configuring the VoIP Service

This procedure describes how to configure the VoIP service on an F822.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
l
The
The
The
The
F822 is authenticated.
F822 management channel is configured.
F822 is synchronized to the topology graph.
data configuration on SS is complete.
Context
The F822 supports three VoIP protocols:
6-61
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
l
H.248
Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP)
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
The F822 does not support the three protocols simultaneously. There are different versions
of F822 that support each protocol.
This section takes the H.248 protocol as an example.
Configuration Data
Table 6-14 lists the configuration data of the F822 VoIP service.
Table 6-14 F822 VoIP Service Configuration Data
Item
Data
Service port
Service-port ID: 1
Virtual port ID: 1
User bandwidth management
T-CONT ID: 2
unit
GEM port
GEM Port ID: 1
T-CONT ID: 2
Name: voip-h248
Service mode: voip
GEM Port ID: 1
Priority: 7
VLAN ID: 301
IP address: 10.51.20.14
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 10.51.20.1
Media gateway controller
ID: 1
(MGC)
IP address: 10.51.60.25
Type: ZTE
User TID: USER000USER023
IPS TID: RTP/00000RTP/00023
OLT service channel
Media gateway (MG)
Voice resource
301
F822 service priority
F822 service port
1/1
F822 uplink port
3/1
Steps
6-62
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ONU Manager. The ONU Manager window is displayed, see Figure 6-78.
port in a unified way. For details, refer to 3.3 ONU Management.
b. Click
Figure 6-79 ONU Manager WindowQuery Result

6-63
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

d. Configure the T-CONT parameters, and click
bandwidth profile, see Figure 6-81.

f. Click OK.
Configuration. The GEM Port Configuration window is displayed.
6-64
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

6-83.
6-65
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Click Add. The Add ONU Service dialog box is displayed

e. Click OK to go back to the ONU Service Configuration window.

6-85.
6-66
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

d. Configure the service port parameters, see Figure 6-86. For detailed parameter
Note:

6. Configure the VLAN uplink port.
6-67
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Right-click the uplink card, and select Port VLAN Configuration, The Port VLAN
c. Select the port and click Modify. The Port VLAN Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
d. Configure the VLAN, see Figure 6-87.
e. Click Set.
7. Configure the VLAN IP address.
a. In the F822 Rack window, right-click the uplink card, and select System
Management > Static Subnet. The Static Subnet window is displayed.
b. Click Create. The Add Subnet dialog box is displayed.
6-68
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-88 Add Subnet Dialog Box
Note:
The VoIP subnet is used for VoIP service.
a. Click OK.
8. Configure the route.
a. In the F822 Rack window, right-click the uplink card, and select System
Management > Static Route. The Static Route window is displayed.
b. Click Create. The Create Static Route dialog box is displayed.
6-69
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-89 Create Static Route Dialog Box
d. Click OK.
9. (Optional) Configure the MG.
Note:
When you configure the VoIP service VLAN IP address, the IP address is automatically
set to the IP address of the MG.
a. In the 822 Rack window, right-click the narrowband subscriber card, and select
Voice Service Management. The Voice Configuration Management window is
Figure 6-90 Voice Configuration Management
b. Click MG Configuration. The MG Configuration dialog box is displayed.

6-70
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Configure the parameters on the Basic Attribute and Capability tabs, see Figure
6-91.
Figure 6-91 MG Configuration Dialog Box
10. Configure the MGC.

a. In the F822 Rack window, right-click the narrowband subscriber card, and select
Voice Service Management. The Voice Configuration Management window is
displayed.
b. Click MGC Configuration. The MGC window is displayed.
c. Select the default MGC and click Modify.
displayed.
The Modify MGC dialog box is
d. Modify the MGC IP address, see Figure 6-92.
6-71
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-92 Modify MGC Dialog Box
e. Click OK.
11. (Optional) Modify the subscriber TID.
Note:
If the users TID is the same as the default value, you can skip this step.
a. In the F822 Rack widow, right-click the narrowband subscriber card, and select
Port Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed, see Figure 6-93.
6-72
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-93 Port Manager
b. (Optional) Click Delete Termination ID. The Delete Termination ID dialog box is
displayed.
Figure 6-94 Delete Termination ID Dialog Box
d. Click OK.
e. Click Set Termination ID Prefix. The Set Termination ID Prefix dialog box is
displayed.
f. Configure the TID prefix parameters, see Figure 6-95.
6-73
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 6-95 Set Termination ID Prefix Dialog Box
g. Click OK.
12. Configure the IPS resource.
a. In the F822 Rack window, right-click the narrowband subscriber card, and Voice
Service Management. The Voice Configuration Management window is
displayed.
b. Click Advanced > VoIP Resource Configuration. The VOIP Resource window
Figure 6-96 VOIP Resource Window
c. (Optional) Click TID Delete. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Note:
If you want to modify a TID, delete it first and then set the new TID.
6-74
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
d. Click OK.
e. Click TID Create. The Set TID Prefix dialog box is displayed.
f. Set the TID prefix parameters, see Figure 6-97.
Figure 6-97 Set TID Prefix Dialog Box
g. Click OK.
13. Check the VoIP registration status.
i.
In the F822 Rack window, right-click the narrowband subscriber card, and
select VoIP Resource Statistics > H248 Performance Statistics. The H248
Performance Statistics dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Check the VoIP registration status.

End of Steps
6-75
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
6-76
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 7
ONU Pre-deployment
This procedure describes how to pre-deploy ONUs in batches. In actual network
deployment, before ONU device installation and physical connection, the ONUs can be
pre-deployed with required parameters and the logical topology.
Prerequisites
l
l
The profiles required in ONU pre-deployment are created on the OLT.

The macro and ActiveX controls are enabled in the Microsoft Office spreadsheet
program.
Steps
1. Create a PON pre-deployment file.
a. Open the Bulk Configure ONU.
More > Bulk Configure ONU. The Bulk Configure ONU window is displayed, see
Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Bulk Configure ONU Window
7-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Click Export Default Profile. The Export Default Profile dialog box is displayed,
see Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Export Default Profile Dialog Box
c.
Select the service type. Click

file, and then click OK.
to set the location for saving the exported
The following takes GPON as an example.

2. Set the parameters in the PON pre-deployment file.
a. Open the PON deployment file.
The default GPON ONU pre-deployment file is GPON ONU_Bulk_Config(zh).
xls.
b. In the Data Layout worksheet, enter the basic ONU parameters, see Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3 Basic ONU Information
Table 7-1 describes some parameters in the Data Layout worksheet.

Table 7-1 Data Layout Parameters
Parameter
Description
ONU ID
Specifies an available ONU ID under the

corresponding PON port.
ONU Type
Specifies an ONU type. The corresponding

ONU type profile must be configured on the
OLT.
CLI Profile Name
Specifies the name of the CLI profile to be

used during ONU service configuration.
c.
In the CLI Command worksheet, edit the service configuration profile, see Figure
7-4.
7-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 7 ONU Pre-deployment
Figure 7-4 CLI Command Profile
Note:
For information about the precautions for editing CLI command script, refer to the
Use Guide worksheet.
3. Configure ONUs in batches.

a. In the Bulk Configure ONU window, select the GPON card and PON port.
b. Click Import. Select the configured PON pre-deployment spreadsheet.
The system automatically imports the ONU information into the ONU Bulk
Information area, see Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 ONU Bulk Information
c.
Click Bulk Configure.

corresponding services.
The system starts creating ONUs and configuring
After the configuration is completed, the ONU configuration information is

7-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 7-6 Bulk ONU Configuration Result
4. (Optional) In the ONU Manager window, select the card and PON port. Verify that the
created ONUs are displayed, see Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7 Configured ONUs
7-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 8
FTTB ONU Service

Provisioning
Table of Contents
9806H Service Provisioning........................................................................................8-1
F822 Service Provisioning..........................................................................................8-8
8.1 9806H Service Provisioning

l
l
l
Provisioning the 9806H Broadband Service

Provisioning the 9806H Multicast Service
Provisioning the 9806H VoIP Service
8.1.1 Provisioning the 9806H Broadband Service

This procedure describes how to provision the 9806H broadband service.
Prerequisite
l
l

The data configuration on ONU is complete.
Steps
1. In the Rack window of the 9806H, right-click an ADSL subscriber card and select Port
Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed, see Figure 8-1.
8-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 8-1 Port Manager Window
2. Perform any of the following operations:

l View port status.
Table 8-1 lists the indicator statuses of the ADSL port.
Table 8-1 ADSL Port Indicator Status
Indicator
Running Status
Administration Status
Online
Enabled
Offline
Enabled
Online/Offline
Disabled
Enable a port.
Select a port from the port list, and then click Enable to enable the port.
Configure port parameters.

i.
Select the enabled port, and then click DSL Line. The Line Parameter
Config dialog box is displayed, see Figure 8-2.
8-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 8 FTTB ONU Service Provisioning
Figure 8-2 Line Parameter Config Dialog Box
ii.
l
Set the line profile, alarm profile, and transmission mode templates, and then
click OK.
Set user information.

i.
In the Port Manager window, select a port.
ii.
Click User. The User Management dialog box is displayed, see Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 User Management Dialog Box
iii. Set the user information, and then click Create to complete the configuration.
8-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
The user management information is used for fuzzy query on users.
End of Steps
8.1.2 Provisioning the 9806H Multicast Service

This procedure describes how to provision the 9806H multicast service.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. In the Rack window of the 9806H, right-click an ADSL subscriber card and select Port
Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed, see Figure 8-4.

l View port status.
Table 8-2 lists the indicator statuses of the ADSL port.
Table 8-2 ADSL Port Indicator Statuses
Indicator
Running Status
Online
Enabled
Offline
Enabled
Online/Offline
Disabled
8-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Enable a port.

i.
Select an enabled port, and then click DSL Line. The Line Parameter Config
Figure 8-5 Line Parameter Config Dialog Box
ii.
l
Set the line profile, alarm profile, and transmission mode templates, and then
click OK.

i.
ii.
8-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
iii. Set the user information, and then click Create to complete the configuration.
Note:
Configure IGMP administration parameters.

i.
In the Port Manager window, click the Advanced button and then click
Advanced Configuration. The Advanced Config dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Configure the IGMP administration parameters, and then click Set.
End of Steps
8.1.3 Provisioning the 9806H VoIP Service

This procedure describes how to provision the 9806H VoIP service.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. In the Rack window of the 9806H,, right-click a VoIP card and select Port Manager.
The Port Manager window is displayed, see Figure 8-7.
8-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

l View port status.
View the port status and configure the port parameters. Table 8-3 lists the VoIP
port statuses.
Table 8-3 VoIP Port Statuses
Port Status
Description
Circuit Block Status
Block or unblock
Communication Status
Work or not
User Lockout Status
Idle or not
Idle Status
Idle or not
Termination ID
Port Termination ID
Self Exchange Phone
Exchange through AG instead of SS
Number
Fax Mode
Default: T.30
User Information
User information which is used for fuzzy query

i.
ii.
Click User. The User Management dialog box is displayed.
iii. Set the user information, and then lick Create to complete the configuration.
8-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
End of Steps
8.2 F822 Service Provisioning

l
l
l
Provisioning the F822 Broadband Service

Provisioning the F822 Multicast Service
Provisioning the F822 VoIP Service
8.2.1 Provisioning the F822 Broadband Service

This procedure describes how to provision the F822 broadband service.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. In the Rack window of the F822, right-click the Ethernet card and select Port Manager.
2. Perform any of the following operations.

8-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
View port status.

View the information on the Configured Speed and Configured Duplex
columns. Table 8-4 lists the indicator statuses of the LAN port.
Table 8-4 Indicator Statuses of the LAN Port
Indicator
Running Status
Online
Enabled
Offline
Enabled
Online/Offline
Disabled
Enable a port.

i.
Select the enabled port, and then click Port Configuration. The Ethernet
Port Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 8-9.
ii.
l
Set the parameters, such as QoS traffic profile, upstream and downstream
parameters, and then click Set.
Configure user information.

8-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
i.
From the port list, select a port.
ii.
Note:
iii. Set the user information, and then click Create.

End of Steps
8.2.2 Provisioning the F822 Multicast Service

This procedure describes how to provision the F822 multicast service.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. In the Rack window of the F822, right-click the Ethernet card and select Port Manager.
8-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

l View port status.
View the information on the Configured Speed and Configured Duplex
columns.Table 8-5 lists the indicator statuses of the LAN port.
Table 8-5 Indicator Statuses of the LAN Port
Indicator
Running Status
Online
Enabled
Offline
Enabled
Online/Offline
Disabled
Enable a port.

i.
Select the enabled port, and then click Port Configuration. The Ethernet
Port Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 8-12.
8-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
On the Speed tab, select the QoS traffic profile name, and set the upstream
and downstream parameters.
iii. On the Other tab, set the IGMP administration parameters, and then click
Set.
l

i.
From the port list, select a port.
ii.
8-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
iii. Set the user information, and then click Create.

End of Steps
8.2.3 Provisioning the F822 VoIP Service

This procedure describes how to provision the F822 VoIP service.
Prerequisite
l
l

Steps
1. In the Rack window of the F822, right-click a VoIP card and select Port Manager. The
Port Manager window is displayed, see Figure 8-14.
8-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

l View port status.
View the port status and configure the port parameters.Table 8-6 lists the VoIP
port statuses.
Table 8-6 VoIP Port Statuses
Port Status
Description
Block or unblock
Work or not
User Lockout Status
Idle or not
Idle Status
Idle or not
Termination ID
Port Termination ID
Self Exchange Phone
Exchange through AG instead of SS
Number
Fax Mode
Default: T.30
User Information
User information which is used for fuzzy query

i.
ii.
Click User. The User Management dialog box is displayed.
iii. Set the user information, and then lick Create to complete the configuration.
8-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
End of Steps
8-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
8-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 9
FTTH ONU Service

Provisioning
Table of Contents
EPON ONU Service Provisioning ...............................................................................9-1
GPON ONU Service Provisioning.............................................................................9-25
9.1 EPON ONU Service Provisioning

9.1.1 Adding an EPON ONU
add an EPON FTTH ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
The EPON ONU is offline.

Steps
l
9-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Select ZTE-F420 as the ONU Type. Configure the basic attributes, management IP
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
9.1.2 Authenticating an EPON ONU

authenticate an EPON FTTH ONU.
9-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 9 FTTH ONU Service Provisioning
Prerequisite
Steps
l
l
In the Rack window of the ZXA10 C300 NE, right-click the specified PON port and
select ONU Manager.
2. In the ONU Manager window, click Unauthenticated ONU. The Unauthenticated

ONU Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-4.
9-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Use either of the following two ways to open the Unauthenticated ODU
l
l
3. In the Unauthenticated ONU Configuration dialog box, select an F420 device, and

and service level.
End of Steps
9-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
9.1.3 Provisioning the Broadband Service

provision the EPON ONU broadband service.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The OLT uplink interface is added to the specified VLAN.
The EPON ONU is authenticated.
Configuration Data
Item
Data
VLAN ID of the OLT uplink interface
300
OLT service port
ONU interface: epon-onu_1/5/1:1
Service-port ID: 1
Virtual port ID: 1
200
F420 service port
F420 VLAN mode
Tagged
Steps
a. In the Topology Management window, double-click the ZXA10 C300. The Rack
b. Right-click the specified PON port, and select ONU Manager. The ONU Manager
c. Select an EPON card and a port. All EPON ONUs under this port are displayed,
see Figure 9-6.
9-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
2. Bind the MAC address.
Note:
If the EPON ONU authentication mode is MAC, you can skip this step.

b. From the Operations pane on the right, select Physical Configurations > MAC
Binding. A dialog box is displayed.
c. Click OK.
3. Configure encryption.
b. From the Operations pane on the right, select PON Service Configuration >
Advanced Configurations > ONU Encrypt Configuration. The ONU Encrypt
Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-7.
9-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-7 ONU Encrypt Configuration Dialog Box
c. Set the encryption mode, LLID No, and encryption status, and then click OK.
4. Configure the port VLAN.
Select the F420 from the ONU list. From the Operations pane on the right, select
PON Service Configurations > VLAN and Multicast Configuration. The VLAN
and Multicast Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-8.
9-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-8 VLAN and Multicast Configuration Dialog Box
a. Configure the ONU user VLAN parameters.

On the VLAN Configuration tab, set the VLAN Mode to Tag, enter 200 in the
VLAN text box, select Add ONU NNI to this VLAN, and click Apply, see Figure
9-9.
9-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-9 VLAN and Multicast Configuration Dialog BoxVLAN Configuration

Tab
b. Configure the EPON-ONU interface VLAN parameters.

i.
next to Tagged VLAN. The VLAN Binding/Unbinding dialog box

Click
Figure 9-10 VLAN Binding/Unbinding Dialog Box
ii.
Enter 200 in the VLAN List text box, and then click Bind.
5. Configure the service port.

b. From the Operations pane on the right, select Vport Service Configuration >
ServicePort. The Service Port Configuration window is displayed.
d. In the left pane, select Tagged. Configure the parameters in the right pane, see
Figure 9-11.
9-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
e. Click OK.
End of Steps
9.1.4 Provisioning the Multicast Service

provision the multicast service on an EPON ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
l
The
The
The
The

OLT uplink interface is added to the specified VLAN.
multicast parameters are configured.
EPON ONU is authenticated.
Configuration Data
Item
Data
OLT uplink port VLAN ID
201
OLT service port
Service-port ID: 2
Virtual port ID: 1
Multicast VLAN ID
200
IGMP protocol
IGMP snooping
F420 service port
2
9-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Item
Data
F420 VLAN mode
Tagged
Steps
a. In the Topology Management window, double-click the ZXA10 C300 NE. The
Rack window is displayed.
b. Right-click the PON port and select ONU Manager. The ONU Manager window
is displayed.
c. Select an EPON card and a port, all EPON ONUs under this port are displayed,
see Figure 9-12.
Note:

c. Click OK.
9-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
4. Configure the port VLAN.
Select the F420 from the ONU list. From the Operations pane on the right, select
PON Service Configurations > VLAN and Multicast Configuration. The VLAN
and Multicast Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-14.
9-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-14 VLAN and Multicast Configuration Dialog Box
a. Configure the ONU user VLAN parameters.

On the VLAN Configuration tab, set VLAN Mode to Tag, enter 201 in the VLAN
text box, select Add ONU NNI to this VLAN, and click Apply, see Figure 9-15.
9-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-15 VLAN and Multicast Configuration Dialog BoxVLAN Configuration

Tab
b. Configure the EPON-ONU interface VLAN parameters.

i.
next to Tagged VLAN. The VLAN Binding/Unbinding dialog box

Click
ii.
Enter 201 in the VLAN List text box, and then click Bind.
5. Configure the multicast parameters.

In the VLAN and Multicast Configuration dialog box, select the Multicast
Configuration tab.
a. Configure the multicast protocol.
Configure the parameters, see Figure 9-17.
9-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-17 Multicast Configuration Dialog BoxMulticast Configuration Tab
Table 9-3 describes the parameters on the Multicast Configuration tab.

Table 9-3 Multicast Configuration Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Multicast Protocol
Select IGMP Snooping.

l
If IGMP Snooping is selected, the ONU must use the

Snooping protocol.
If IGMP Proxy is selected, the ONU can use any

protocol.
Fast Leave Enabling
Use the default value Enable, meaning that the ONU

leaves the multicast group immediately after this function
is provisioned.
b. Configure the multicast receiving port.

i.
Click
next to Multicast VLAN. The Multicast VLAN Configuration
Figure 9-18 Multicast VLAN Configuration Dialog Box
9-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
For information about multicast VLAN configurations, refer to 2.3.4

Configuring the Multicast VLAN
ii.
In the Available Multicast VLAN list, select 201, and click

. Then,
click OK. The receiving port is added to the corresponding multicast VLAN in
the Receive Port area, see Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 Receive Port Area
c. Configure the multicast port.

i.
next to Multicast VLAN.

In the multicast port list, select port 2, and click
The Multicast VLAN Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-20.
Figure 9-20 Multicast VLAN Configuration Dialog Box
ii.
In the Available Multicast VLAN list, select 201, and click

click OK. Tje VLAN port is added to the multicast VLAN list.
. Then,
iii. Set the maximum number of multicast groups, and select Stripe from the
VLAN Tag Stripping drop-down list, see Figure 9-21.
9-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-21 Multicast Port Area
Note:
When the port is in stripped tag state, the multicast packets sent from the port
are untagged packets.

a. Select the F420 in the ONU list.
ServicePort. The Service Port Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
9-22.

d. In the left pane, select Tagged. Configure the service port parameters in the right
9-17
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
e. Click OK.
End of Steps
9.1.5 Provisioning the VoIP Service

provision the VoIP service on an EPON ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The EPON ONU is authenticated.
Configuration Data
Item
Data
VoIP serviceVLAN ID
46
OLT service port
Service-port ID: 4
Virtual port ID: 1
VoIP IP profile
Default
VoIP VLAN profile
Default
VoIP protocol profile (H.248)
H.248
9-18
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Item
Data
VoIP fax profile
Default
User TID
TID00TID01 (default)
RTP TID
RTP00000RTP00001
Steps
a. In the Topology Management window, double-click the ZXA10 C300. The Rack
b. Right-click the PON port, and select ONU Manager. The ONU Manager window
is displayed.
c. Select an EPON card and a port. All EPON ONUs under this port are displayed,
see Figure 9-24.
Note:

c. Click OK.
9-19
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

4. Bind the VoIP service VLAN.
a. In the ONU Manager window, select an F420 from the ONU list.
VLAN and Multicast Configuration. The VLAN and Multicast Configuration
c. On the VLAN Configuration tab, click
next to Tagged VLAN. The VLAN
Binding/Unbinding dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-26.
d. Enter 46 in the VLAN List text box.

e. Click Bind.
5. Apply the VoIP profiles to the F420.
9-20
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. From the Operations pane on the right, select PON Service Configurations
> VoIP Configurations > VoIP Profile Application Configuration. The VOIP
Profile Application Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-27.
Figure 9-27 VoIP Profile Application Configuration Dialog Box
c. Select the VoIP profiles, and then click OK.

6. (Optional) Configure the VoIP IP address.
> VoIP Configurations > VoIP Connect Configuration. The VoIP Connect
9-21
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-28 VoIP Connect Configuration Dialog Box
c. Configure the parameters as required.

Table 9-5 describes the parameters in the VoIP Connect Config dialog box.
Table 9-5 VoIP Connect Configuration Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Card
The slot for the VoIP card. For F420, the Card is 1.
IP Address
Consistent with the IP address of the corresponding node

assigned by the SS
l
If IP Address Mode in the VoIP profile is Static, it is

necessary to configure the IP address.
If IP Address Mode in the VoIP profile is DHCP or

PPPoE, it is unnecessary to configure the IP address.
Configure the EPON ONU VoIP IP profile, refer to 3.2.1.22

Configuring an EPON VoIP IP Profile.
d. Click OK.
7. Configure the domain name.
> VoIP Configurations > VoIP Domain Configuration. The VoIP Domain
9-22
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-29 VoIP Domain Configuration Dialog Box
c. Configure the parameters as required, and click OK.

8. Configure the users TID.
> VoIP Configurations > VoIP TID User Configuration. The VoIP TID User
c. Click Add. Configure the user TID parameters in the displayed VoIP User TID
Configuration dialog box, see Figure 9-30.
Figure 9-30 VoIP User TID Configuration Dialog Box
d. Click OK.
9. Configure the VoIP resource termination ID (RTP-TID).
9-23
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
> VoIP Configurations > VoIP TID RTP Configuration. . The VoIP TID RTP
c. Configure the VoIP resource termination ID, see Figure 9-31.
Figure 9-31 TID Configuration (RTP) Dialog Box
d. Click Config.
a. Select the F420 in the ONU list.
ServicePort. The Service Port Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
9-32.

9-24
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
d. In the left pane, select Tagged. Configure the service port parameters in the right
e. Click OK.
End of Steps
9.2 GPON ONU Service Provisioning

9.2.1 Adding a GPON ONU
add a GPON FTTH ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
The GPON ONU is offline.

THe NetNumen U31 Topology Management window is open.
Steps
Use either of the following two ways to open the ONU Manager window. .
l
9-25
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Select ZTE-F620 as the ONU Type. Configure the basic attributes, management IP
4. Click OK.
End of Steps
9-26
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
9.2.2 Authenticating a GPON ONU

authenticate a GPON FTTH ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

The GPON ONU type profile is configured.
The GPON ONU is online.
Steps
l
In the Topology Management window, double-click the ZXA10 C300. In the

displayed Rack window, right-click the specified PON port and select ONU
Manager.
2. Manage the unauthenticated ONU.

In the ONU Manager window, click Unauthenticated ODU. The Unauthenticated
ODU Configuration dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-37.
9-27
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-37 Unauthenticated ODU Configuration Dialog Box
Use either of the following two methods to open the Unauthenticated ODU
l
3. Configure the ONU attributes.

a. In the Unauthenticated ONU Configuration dialog box, select an F620 device,
and click Add To. The Add ONU dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-38.
b. Configure the basic attributes, management IP and route, maintenance

parameters, and service level.
For detailed parameter descriptions, refer to 3.2.7 Managing Unauthenticated
ONUs.
End of Steps
9-28
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
9.2.3 Provisioning the Broadband Service

provision the broadband service on a GPON ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

Configuration Data
Item
Data
VLAN ID of the OLT uplink
4001
interface
OLT service port
GEM port
Service channel
User port VLAN
Service-port ID: 1
Virtual port ID: 1
Name: 620
T-CONT ID: 1
GEM Port ID: 1
T-CONT ID: 1
Name: HSI
Service mode: Internet
GEM Port ID: 1
Priority: 0
VLAN ID: 4001
Port mode: Tag
Service port: Eth_1
VLAN ID: 101
Priority: 0
Steps
b. Click
are displayed, see Figure 9-39. The ONU Manager window is used to manage
9-29
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
the ONUs under the specified PON port in a unified way. For details, refer to 3.3
ONU Management.
Figure 9-39 ONU Configuration Window

a. Select an F620 NE.
b. From the Operations pane in the right, select Line Configurations > T-CONT

d. Configure the T-CONT parameters, see Figure 9-41. Click
to select a bandwidth profile.
next to Bandwidth
9-30
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
e. Click OK to go back to the T-CONT Configuration dialog box.

f. Click Close.
b. From the Operations pane in the right, select Line Configurations > GEM Port
9-42.
Figure 9-42 GEM Port Configuration Dialog Box

d. Set the GEM Port parameters, see Figure 9-43.
9-31
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

b. From the Operations pane in the right, select Vport Service Configurations >
9-44.

9-32
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
d. Set the service port parameters, see Figure 9-45. For the detailed parameter
Note:
e. Click OK.
b. From the Operations pane in the right, select PON Service Configurations >
9-46.
9-33
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Click Add. The Add ONU Service dialog box is displayed.

Figure 9-47 Add ODU Service Dialog Box
e. Click OK .
6. Configure the ONU user port VLAN.
UNI VLAN. The UNI VLAN window is displayed, see Figure 9-48.
9-34
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-48 UNI VLAN Window
c. Select Port 1. Click Modify. The Modify UNI VLAN dialog box is displayed.
d. Set the parameters, see Figure 9-49.
Figure 9-49 Modify UNI VLAN Dialog Box
e. Click OK.
End of Steps
9.2.4 Provisioning the Multicast Service

provision multicast service on a GPON ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
l

9-35
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Configuration Data
Item
Data
Multicast VLAN ID
201
Priority
Multicast protocol
IGMP Snooping
Multicast group IP address
224.1.1.1224.1.1.3
VLAN ID of the OLT uplink interface
201
Service port
Service-port ID: 2
Virtual port ID: 2
Name: F620
T-CONT ID: 1
GEM Port ID: 2
T-CONT ID: 1
Name: Multicast
Service mode: IPTV
GEM Port ID: 2
Priority: 5
VLAN ID: 201
Eth_2
VLAN mode: Tag
VLAN ID: 201
Priority: 5
GEM port
Service channel
User port VLAN
Steps
1. Configure the IGMP parameters.
For details, refer to 2.3.2 Configuring the IGMP Parameters.
2. Configure the user interface IGMP parameters.
For details, refer to 2.3.3 Configuring the User Interface Parameters.
3. Configure the MVLAN parameters.
For details, refer to 2.3.4 Configuring the Multicast VLAN.
9-36
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. Click
to select a GPON card and a PON port. All ONUs under this PON
port are displayed, see Figure 9-50. For detailed information, refer to 3.3 ONU
Management.
Figure 9-50 ONU Configuration Window


next to Bandwidth
9-37
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

f. Click Close.
9-53.

9-38
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

9-55.

9-39
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
d. Set the service port parameters, see Figure 9-56.

For detailed parameter
Note:
e. Click OK.
9-57.
9-40
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

e. Click OK.
9. Configure the ONU user port VLAN.
UNI VLAN. The UNI VLAN window is displayed.
c. Select Port 2. Click Modify. The Modify UNI VLAN dialog box is displayed.
d. Set the parameters, see Figure 9-59.
9-41
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-59 Modify UNI VLAN Dialog Box
e. Click OK.
10. Set the user port MVLAN.
b. From the Operations pane in the right, select PON Service Configuration > ONU
Multicast VLAN. The ONU Multicast VLAN dialog box is displayed.
c. Click Add. The Assign Multicast VLAN dialog box is displayed, see Figure 9-60.
Figure 9-60 Assign Multicast VLAN Dialog Box
d. In the Multicast VLAN ID text box, enter 201, and then click OK.
11. Configure the multicast VLAN stripping mode.
b. From the Operations pane in the right, select PON Service Configuration >
MVLAN Strip. The MVLAN Strip dialog box is displayed.
c. Select port 2, and click Modify. The Modify MVLAN Strip dialog box is displayed,
see Figure 9-61.
9-42
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-61 Modify MVLAN Strip Dialog Box
d. Set MVLAN Strip Mode to Stripped, and then click OK.

End of Steps
9.2.5 Provisioning the VoIP Service

provision the VoIP service on a GPON ONU.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
GPON ONU is authenticated.

The GPON VoIP IP profile is created.
The GPON VoIP VLAN profile is created.
The GPON VoIP SIP profile is created.
The data configuration on SS is complete.
Context
The F620 supports three VoIP protocols:
l
l
l
H.248
MGCP
SIP
The F620 does not support the three protocols simultaneously. There are different versions
of F620 that support each protocol.
This section takes the SIP protocol as an example.
Configuration Data
Item
Data
VLAN ID
301
9-43
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Item
Data
Priority
ONU service port
POTS_12
Service port
Service-port ID: 3
Virtual port ID: 3
Name: 622
T-CONT ID: 1
GEM Port ID: 3
T-CONT ID: 1
Name: VoIP-SIP
Service mode: VoIP
GEM Port ID: 3
Priority: 7
VLAN ID: 301
IP configuration mode
IP address: 10.63.109.10/24
GEM port
Service channel
VoIP address
SIP profile name
SIP
POT_1 user information
User identifier: 6662001
User name: 6662001
Password: 123
Steps
b. Click
9-44
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)


next to Bandwidth
9-45
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

f. Click Close.
9-65.

9-46
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
e. Click OK.
9-67.

9-47
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
d. Set the service port parameters, see Figure 9-68.

For detailed parameter
Note:
e. Click OK.
9-69.
9-48
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

d. Configure the F620 multicast service parameters, see Figure 9-70.
e. Click OK .
6. Configure the ONU VoIP parameters.
VoIP Configurations > ONU VoIP Configuration. The ONU VoIP Configuration
c. In the VoIP Protocol Configuration area, set the VoIP signaling protocol and
configuration mode, see Figure 9-71.
9-49
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-71 VoIP Configuration Area
d. In the VoIP IP Configuration area, click New. The ONU VoIP IP Configuration
e. Configure the VoIP IP parameters, see Figure 9-72.
Figure 9-72 ONU VoIP IP Configuration Dialog Box
f. Click OK.
7. Configure the SIP user.
VoIP Configurations > VoIP User Management. The VoIP User Management
window appears.
c. Click New. The Add SIP User dialog box is displayed.
d. Configure the SIP user information, see Figure 9-73 .
9-50
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 9-73 Add SIP User Dialog Box
e. Click OK.
End of Steps
9-51
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
9-52
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 10
Alarm and Fault Handling

Table of Contents
Alarm and Fault Handling Flow.................................................................................10-1
Querying and Locating ONU In the Whole Network ..................................................10-3
Handling an ONU Alarm ...........................................................................................10-7
Handling an ONU Fault ............................................................................................10-8
Port Fault Handling................................................................................................. 10-11
10.1 Alarm and Fault Handling Flow

When the NetNumen N31 unified management system receives an ONU alarm, the
maintenance engineers query the alarm and handle the alarm. This section describesthe
alarm and fault handling flow.
ONU Alarm and Fault Handling Flow

Figure 10-1 shows ONU alarm and fault handling flow.
Figure 10-1 ONU Alarm and Fault Handling Flow
10-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Port Alarm and Fault Handling Flow

Figure 10-2 shows port alarm and fault handling flow.
Figure 10-2 Port Alarm and Fault Handling Flow
FTTH ONU Port Alarm and Fault Handling Flow

Figure 10-3 shows FTTH ONU port alarm and fault handling flow.
10-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 10 Alarm and Fault Handling
Figure 10-3 FTTH ONU Port Alarm and Fault Handling Flow
10.2 Querying and Locating ONU In the Whole Network

This procedure describes how to query and locate an ONU in the whole network.
Prerequisite
OLT and ONU synchronization configuration data policy is performed.
Steps
1. Query an ONU.
a. In Topology Management window, right-click ZXA10 C300 NE and select Search
ONU. The ONU Search window is displayed, see Figure 10-4.
10-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-4 ONU Search Window
b. Select the query mode from the Search By drop-down list. Enter the key words
in the Condition text box for fuzzy query.
Table 10-1 Parameters for Searching for ONUs
Parameter
Description
By Location
Select the By Location check box, and then click
. In
the displayed Select Object dialog box, select the location

to be searched.
Search By
Select the query mode from the Search By drop-down list.

The following query modes are supported:
l
ONU Name
Type
ONU Software Version
ONU Location
IP Address
PON MAC/SN
ONU Authentication Identifier (SN, Password, MAC,

LOID)
l
Condition
Domain Name
Enter the keyword in the Condition text box. Fuzzy query is

supported. All ONUs meeting the condition and containing
the keyword will be queried.
The * condition means that all ONUs will be queried.
Close the dialog after located
Determines whether to close the Search ONU dialog box

automatically after the ONU is located.
c. Click the
button to query an ONU. Figure 10-5 shows the result.

10-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-5 ONU Search Result
d. (Optional) In the ONU Search window, click Export to save the query result to a
file.
2. Locate an ONU.
a. In the ONU Search window, select an ONU.
b. Click Located into and select an item in the list.
Table 10-2 describes the operations that you can perform in these windows.
Table 10-2 Operations Performed In Different Navigation Windows
Option
Operation
ONU Configuration
When ONU Configuration is selected, the ONU Manager

window is displayed. You can perform the following operations
through the Operations pane in the right:
l
Double-click ONU Maintenance Operations > Realtime

Performance or ONU Maintenance Operations > Traffic
History Monitoring to query the performance and traffic of
this ONU.
Double-click ONU Maintenance Operations > Active

Alarms or ONU Maintenance Operations > Historical
Alarm to query the alarms of this ONU.
Double-click PON Service Configurations to check and

modify the service configuration of this ONU.
Double-click ONU Maintenance Operations > More > Telnet

to log in to this ONU through the command line system.
10-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Option
Operation
NE Topo View
When NE Topo Map is selected, the Topology Management

window is displayed, displaying the topology of all ONUs. You can
right-click the located NE and perform the required operations.
This option is only valid to MDU NEs.
ONU Topo View
When ONU Topo View is selected, the ONU Topology window is

displayed. This window shows the network deployment structure
of all ONUs under a PON port. You can perform the following
operations in the ONU Topology window:
l
Right-click an ONU node and select Active Alarms to query

the alarms of this ONU.
Right-click an ONU node and select ONU Configuration to
Right-click an ONU node and select Realtime Performance
open the ONU Manager window.

to query the real-time performance of this ONU.
l
Right-click an ONU node of MDU type and select Open ONU

Graphics to view the ONU panel graph.
Right-click the ONU node, and select ONU Optical Module

Diagnosis.
Port Manager
When Port Manager is selected, the Port Manager window is

displayed. You can perform the following operations in the Port
Manager window:
l
Locate the selected ONU.
Query the running status and configuration data of a user

port.
This option is only valid to MDU NEs.

Topo OLT
When Topo OLT is selected, the OLT NE of the ONU is marked

with a white frame in the Topology Management window.
Note:
A proper splitter number must be configured during ONU creation or ONU attribute
modification. Otherwise, the ONU networking structure does not reflect the actual
condition.
If the splitter number is incorrect or not configured, the ONU is mounted under the
PON interface by default on the topology graph.
End of Steps
10-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
10.3 Handling an ONU Alarm

This procedure describes how to handle an ONU alarm.
Steps
1. In the NetNumenN31 Unified Management System window, select Fault > Alarm
Monitoring. The Alarm Monitoring tab is displayed, see Figure 10-6.
Figure 10-6 Alarm Monitoring Tab
2. Handle the ONU alarms.

Table 10-3 describes the operations that you can perform on the NetNumen N31
unified management system to handle ONU alarms.
Table 10-3 Operations Performed to Handle ONU Alarms
Operation
Description
Go to the Topology
Management window
and locate the NE.
Right-click a link broken alarm,, and select Locate Alarm to

NE to locate the topology map of the node.
Right-click the node and select ONU Manager to display the

ONU list of this OLT NE.
Right-click a pweroff alarm or unit offline alarm, and select

Locating Alarm to NE to open the OLT topology map, instead of
the ONU topology map. (The power off alarm or unit offline alarm
is reported by the OLT of the ONU to the network management
system through SNMP.)
10-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Operation
Description
Go to ONU Configuration
According to the ONU information in the alarm location

information, the system locates the ONU on which the alarm
is reported in the ONU Configuration window. This helps you
check the ODU configuration management information.
For an ONU offline alarm, ONU power-off alarm or optical line
alarm, right-click the alarm and select Go to ONU Configuration
to open the ONU Manager window.
Query ONU alarms.
An ONU power-off alarm is reported to OLT through the dying

gasp message sent by the extended OAM. OLT reports the alarm
to the network management system. An ONU power-off alarm
contains OLT information and ONU information on OLT.
You can create an NE node for FTTB ONU in the NetNumen N31 unified management
system. The NetNumen N31 unified management system can manage the ONU
on OLT through the extended OAM protocol or OMCI protocol, or directly manage
the ONU through SNMP. Both OLT and ONU can report alarms of this ONU to the
NetNumen N31 unified management system.
l
When checking the ONU alarms reported by an ONU NE, such as NE link
disconnection, VoIP alarm, and ONU card alarm, you can check the ONU alarms
reported by an OLT, such as ONU disconnection, ONU power-off, and ONU
optical line error.
When checking the ONU alarms reported by an OLT, such as ONU disconnection,
ONU power-off, and ONU optical line error, you can check the ONU alarms
reported by an ONU NE, such as NE link disconnection, VoIP alarm, and ONU
card alarm.
Note:
An ONU itself can report alarms through SNMP Trap, for example, ONU card exception
alarm and H.248 protocol link disconnection. The location of these alarms is ONU.
If an ONU is not added to the NetNumen N31 unified management system after being
created, the NetNumen N31 Client cannot receive the alarms reported by the ONU.
End of Steps
10.4 Handling an ONU Fault

This procedure describes how to handle an ONU fault.
10-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Context
Table 10-4 lists the ONU alarms which occur frequently.
Table 10-4 ONU Alarms
Alarm
Description
ONU NE link is broken.
ONU is powered off. The fiber is disconnected, or the communication

with the network management system is broken. This fault may affect
the Internet access service and VoIP service of the whole network.
H.248 link is broken.
The link between ONU and SS is broken. This fault may affect the
VoIP service of this ONU.
ONU card is improperly.
If the broadband subscriber card is operating improperly, the

broadband Internet access service of this broadband subscriber
card is affected.
If the VoIP subscriber card is operating improperly, the VoIP

service of this VoIP subscriber card is affected.
Cold startup
This alarm indicates that ONU is restarted. This alarm cannot be

cleared automatically. It must be cleared manually. This fault may
affect the broadband Internet access service and VoIP service of
the whole network.
l
It is unnecessary to handle this alarm if this alarm occurs when

the device is powered off or the device is restarted by some one.
Check whether the hidden problem exists if this alarm occurs

when the device is restarted improperly.
ONU optical link alarm
It is an alarm about ONU optical line quality. Severe ONU optical line
quality problem may affect the broadband Internet access service
and VoIP service of this ONU.
Steps
b. Select a card and a port. All ONUs under this port are displayed.
2. Handle a fault.
The Operations pane on the right provides shortcut menus and navigation menus for
handling a fault, see Figure 10-7.
10-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-7 Operations Pane
Table 10-5 describes the operations that you can perform on the NetNumen N31
unified management system to handle ONU faults.
Table 10-5 Operations Performed to Handle ONU Faults
Task
Operations Performed on
Operations Performed
Description
an EPON ONU
on an GPON ONU
Reset an
From the Operations pane
From the Operations
Resetting a card can
ONU.
in the right, select Physical
pane in the right,
handle some ONU
Configurations > Reboot.
select Physical
faults.
Configurations >
Reboot.
Query the
From the Operations
Query the operation
operation
in the right, select Physical
pane in the right,
status of an ONU.
status of
Configurations > Details.
select Physical
an ONU.
The Detailed Information
Configurations >
Details. The ONU
Query the operation status
Details dialog box is
on the Basic Attributes tab.
displayed. Query the

operation status on the
Line Attributes tab.
Query the
optical
in the right, select Detailed
power of
Information. The Detailed
an ONU.
Information dialog box is
Query the optical power

of an ONU.
displayed. Query the Tx/Rx

Optical Power (dBm) on
the Performance tab.
10-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Task
Operations Performed on
Operations Performed
an EPON ONU
on an GPON ONU
Description
Modify
From the Operations
Modify the VLAN
VLAN con-
in the right, select PON
pane in the right,
configuration of an
figuration.
Service Configurations
select PON Service
ONU.
> VLAN and Multicast
Configurations > ONU
Configuration.
Service.
Query all
Select All from the ONU
Select All from the ONU
Query all ONUs under
ONUs.
drop-down list.
drop-down list.
the specified PON port

and locate the fault.
Modify the
From the Operations
Modify the configuration
configura-
in the right, select ONU
pane in the right, select
parameters of an ONU.
tion param-
Maintenance Operations >
ONU Maintenance
eters of an
Go to > MDU Chassis View
Operations > Go to >
ONU.
MDU Chassis View.
Query
From the Operations
Check whether the ONU
the active
in the right, select ONU
pane in the right, select
has alarms. For the
alarms of
Maintenance Operations >
ONU Maintenance
ONU alarm description,
an ONU.
Active Alarms.
Operations > Active
Alarms.
Note:
You can also right-click an ONU in the ONU Manager window and handle an alarm.
Caution!
If ONU fault cannot be solved on the NetNumen N31 unified management system, the
maintenance engineer has to go to the locale.
3. Make sure that ONU fault is handled.

After ONU fault is recovered, you need to query the active alarms and history alarms
of this ONU in the ONU Manager window, confirming that the fault is recovered.
End of Steps
10.5 Port Fault Handling

10-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
l
Handling FTTB ONU Broadband Port Fault

Handling FTTB ONU VoIP Port Fault
Handling FTTH ONU VoIP Port Fault
10.5.1 Handling FTTB ONU Broadband Port Fault

This procedure describes how to handle the broadband port fault of an FTTB ONU.
Context
You can locate an ONU according to the following information:
l
l
l
l
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
name
IP address
MAC address
physical location
This section takes 9806H and F822 as examples to describes the procedure for handling
the broadband port fault of an FTTB ONU.
Handling 9806H Broadband Port Fault

1. In the Rack window of 9806H, right-click a DSL subscriber card (for example, ASTED),
and select Port Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed, seeFigure 10-8.
Figure 10-8 Port Manager Window (9806H)
2. Double-click the specified DSL port, and the DSL port management window is
10-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-9 Port ManagerPort Management
3. In the Port Manager window, you can view the port status and perform different
operations by clicking the relevant buttons.
l Query the port administration status and operation status:
Red: The port is in Offline status.
Green: The port is in Online status.
Grey: The port is in Disable status.
Note:
If the port is in Offline status, you can click Enable to enable the port.
Query the configuration data:
VLAN configuration data
PVC configuration data
Bandwidth configuration
Query the performance data:
Received/transmitted bytes
Attainable rate
SNR margin
4. (Optional) Modify the bridge port configuration.

a. In the Port Manager window, click Bridge Port. The Bridge Port dialog box is
10-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-10 Bridge Port Dialog Box
b. Click Changing VLAN. The Change VLAN dialog box is displayed, see Figure
10-11. You can modify VLAN parameters.
Figure 10-11 Change VLAN Dialog Box
10-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
In the Change VLAN dialog box, you can also perform the following operations:
l
l
l
Delete the original VLAN of the port.

Modify the port PVID
Add the port through Tagged mode to the destination VLAN uplink port.
Handling F822 Broadband Port Fault

1. In the Rack window of F822, right-click an Ethernet subscriber card, and select Port
Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed, seeFigure 10-12.
Figure 10-12 Port Manager Window (F822)
2. Double-click the specified Ethernet port. The Ethernet port management window is
10-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-13 Port ManagerPort Management
3. In the Port Manager window, you can view the port status and perform different
operations by clicking the relevant buttons.
l Click Reset to reset the port.
l Click Port Configuration . The Port Configuration dialog box is displayed,
where you can configure the speed mode and flow control, see Figure 10-14.
10-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
10.5.2 Handling FTTB ONU VoIP Port Faults

This procedure describes how to handle the VoIP port fault of an FTTB ONU.
Context
You can locate an ONU according to the following information:
l
l
l
l
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
name
IP address
authentication information
physical location
This section takes 9806H and F822 as examples to describe the procedure for handling
the VoIP port fault of an FTTB ONU.
Note:
The procedure of handling F822 VoIP port fault is the same as that of handling 9806H VoIP
port fault.
10-17
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Handling 9806H VoIP Port Fault

To handle 9806H VoIP fault, you can perform the operations listed in Table 10-6.
Table 10-6 9806H VoIP Fault Handling
Operation
Step
Remarks
Check the card information.
In the Rack window of 9806H,
right-click a VoIP card and

select Card Information.
Check the card alarms.

select Show Current Alarms.
Check IAD registration status.
Check the H.248 Link Status.
right-click the VoIP card
If the link is up, 9806H is
and select Voice Service
registered on SS successfully.
Management.
Check the port status.
In the Port Manager window,
you can view the port status
select Port Manager.
and perform different operations

by clicking the relevant buttons,
see Figure 10-15.
Figure 10-15 Port Manager Window (9806H VoIP)
Table 10-7 describes the 9806H VoIP port statuses.
10-18
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 10-7 9806H VoIP Port Statuses

Parameter
Status
Break Off
Work
Power Status
Power Off
Power On
Fault Status
Fault
Work
Block
Unblock
Idle Status
Idle
Busy
Dial
Calling party in conversation
Called party in conversation
Busy tone
Ring
Ringback tone
H.248 Protocol Status
Block
Unblock
User Lockout Status
Lockout
Idle
l
l
If the port communication status, power status and fault status are not in normal status,
you need to go to the locale and check the card.
If the protocol status is blocked, click Unblock or Batch Unblock to unblock the
protocol status.
Handling F822 VoIP Port Fault

To handle F822 VoIP fault, you can perform the operations listed in Table 10-8.
Table 10-8 F822 VoIP Fault Handling
Operation
Step
Remarks
Check the card
In the Rack window of F822,
information.
right-click a VoIP card and select

Card Info.
10-19
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Operation
Step
Remarks
Check the card alarms.
right-click a VoIP card and select

Show Current Alarms.
Check the voice
configuration.
Check the media

gateway configuration.
The configurations are consistent
right-click the VoIP card and select
with those in the real situation, see
Voice Service Management.
Figure 10-16.
1. In the Rack window of F822,
with those in the real situation.

Management.
2. Click MG Configuration.
Check the media
1. In the Rack window of F822,
gateway controller
configuration.

with those in the real situation.

Management.
2. Click MGC Configuration.
Check the port status.
In the Port Manager window, you
right-click the VoIP card and select
can view the port status and perform
Port Manager.
different operations by clicking the

relevant buttons, see Figure 10-17
Figure 10-16 Voice Configuration Management Window
10-20
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-17 Port Manager Window (F822 VoIP)
In the Port Manager window, if Operational Status is Disconnected, it indicates that IAD
registration fails.
10.5.3 Handling FTTH ONU VoIP Port Faults

This procedure uses the F420 as an example to describe how to to handle the VoIP port
fault of an FTTH ONU.
Prerequisite
The FTTH ONU supports the extended OAM protocol or OMCI protocol management.
Steps
For information about the ONU Manager window and how to open it, refer to 3.3 ONU
Management.
2. Check the ONU operation status.
In the ONU Manager window, check the ONU status, for example, disconnected or
powered off.
3. Check the ONU domain name and VoIP profile status.
a. If the ONU is operating properly, from the Operations pane on the right,
select PON Service Configurations > VoIP Configurations > VoIP Domain
Configuration. The VoIP Domain Configuration dialog box is displayed. Check
the domain name. If the domain is incorrect, the ONU may not get the data from
the SS.
10-21
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
b. If the domain name is correct, from the Operations pane on the right, select
PON Service Configurations > VoIP Configurations > VoIP Module Status
Configuration. The VoIP Module Status Configuration dialog box is displayed,
see Figure 10-18.
Figure 10-18 VoIP Module Status Configuration Dialog Box
c. Check the status of the VoIP module

l If the Module Status is Success, the ONU is registered in the SS as an IAD.
l If the ONU is not registered, check whether the ONU communicates properly
with the SS and whether data packet loss occurs.
4. Check the VoIP port status.
From the Operations pane on the right of the ONU Manager window, select PON
Service Configurations > VoIP Configurations > VoIP Port Status. The VoIP Port
Status dialog box is displayed, see Figure 10-19.
10-22
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 10-19 VoIP Port Status Dialog Box
l
l
If the Operational Status is Port Idle, it is proper status.

If the Operational Status is registering or other status, you need to go to the
locale and check the ONU.
End of Steps
10-23
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
10-24
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 11
Routine Maintenance
Table of Contents
Managing ONUs Centrally ........................................................................................11-1
Collecting Resource Statistics ..................................................................................11-6
Collecting Alarm Statistics ........................................................................................11-9
Upgrading the ZXA10 C300 Version ....................................................................... 11-10
Checking the Policy Execution ............................................................................... 11-11
Managing Logs....................................................................................................... 11-14
11.1 Managing ONUs Centrally

This procedure describes how to management ONUs centrally in the ONU Management
window.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
The Running Configuration Save To Flash policy is configured.

The Data Configuration Backup policy is configured.
The Synchronize Configuration Data Policy is configured.
Context
There are two tabs in the ONU Management window:
l
ONU Query View: You can query ONUs through a predefined profile or a custom
profile, and then check the ONU status, configure services, and monitor the
performance.
ONU Topology View: You can view the NEs, card, or ports on a hierarchical topology
graph, through which the required objects can be configured and managed. .
Steps
1. Use either of the following methods to open the ONU Management window.
l In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client window, select
Maintenance > ONU Management on the main menu. The NetNumen
U31 Unified Management System WindowONU Management window is
11-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 11-1 NetNumen U31 Unified Management System WindowONU

Management
Click
on the toolbar.
2. Manage ONUs and configure services on the ONU Query View or ONU Topology
View tab:
l On the ONU Query View tab, you can perform the following operations:
Purpose
Operation
Query ONUs through a default
i.
profile
In the navigation tree, double-click Default Profile.

The Default Profile node is expanded.
ii.
Double-click the specified ONU query profile. The

queried ONUs are displayed in the right pane.
Check the default query profile
i.
details

ii.
Right-click the profile to be checked, and select

Profile Details. The ONU Query Profile dialog box
is displayed.
iii. Check the profile details.

Add a query profile through
i.
duplication

ii.
Right-click the profile to be duplicated, and select

Add Profile by Copy. The ONU Query Profile
iii. Set the ONU query conditions, and click OK.
11-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 11 Routine Maintenance
Purpose
Operation
Add a customized query profile
i.
In the navigation tree, right-click Customized Profile, and select Add Profile. The ONU Query Profile dialog box is displayed.
Query ONUs through a
ii.
Set the ONU query conditions, and click OK
i.
In the navigation tree, double-click Customized
customized profile
Profile.
The Customized Profile node is ex-
panded.
ii.
Double-click a customized profile.
The queried
ONUs are displayed in the right pane.

Modify a customized query profile
i.

Profile.
panded.
ii.
Right-click the profile to be modified, and select

Modify Profile. The ONU Query Profile dialog box
is displayed.
iii. Modify the ONU query conditions, and click OK.

Delete a customized query profile
i.

Profile.
panded.
ii.
Right-click the profile to be deleted, and select

Delete Profile. A dialog box is displayed for your
confirmation.
iii. Click OK.

Add a customized profile through
i.
duplication

Profile.
panded.
ii.
Right-click the profile to be duplicated, and select

Add Profile by Copy. The ONU Query Profile
iii. Set the ONU query conditions, and click OK.

Open the ONU Manager window
View ONU details
i.
Select a queried ONU in the right pane.
ii.
Click
i.
ii.
Click
on the toolbar.
on the toolbar. The ODU Details dialog
box is displayed.
11-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Purpose
Operation
View active alarms on an ONU
i.
ii.
Click
on the toolbar. The Active Alarms dialog
box is displayed.
View the statistical information of
the queried ONUs
Click
on the toolbar. The ONU Statistics dialog
box is displayed.
Export the statistical information

of the queried ONUs
i.
on the toolbar. The Save dialog box is
Click
displayed.
ii.
Select the path, enter a file name, and then click

Save.
Configure the attributes to be
i.
displayed in the ONU table.
Click
on the toolbar. The Customize ONU List
Options dialog box is displayed.

ii.
Select the columns to be displayed, and then click

Set.
View the topology graph for the
i.
ii.
Click
queried ONU
on the toolbar. The corresponding ONU
Topology View is displayed.

View abnormal ONUs
Select the Show Abnormal ONU Only check box in

the right pane.
Query ONUs
i.
In the text box above the ODU list, enter a keyword

contained in the ONU name, and click
. The
first found ONU is highlighted

ii.
(Optional) Click
to view the next ONU that
meets the specified condition.

Manage and configure EPON
ONUs
Manage and configure GPON
ONUs
i.
Right-click one or more queried EPON ONUs.
ii.
Select an item from the shortcut menu.
i.
Right-click one or more queried GPON ONUs.
ii.
Select an item from the shortcut menu.
On the ONU Topology View tab, you can perform the following operations:
11-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Purpose
Operation
View an ONU in the topology tree
i.
or graph
In the EMS Server tree, double-click the OLT to

which the ONU belongs. The cards are listed.
ii.
Double-click the card where the ONU is located.

The ports are listed.
iii. Double-click the port of the ONU. The ONU is

marked in a white rectangle in the right pane.
Filter the ONUs on the topology
tree/graph through a profile
i.
Select the ONU Query Profile check box.
ii.
Select a query profile from the drop-down list.
iii. In the EMS Server tree, double-click the OLT to

which the ONU belongs. The cards are listed.
iv. Double-click the card where the ONU is located.
The ports are listed.
v.
Double-click the port of the ONU. The ONU is

marked in a white rectangle in the right pane.
Query topology nodes
i.
In the text box above the EMS tree, enter a keyword, and then click
. The first found node is
highlighted in the tree.

ii.
(Optional) Click
to view the next ONU that meets
the specified condition.

Collapse or expand the topology
nodes
i.
In the EMS Server tree, select a node.
ii.
Click
to expand the sub-nodes or
to collapse
the sub-nodes.
Move the topology graph
i.
ii.
Click
on the toolbar.
Press and hold the left mouse button to move the

topology graph.
Zoom in or out the topology graph

Return to the previous topology
graph
On the toolbar, click
to zoom in or
to zoom out.
to view the topology layout
before the current operation (zoom in/out or move) is

performed.
Reset the topology graph
to view the original topology
layout.
Fit the topology graph to contents
. The system automatically
displays all objects on the topology graph.
11-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Purpose
Operation
Partially zoom in the topology

graph
i.
Click
on the toolbar.
ii.
Press and hold the left mouse button to draw a rectangle.
iii. Release the left mouse button. The rectangle range

fills the entire window.
Arrange topology elements
Click
automatically
on the toolbar. The system automatically
arrange the ports, ODNs, and ONUs on the topology

graph.
Save ONU positions
i.
In the EMS Server tree, double-click the OLT to

which the ONU belongs. The card list is expanded.
ii.
Double-click the card where the ONU is located.

The port list is expanded.
iii. Double-click the port of the ONU. The ONU is

marked in a white rectangle.
iv. Move the ONU to an appropriate position.
v.
View the legend
Click
Click
Use shortcut menus for the
i.
topology tree
on the toolbar. The modification is saved.

on the toolbar.
In the EMS Server tree, expand OLT > Card > Port
> ODN > ONU.
ii.
Right-click a node, and select the corresponding

command from the shortcut menu.
Use shortcut menus for the
i.
topology graph
In the EMS Server tree, expand OLT > Card > Port
> ODN > ONU.
ii.
In the topology graph in the right pane, right-click

an element, and select the corresponding command
from the shortcut menu.
End of Steps
11.2 Collecting Resource Statistics

Resource query and statistics is used to make resource reports.
The NetNumen U31 NMS provides the resource query and statistics functions. Resource
query and statistics is based on the data for the latest time of resource statistics policy
execution, rather than the NE real-time data.
11-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Steps
1. Query the resource detailed information.
Resource query includes the following:
l
l
l
l
l
Querying
Querying
Querying
Querying
Querying
the
the
the
the
the
NE resources.
card resources.
ODU resources.
ports.
bridge port resources.
The resource query result can be exported to the local disk in the .xls or .csv format.
Operation
Description
In the NetNumen U31 Unified
Queries NE information, including the NE group, NE name,
Management System window,
NE IP address, software version, last startup time, patch
select Statistics > Access N
version, inband MAC address, and out-of-band MAC address.
Resource Query > NE Resource

Query.
Queries the card information all over the network or at a
specified location, including the card location, NE name, NE
select Statistics > Access Network
IP address, NE type, card category, service type, card type,
Resource Query > Card Resource
card description, slot number, hardware version, software
Query.
version, card status, serial number, and batch number.
Queries the ONU information all over the network or at a
specified location, including the ONU index, name, service
type, ONU configuration type, authentication mode, number
Resource Query > ONU Resource
of port, administration status, operational status, software
Query
version, hardware version, and bandwidth profile.
Queries the port information all over the network or under a
specified OLT, including the slot number, port number, port
type, recent use status, and port description.
Resource Query > Port Query

Queries the port information all over the network or at a
specified location, including the location path, NE IP address,
port physical location, card category, administrative status,
Resource Query > Port Bridge Port
port configuration profile, PVC, VPI, VCI, SVLAN switch,
Query.
CVLAN, SVLAN, and maximum leaned MAC addresses.
2. Collect statistics on the resource information.

Resource statistics provides statistics reports of the following resources:
l
l
l
l
NE resources
Card resources
PON port resources
PON port bandwidth
11-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
l
ONU resources
Port resources
Port rate configuration
The resource statistics result can be exported to the local disk in the .xls or .csv
format.
Operation
Description
Collects statistics on the NEs all over the network or at a
specified location according to the NE type or NE version.

Resource Statistics > NE Node
Statistics.
Collects statistics on the cards all over the network or at a
specified location according to the card type, card name,
card version, or NE type.
Resource Statistics > Card

Statistics.
Collects statistics on the PON ports all over the network or
at a specified location according to the equipment category,
card, or location level.
Resource Statistics > PON Port

Statistics.
Collects statistics on the bandwidth information at the PON
ports all over the network or at a specified location.

Resource Statistics > PON Port
Bandwidth Statistics.
Collects statistics on the bandwidth information at the PON
ports all over the network or at a specified location according
to location level, equipment category, ONU type, ONU
Resource Statistics > ONU
software version, cycle, and time.
Resource Statistics.
Collects statistics on the port information all over the network
or at a specified location, including number of ports and ports
utilization.
Resource Statistics > Port

Resource Statistics.
Collects statistics on the xDSL port rates all over the network
or at a specified location.
select Statistics > AN DSL Port

Performance > Port Rate Profile
Statistics.
11-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
End of Steps
11.3 Collecting Alarm Statistics

History alarm statistics is used to analyze the history alarms, find faults in the network, and
know the maintenance conditions.
The NetNumen U31 NMS provides the default statistics and customized statistics on the
alarms.
Steps
1. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, select Fault > Alarm
Monitoring. The Alarm Monitoring window is displayed.
2. In the left pane, click the Statistic tab. The Timing Statistic Task Management
Figure 11-2 Timing Statistic Task Management
3. Carry out the default statistics function.

The NetNumen U31 supports the alarm statistics by NE, NE type, alarm code, time,
group, and acknowledgement user.
For example, when you double-click Statistic > By Alarm Code > Top5, the statistic
result is displayed in a table. The statistic result can also be displayed in a bar or pie
graph. You can export the result in the .xml, .prn, .txt, .htm, .pdf, .xls, .xlsx,
or .csv format.
4. Carry out the customized statistics function.
11-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
If the default statistics function fails to meet the requirement, you can carry out
customized statistics, which focuses on the alarm frequency and duration.
a. In the Statistic navigation tree, right-click Customized Statistics and select New
History Alarm Basic Statistic. The New History Alarm Basic Statistic dialog
box is displayed.
b. Enter the template name, and then click OK. The History Alarm Basic Statistic
c. On the Basic tab, configure the statistic type, statistic result display row and
column.
d. Click the Condition tab, configure the statistic conditions, including the history
alarm sending time, alarm code, and location.
e. Click OK.
f. The new statistic profile is displayed under Statistic > Customized Statistics.
Double-click the profile to carry it out.
End of Steps
11.4 Upgrading the ZXA10 C300 Version

This procedure describes how to upgrade a low NE software version.
Prerequisite
l
l
l
The NE version file is obtained.

The NE version file is backed up. For details, refer to 1.6.1 Managing the Software.
The NE configuration data is backed up. For details, refer to 1.6.2 Backing Up and
Restoring the Configuration File.
Context
Note:
Ensure that each step is successful before you perform the next step.
Steps
1. Save the NE version file under the backup directory in the FTP server.
11-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
In the Windows OS, the NE version file is saved under C:\ftpdir\uni\vers

ion of the NMS server.
In the Linux OS, the NE version file is saved under /export/home/ftpdir/u
ni/version of the NMS server.
2. In the NetNumen U31 Topology Management window, right-click the ZXA10

C300, and select System Management > Software Management. The Software
Management window is displayed, see Figure 11-3.
Figure 11-3 Software Management Window
3. On the Software Archive tab, click Download to download the version file from the
NMS server to the NE. For details, refer to 1.6.1 Managing the Software.
4. Click Synchronize to synchronize the version file between the active and standby
main control cards. For details, refer to 1.6.1 Managing the Software.
5. Click Copy Software to Card to update the Boot versions of all online cards, including
the switching and control card. For details, refer to 1.6.1 Managing the Software.
6. In the NE Rack window, right-click the active main control card, and select Reboot
System.
After the upgrade is successful, the version file is listed on the Running Software tab.
End of Steps
11.5 Checking the Policy Execution

This procedure describes how to verify the execution of the default task management
policies.
11-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Prerequisite
l
l
l
The Running Configuration Save To Flash policy is configured.

The Data Configuration Backup policy is configured.
The Synchronize Configuration Data Policy is configured.
Steps
1. Verify that the Running Configuration Save To Flash Policy is correctly executed.
Note:
After the policy tasks are set on the NMS, the Running Configuration Save To Flash
Policy periodically delivers the command to the NE, and the NE then saves the
configuration data from the memory to the NE flash. This avoids data loss when the
NE is restarted abnormally.
It is recommended to execute this policy at 18:00 every day.
a. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, select

Maintenance > Task Management.
The Task Management window is
Figure 11-4 Task Management
b. In the Task Management navigation tree, double-click Task Management >

Access Network > AccessLayerDevice_Running Configuration Save To
Flash Policy. The policy tasks are displayed in the right pane.
11-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
c. Double-click a policy task. The View Policy dialog box is displayed. Verify that
the policy task configuration is correct.
d. Right-click a policy task and select Query Detail. The Policy Log window is
displayed.
e. Select the query conditions, and then click Query. View the policy execution
information. Verify that the last execution time is correct. Troubleshoot the NE
that fails to execute the policy task.
2. Verify that the Data Configuration Backup Policy is correctly executed.
Note:
After the policy tasks are set on the NMS, the Data Configuration Backup Policy
periodically uploads the NE configuration data to the specified File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) server, which is generally the NMS server. This can restores the NE
configuration data quickly on data loss.
It is recommended to execute this policy at 00:00 every day.

displayed.
b. In the Task Management navigation tree, select Task Management > Access
Network > AccessLayerDevice_Data Configuration Backup Policy. The
policy tasks are displayed in the right pane.
displayed.
3. Verify that the Synchronize Configuration Data Policy is correctly executed.
11-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
After the policy tasks are set on the NMS, the Synchronize Configuration Data
Policy periodically synchronizes the NE configuration data to the database. The data
synchronized to the database is used for statistics and query.
This policy can be set according to the statistics and query frequency.
recommended to execute this policy once a week at non-work time.
It is

displayed.
b. In the Task Management navigation tree, select Task Management > Access
Network > AccessLayerDevice_Data Synchronize Configuration Data Policy.
The policy tasks are displayed in the right pane.
displayed.
End of Steps
11.6 Managing Logs

This procedure describes how to query and manage the operation logs, security logs, and
system logs.
Steps
1. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, select Security > Log
Management. The Log Management window is displayed, see Figure 11-5.
11-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 11-5 NetNumen U31 Unified Management System WindowLog

Management
2. Query the operation logs, security logs, and system logs in a specified period. Analyze
and handle the logs that reflect the effect on the system security.
3. Customize the query conditions. The following takes operation logs as an example.
Note:
If the default query conditions fail to meet the requirements, you can customize the
query conditions.
a. In the Log Management navigation tree, right-click Custom Query and select
New Operation Log Query. The Set Operation Log Query Conditions dialog
box is displayed.
b. On the Basic tab, configure the basic information on the query conditions.
c. Click the Advanced tab, configure the advanced information on the query
conditions.
d. Click OK. The query result is displayed in the right pane of the Log Management
window.
End of Steps
11-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
11-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 12
Other System Operations

Table of Contents
NetNumen U31 Configuration Center .......................................................................12-1
Deleting Temporary Files........................................................................................12-16
Backing Up and Restoring the NetNumen U31 Databases .....................................12-18
Exporting Diagnosis Logs.......................................................................................12-27
12.1 NetNumen U31 Configuration Center

In the configuration center, you can configure the global attributes and customized
attributes of the NetNumen U31 NMS, such as the system name, NMS database, FTP
account, log saving time, NTP parameters of the operating system, and NMS file backup
attributes.
12.1.1 Starting the Configuration Center

This procedure describes how to start the NetNumen U31 configuration center.
The following parameters and services can be configured through the configuration center:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
NMS server system backup parameters

Server process instances
FTP service
Trap filter mode
MOC type
MOC name rule
Database connection
OS NTP parameters
Prerequisite
l
l
The NetNumen U31 server is terminated.

The NetNumen U31 client is terminated.
Context
Before configuring parameters in the configuration center, terminate the NMS Server first.
Start the NMS server after the configuration is completed. If the NMS server is running
and you start the configuration center by force, the system prompts a warning, see Figure
12-1, and the configuration items cannot take effect.
12-1
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-1 Warning
Table 12-1 shows how to start the configuration center in Solaris and Windows.
Table 12-1 Starting the Configuration Center
Operating System
Startup Procedure
Solaris
Go to the NMS installation path /netnumen/ems/bin, and then run

configcenter.sh according to the operation prompts, such as:
bash-3.00# cd export/home/netnumen/ems/bin
bash-3.00# ./configcenter.sh
Windows
Go to the NMS installation path \netnumen\ems\bin, double-click

configcenter.bat.
Double-click the NetNumen Config Center shortcut icon (
).
Note:
Before the NMS installation is completed, the configuration center is started automatically
for the users to configure parameters.
12.1.2 Configuring the Backup Parameters of the NMS Server

Database
This procedure describes how to configure the backup parameters of the NMS server
database. The backup parameters of the NMS Server database are as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
The period of basic DB backup

The period of whole DB backup
The period of file backup
Days of keeping log data in database
Days of keeping history alarm and notification in database
12-2
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 12 Other System Operations
Prerequisite
The NetNumen Configuration Center window is open.
Context
This section takes The period of whole DB backup as an example.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > Common Configuration >
Common Property.
2. In the Server tab in the right pane, select Global Configuration > System Backup
> Task Management: The period of whole DB backup. The period parameters are
Figure 12-2 Network Configuration Center WindowServer Tab
3. In the Value of config text box, enter the backup execution period.
4. Click Save.
End of Steps
12.1.3 Configuring Server Process Instances

This procedure describes how to add, modify, and delete server process instances.
Prerequisite
12-3
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Context
The NetNumen U31 Server supports multiprocess deployment. When installing the NMS
Server, you can select that different installation scenarios are automatically deployed with
different process instances.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > Common Configuration >
Console Configuration. The console parameters are displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 12-3.
Figure 12-3 Console Configuration

l Add a console instance.
i.
Right-click All console instance(s) and select Add console instance. The
Add console instance dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Set the addresses of the active and standby machines that execute the
console instance, and then click OK.
Modify a console instance.

i.
Right-click the console, and select Update console instance. The Update
console instance dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Modify the addresses of the active and standby machines that execute the
console instance, and then click OK.
Delete a console instance.

i.
Right-click the console, and select Remove console instance. A dialog box
is displayed for your confirmation.
12-4
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
ii.
l
Click OK.
Add a process instance.

i.
Right-click the console, and select Add process instance. The Add process
instance dialog box is displayed.
ii.
Set the process name and instance, and then click OK.
Delete a process instance.

i.
Right-click the process instance, and select Remove process instance. A

dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.
ii.
Click Yes.
3. Click Close.
End of Steps
12.1.4 Configuring the FTP Service

This procedure describes how to configure the FTP accounts.
FTP accounts refer to the FTP users that access the NMS. They are used for the FTP
transmission of the configuration file and version file between the NEs and NMS. For
example, the configuration data backup policy needs to back up the configuration files
in FTP mode. The NMS Server works as the FTP server to provide the FTP service.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation pane, select Product Configuration > Wireline Common
Configuration > FTP/SFTP Service. The FTP/SFTP service parameters are
12-5
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-4 FTP/SFTP Service Parameters
When the NMS server acts as the FTP server, different NE types have different main
directories, user names, and passwords.
To use the outside FTP server, all accounts in the list must have been configured in
the FTP server.
l
l
Note:
For Windows OS, it is recommended to use the FTP service provided by the NMS
Server.
For Solaris OS, it is recommended to use the FTP service provided by Solaris.
2. Configure the FTP parameters.

a. Select the FTP configuration of an NE, and click Modify. The Modify FTP/SFTP
User dialog box is displayed, see Figure 12-5.
12-6
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-5 Modify FTP/SFTP User Dialog Box
Note:
When you are uploading or downloading the version files, the NMS lists
all the files under the FTP user directory according to the settings on the
configuration center, and then sends commands to the NE. If the path set on
NetNumen Configuration Center is inconsistent with that corresponds to
the FTP user, the version file cannot be uploaded or downloaded.
When multiple IP addresses are configured on the NMS Server, you need to
change the IP address of the FTP user and select the IP address that connects
to the NE device, to ensure correct FTP operations.
b. Modify the FTP parameters, and click Save.

3. Click Close.
End of Steps
12.1.5 Configuring the Trap Filter Mode

This procedure describes how to configure the trap filer mode. You can then filter the
unnecessary trap messages.
Prerequisite
12-7
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Context
In the PON, the quantity of the ONU devices, especially the FTTH ONU devices, is large.
If the NMS monitors the alarms of all the devices in real time, the quantity of the reported
alarms is huge. This may cause difficulty in alarm analysis for the maintenance personnel,
and affects the NMS Server performance. You can set the trap filer mode for the NetNumen
U31 NMS to filter the trap messages.
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > Product Configuration
> Access Network EMS Configuration > Unconcerned SNMP Trap Shield. The
SNMP Trap shielding parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 12-6.
Figure 12-6 Trap Filter Configuration
2. Configure the parameters. For a description of some parameters, refer to Table 12-2.
Table 12-2 SNMP Trap Filter Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Enable
Shields most invalid and useless Trap messages. It is applicable in

the actual engineering scenario.
Disable
Applicable in NMS test scenarios where various SNMP Trap

messages need to be reported.
3. Click Save.
End of Steps
12-8
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
12.1.6 Configuring the MOC Type

This procedure describes how to select the NE types and networks to be displayed on the
NMS GUI.
Configuring the Managed Object Class (MOC) types can filter the unnecessary NE types
on the client window. The access devices include the PON, DSLAM, MSAN/MSAG, and
EOC devices. Network objects include the EMS server, IP node, and virtual NEs.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > Product Configuration >
MOC Type Configuration. The MOC type configuration parameters are displayed in
Figure 12-7 MOC Type Configuration
2. In the right pane, select the MOC types. In the PON, you can select to filter the
DSLAM and MSAN/MSAG devices. When you creating an NE, querying alarm data
and performance data, the filtered NE types are not displayed.
12-9
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
Note:
EMS Server is mandatory. If it is not selected, the configuration does not take
effect.
By default, all types of access devices and MOCs are displayed.
3. Click Save.
End of Steps
12.1.7 Configuring the MOC Name Rule

This procedure describes how to configure the rule for naming MOCs on the topology
management window of the NMS.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > Products Configuration >
Rule Configuration of MOC Name. The MOC name rule parameters are displayed
Figure 12-8 Rule Configuration of MOC Name
2. Click the Name: rule cell. From the NE Name: NE name drop-down list, select NE
Name(IP Address:) NE name (IP) or NE Name: NE name.
12-10
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
3. Click Save.
End of Steps
12.1.8 Configuring the Database Connection

This procedure describes the connection configuration of the Microsoft SQL Server and
Oracle databases.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > Database Configuration
> Database Connection Configuration. The database connection parameters are
Figure 12-9 Database Connection Configuration Tab
2. From the Database Type drop-down list, select the type of the database to be
connected. Then configure the parameters as required.
Table 12-3 lists the parameters for the Microsoft SQL server database connection
configuration.
Table 12-3 Microsoft SQL Server Database Parameters
Parameter
Description
Database type
Microsoft SQL Server

12-11
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Parameter
Description
Database IP or Hostname
If the database and the NMS are installed on the

same host, the IP address can be set to 127.0.0.1. It
is recommended to set the address to the actual IP
address of the host.
Database Port
Default: 1433
Database superuser name
sa
Password
netnumen
Table 12-4 lists the parameters for the Oracle database connection configuration.
Table 12-4 Oracle Database Parameters
Parameter
Description
Database Type
Oracle
Database IP or Hostname
No matter whether the database and the NMS

are installed on the same host, the IP address
must be set to the actual IP address of the host.
Database Port
Default: 1521
Oracle SID or Service Name
Database name
Default: uep
Database Superuser Name
Default: system
Password
Configured as required
3. Click Test Database Connection. If the connection fails, check the configuration and
network.
Note:
When you test the database connection in Oracle, the system may prompt the following
message.
It indicates that the database connection is normal, but the network service name of
the Oracle database does not meet the NMS requirement. You need to modify the
network service name.
12-12
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
In the Oracle10g standard version, you can go to /export/home/oracle/produc

t/10.2.0/network/admin, use the vi editor to open the tnsnames.ora file, and
then add the network service name of the uep NMS IP address as follows:
4. Click Save.
End of Steps
Follow-Up Action
If the database connection fails, check the following points:
l
l
l
Whether the database server is installed with the latest upgrade patches. (SQL Server
2000 needs to be installed with Service Pack 4 and SQL Server 2005 needs to be
installed with Service Pack 3.)
Whether the IP address, port number, administrator name and password of the
database server are correctly configured.
Whether the database server is started. Refer to the steps listed in Table 12-5.
Table 12-5 Checking Database Server Status
Database Type
Step
MS SQL Server
Select Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 >
Configuration Tools > SQL Server Configuration Manager
to check whether the SQL Server is running.
Oracle
Log in to the NMS Server where the database is, and then
carry out the following command:
$ ps ef | grep ora
Check whether the Oracle process ora_*_uep is started.
If the Oracle database server is not started, start it manually.

Telnet to the NMS Server where the database is installed.
commands:
Carry out the following
12-13
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

$ lsnrctl start
// Start the monitor.
$ sqlplus /nolog
// Access the sqlplus environment.
nolog indicates not to log in to the database server.

SQL> connect /as sysdba
// Connect and manage the database as the administrator (sysdba).
// Type the user name (system) and password (netnumen)
SQL> startup
// Start the database server.
SQL> exit
// Exit sqlplus.
12.1.9 Configuring the OS NTP Parameters

This procedure describes how to configure the OS time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)
service.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > OS NTP Configuration >
OS NTP Configuration. The OS NTP parameters are displayed in the right pane, see
Figure 12-10.
Figure 12-10 OS NTP Configuration
2. Configure the OS NTP parameters.

Table 12-6 lists the NTP parameters.
12-14
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Table 12-6 NTP Configuration Parameters

Parameter
Description
Enable external clock
The OS time of the NMS server is synchronized with the external
source
NTP server.
To enable the external clock source, you need to configure Main
clock server IP and Standby clock server IP (optional).
Enable the local clock
The NMS server uses its own clock.
source
NTP service
To start or stop the OS NTP service.
3. Click Apply.
End of Steps
12.1.10 Configuring the System Backup FTP Parameters

This procedure describes how to configure the output location of the NMS Server logs and
database backup file.
Prerequisite
Steps
1. From the navigation tree, select Configuration Center > System backup FTP
configuration > System backup FTP configuration, see Figure 12-11.
12-15
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-11 System Backup FTP Configuration

Table 12-7 lists the parameters for the system backup FTP configuration.
Table 12-7 Parameters for System Backup FTP Configuration
Parameter
Description
Output to Remote Server
To export the NMS Server logs and database backup file to the
specified FTP server.
Output to Local Server
To export the NMS Server logs and database backup file to the
local NMS Server. For the detailed configuration, refer to .
3. Click Modify to save the configuration.

End of Steps
12.2 Deleting Temporary Files

You can delete the temporary files that are created when the NetNumen U31 NMS is
running. The NetNumen U31 NMS returns to the initial status after the temporary files are
deleted.
Temporary files are created after the NetNumen U31 NMS operates for a period of time.
You can delete the temporary files so that the NetNumen U31 NMS can return to the initial
status.
Application Scenario
You can delete the temporary files in the following application scenarios:
12-16
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
l
l
l
The NMS configuration file is modified as required.

A large number of temporary files are copied to the destination directory when the
NMS Client program is copied and installed.
Patches are installed on the NMS Server.
Steps
Caution!
Before deleting the temporary files, terminate the NMS processes first.
1. Go to the NetNumen U31 installation path .\netnumen\ems\tools\.

2. Run the batch file del_tmp.bat to delete the temporary files, see Figure 12-12.
Figure 12-12 Deleting Temporary Files
Note:
In the Solaris operating system, you can run the del_tmp.sh file under the same directory
to delete the temporary files.
12-17
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
12.3 Backing Up and Restoring the NetNumen U31

Databases
You can back up the NetNumen U31 databases periodically to restore the NetNumen U31
in a short time after the system breaks down.
Context
The NetNumen U31 databases are as follows:
l
UEP4X database
Common database, saves the topology data, NE data, security management data,
and operation logs.
CAFFM4X database
Alarm database, saves the device alarm code information, alarm mask rule
configuration data, current alarms, history alarms, and notifications.
UEPPM4X database
Performance database, saves the performance configuration and performance task
data
N3COMMON database
Common database for fixed network products, saves the configuration information,
such as the policy tasks.
AN database
Common database for access device management, saves the configuration
management information and resource information for the access devices.
ANPM database
Access device performance database, saves the performance collection data and
performance report data for the access devices.
At present, the NetNumen U31 supports the following data backup modes:
l
Basic data backup

This mode backs up all the basic data of the NetNumen U31. Only the data records
are backed up, excluding the table structure and the history data, such as the history
alarms, notifications, logs, and performance original data. Such history data is backed
up independently.
To restore the data, you can select the backup files in \netnumen\ems\ums-serv
er\utils\usf-backup to restore the data offline.
Whole database structure backup

This mode backs up all the database structures, including all the database object
structures, used by the NetNumen U31.
12-18
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
To restore the whole database structure, you can select the backup files in \netnum
en\ems\ums-server\utils\usf-backup to restore the data offline.
Backing Up the NetNumen U31 Database

You can back up the database in the following ways:
l
Back up the database through the backup tasks.

The database backup tasks are installed automatically with the NMS and they are
executed automatically. You can view the task execution logs or suspend tasks.
However, the task properties cannot be modified and the tasks cannot be deleted.
Check the execution of the basic data backup.

1. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, select
The Task Management tab is
Figure 12-13 Task Management Tab
2. From the navigation tree, select Task Management > Common Task >
Configuration Data Backup > Backup Basic Data. The basic data backup
information, such as task description, backup path, and period, is displayed
12-19
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-14 Basic Data Backup Information
Check the execution of the whole database data backup.

1. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System window, select Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management tab is displayed, see
Figure 12-13.
2. From the navigation tree, select Task Management > Common Task >
Version and Database Backup > Backup Whole DB Structure. The
database structure backup information, such as task description, backup
path, and period, is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 12-15.
Figure 12-15 Whole Database Structure Backup Information
Note:
The period of the backup task can be set in the Configuration Center.
12-20
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Execute the database backup task manually.
Back up basic data.

Maintenance > System Backup and Restore. The TSystem Backup and
Restore tab is displayed, see Figure 12-16.
Figure 12-16 System Backup and Restore Tab
2. From the navigation tree, select Backup and Restore > Backup > > Backup
Basic Data. The basic data backup information is displayed in the right pane,
see Figure 12-17.
12-21
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
You can click Backup File Download Path at Client and select the directory
for downloading the backup file.
3. Click Execute to back up the basic data immediately.
Back up the whole database structure.

Maintenance > System Backup and Restore. The System Backup and
Restore tab is displayed, see Figure 12-16.
Figure 12-18 System Backup and Restore Tab
2. From the navigation tree, select Backup and Restore > Backup > >
Backup Whole DB Structure. The database structure backup information
is displayed in the right pane, see Figure 12-17.
12-22
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Note:
You can click Backup File Download Path at Client and select the directory
for downloading the backup file.
3. Click Execute to back up the whole database structure immediately.

l
Use the offline restore tool to back up the database.

Before performing this operation, terminate the NetNumen Server.
1. Go to the NMS installation path \netnumen\ems\ums-server\utils\usfbackup, and then run the run.bat file (run.sh in Solaris). The Database
Setting dialog box is displayed, see Figure 12-20.
12-23
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-20 Database Setting
Note:
If the offline restore tool is used initially, the Database Setting dialog box is
displayed. Otherwise, the NetNumen Offline Restore Tool window is displayed.
2. Set the database login parameters, and click OK. The NetNumen Offline
Restore Tool window is displayed, see Figure 12-21.
12-24
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-21 NetNumen Offline Restore Tool
3. From the Restore and Backup pane on the left, choose Backup Basic Data and
Backup Whole DB Structure. Select a directory for Directory for file backup,
and then click Execute to start backup.
Restoring the NetNumen U31 Database

1. Go to the NMS installation path \netnumen\ems\ums-server\utils\usf-back
up, and then run the run.bat file (run.sh in Solaris). The Database Setting dialog
box is displayed, see Figure 12-22.
12-25
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-22 Database Setting
Note:
If the offline restore tool is used initially, the Database Setting dialog box is displayed.
Otherwise, the NetNumen Offline Restore Tool window is displayed.
2. Set the database login parameters, and click OK. The NetNumen Offline Restore
Tool window is displayed, see Figure 12-23.
12-26
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Figure 12-23 NetNumen Offline Restore Tool
3. From the Restore and Backup pane on the left, choose Restore Whole DB
Structure. Select a directory for Directory for file restoration, and then click
Execute to restore the whole database structure.
Note:
If the NetNumen NMS is installed before the data restoration, you do not need to
restore the whole database structure and only need to restore the basic data.
4. From the Restore and Backup pane on the left, choose Restore Basic Data. Select
a directory for Directory for file restoration, and then click Execute to restore the
basic data.
12.4 Exporting Diagnosis Logs

When the NMS Server fails to operate normally, for example, the server runs slowly or
crashes, you can view the NMS operation logs to diagnose service faults. You can obtain
the operation logs.
Context
The NMS Server logs are saved as follows:
l
The logs for different processes are saved in different locations. For example, the
logs of the anemf process are saved in \netnumen\ems\ums-server\works\an
12-27
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
emf0\anemf01\log. The logs for other processes are saved in \netnumen\ems

\ums-server\works\.
The NMS Server backs up the logs at 00:00 everyday, and saves the backup logs in
\netnumen\ems\ums-server\rundata\umd\output\timer.
Steps
1. Go to the NMS installation path \netnumen\ems\ums-client\tools\, and then
run the GetNmsServerlog.bat file (GetNmsServerlog.sh in Solaris).
2. Enter the NMS Server IP address, and then press Enter, see Figure 12-24.
Figure 12-24 Entering the NMS Server IP Address
3. Obtain the server log package logs.zip from the path \netnumen\ems\ums-cli
ent\tools\.
Note:
Before packaging the logs, you are recommended to make the fault recur so that you
can locate the fault according to the latest logs.
End of Steps
12-28
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Glossary
ACL
- Access Control List
ADSL
- Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
AG
- Access Gateway
ARP
- Address Resolution Protocol
BPDU
- Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BRAS
- Broadband Remote Access Server
CAC
- Channel Access Control
CDR
- Call Detail Record
CIST
- Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLI
- Command Line Interface
CPU
- Central Processing Unit
CoS
- Class of Service
DBA
- Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation
DHCP
- Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNS
- Domain Name Server
DSCP
- Differentiated Services Code Point
DSL
- Digital Subscriber Line
I
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
DSLAM
- Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DoS
- Denial of Service
EFM
- Ethernet in the First Mile
EPON
- Ethernet Passive Optical Network
FEC
- Forward Error Correction
FTP
- File Transfer Protocol
FTTB
- Fiber to the Building
FTTH
- Fiber to the Home
GPON
- Gigabit Passive Optical Network
GRE
- General Routing Encapsulation
HEC
- Header Error Check
IAD
- Integrated Access Device
ICMP
- Internet Control Message Protocol
IGMP
- Internet Group Management Protocol
IP
- Internet Protocol
IPTV
- Internet Protocol Television
LACP
- Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN
- Local Area Network
LMI
- Local Management Interface
II
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Glossary
MAC
- Medium Access Control
MAN
- Metropolitan Area Network
MFF
- MAC-Forced Forwarding
MG
- Media Gateway
MGC
- Media Gateway Controller
MGCP
- Media Gateway Control Protocol
MOC
- Managed Object Class
MST
- Multiple Spanning Tree
MSTP
- Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MVLAN
- Multicast Virtual Local Area Network
NE
- Network Element
NM
- Network Management
NMS
- Network Management System
NSF
- Non-Stop Forwarding
NTP
- Network Time Protocol
OAM
- Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OLT
- Optical Line Terminal
OMCI
- ONT Management Control Interface
ONU
- Optical Network Unit
III
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
OS
- Operating System
OSPF
- Open Shortest Path First
PIM
- Protocol Independent Multicast
PON
- Passive Optical Network
PPPoE
- Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet
PVC
- Permanent Virtual Channel
PVID
- Port VLAN ID
QoS
- Quality of Service
RSTP
- Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTP
- Real-time Transport Protocol
RTT
- Round Trip Time
SIP
- Session Initiation Protocol
SMS
- Service Management System
SNMP
- Simple Network Management Protocol
SP
- Strict Priority
SS
- Soft Switch
SS
- Subscriber Station
SSTP
- Single Spanning Tree Protocol
STP
- Spanning Tree Protocol
IV
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)
Glossary
TCP
- Transfer Control Protocol
TLS
- TransportLayer Security
TPID
- Tag Protocol Identifier
ToS
- Type of Service
UAPS
- Uplink Auto Protection Switching
UDP
- User Datagram Protocol
UNI
- User Network Interface
VLAN
- Virtual Local Area Network
VOD
- Video On Demand
VRRP
- Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
VoIP
- Voice over Internet Protocol
WRR
- Weighted Round Robin
V
|2012-11-30 (R1.0)

SJ-20120615152640-007-ZXA10 PON Optical Access Convergence Equipment NetNumen Help (NetNumenU31R20V12.12.40)

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

SJ-20120615152640-007-ZXA10 PON Optical Access Convergence Equipment NetNumen Help (NetNumenU31R20V12.12.40)

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ZXA10 PON

Optical Access Convergence Equipment

Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by

contractual confidentiality obligations.

Publishing Date: 2012-11-30 (R1.0)

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Chapter 2 Protocol and Service Configuration........................................ 2-1

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

2.2.5 Configuring the 1:1 VLAN ....................................................................... 2-10

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

2.10.2 Configuring Anti-DoS Management.......................................................2-107

Chapter 3 Device Configuration and Management ................................. 3-1

Chapter 4 Diagnosis Configuration and Management............................ 4-1

Chapter 5 OLT Commissioning Configuration ........................................ 5-1

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

6.1.3 NE Creation ............................................................................................. 6-4

Chapter 7 ONU Pre-deployment................................................................ 7-1

Chapter 9 FTTH ONU Service Provisioning ............................................. 9-1

Chapter 10 Alarm and Fault Handling .................................................... 10-1

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

10.4 Handling an ONU Fault................................................................................... 10-8

Chapter 11 Routine Maintenance ............................................................ 11-1

Chapter 12 Other System Operations..................................................... 12-1

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

1.1 Viewing and Configuring the System Information

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXA10 PON NetNumen Help

Figure 1-1 System Information Dialog Box

3. View and configure the system parameters.

1.2 Hardware Management

Adding or deleting a card

1.2.1 Adding or Deleting a Card

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Chapter 1 System Management

Figure 1-3 shows the Rack window of ZXA10 C300.

Figure 1-4 shows the Rack window of ZXA10 C320.

Figure 1-5 shows the Rack window of ZXA10 C220.

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXA10 PON NetNumen Help

Figure 1-5 Rack Window of ZXA10 C220

2. Add or delete a card.

Select a card, and then click OK.

Right-click a card and select Delete Card.

The Confirm dialog box is

1.2.2 Resetting or Swapping a Card

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Chapter 1 System Management

Figure 1-6 Reset/Swap Card Window

1.3 Managing Cards

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXA10 PON NetNumen Help

Figure 1-7 Card Manager Window of ZXA10 C300

Figure 1-8 shows the Card Manager window of ZXA10 C320.

Figure 1-9 shows the Card Manager window of ZXA10 C220.

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Chapter 1 System Management

Figure 1-9 Card Manager Window of ZXA10 C220

View and handle the current active alarms.

To view the active alarms by severity.

To view the active alarms by acknowledgement state.

To view the active alarms by visibility.

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXA10 PON NetNumen Help